Users’ guide

Tera Analysis Ltd.

 ™
QuickField
Finite Element Analysis System

Version 6.5 User's Guide.

Tera Analysis Ltd.

 Copyright © 2021, Tera Analysis Ltd.
All Rights Reserved.
Information contained in this document is subject to change without
notice.

Acknowledgments:
TetGen (www.tetgen.org)
CGAL (www.cgal.org)
VTK (www.vtk.org)
C3D Toolkit (www.c3dlabs.com)
VisTools/Mesh (www.vki.com)

Tera Analysis Ltd.

Knasterhovvej 21
DK-5700 Svendborg
Denmark
https://quickfield.com

QuickField is a trademark of Tera Analysis Ltd.

DXF is a trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks, and Microsoft Word is a trademark
of Microsoft Corporation.

All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners
 iii

Contents

About This Manual 13

What Is QuickField? .............................................13
How to Use this Manual .......................................13
Conventions ..........................................................15
Chapter 1 Getting Started 16
Required Hardware Configuration ........................16
QuickField Installation ..........................................16
Autorun Applet .............................................17
Using QuickField Setup Program .................18
QuickField password (for Professional version
only) ....................................................19
Modifying, Repairing and Removing
QuickField ..........................................20
Installing Several Versions of QuickField
Simultaneously ...................................21
Application-Wide Options ............................21

Chapter 2 Introductory Guide 24

Basic Organization of QuickField ........................24
Window Management Tips ...................................27
Problem Window ..........................................27
Document Windows .....................................28
Tool Windows...............................................28
iv Contents

Properties Window .......................................29

Overview of Analysis Capabilities .......................29
Magnetostatic Analysis .................................29
Transient Magnetic Analysis ........................31
AC Magnetic Analysis ..................................32
Electrostatic Analysis ...................................34
DC Conduction Analysis ..............................35
AC Conduction Analysis ..............................36
Transient Electric Field.................................37
Thermal Analysis ..........................................38
Stress Analysis ..............................................40
Chapter 3 Problem Description 41
Structure of Problem Database .............................41
Editing Problems ...................................................42
Editing problem description properties ........43
Establishing Coupling Links.........................44
Setting Time Parameters ...............................47
Automatic Time Step Size Calculation in
Transient Analysis ..............................48
Choosing Length Units .................................50
Cartesian vs. Polar Coordinates ....................51
Problem Properties Window .........................52
Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition 54
Terminology ..........................................................54
Geometry Description ...........................................56
 Contents v

Creating Model Objects ................................56

Basic Objects Manipulation ..........................59
Drag and Drop and Clipboard Editing ..........65
Undo/Redo Operations .................................75
Definition of Properties, Field Sources and
Boundary Conditions ..........................79
Meshing Technology ....................................79
Geometry Model Properties Window ...........82
Tuning the View of the Model ..............................83
Zooming ........................................................84
Model Discretization Visibility ....................85
Background Grid...........................................85
Exchanging Model Fragments with Other
Programs........................................................87
Importing Model Fragments from DXF Files
............................................................87
Exporting Model Fragments to DXF Files ...88
Copying Model Picture to Windows
Clipboard ............................................89
Exporting Model Picture...............................89
Printing the Model ................................................90
Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description 91
Editing properties of materials and boundary
conditions ......................................................93
Creating a New Label ...........................................94
Editing Label Data ................................................94
vi Contents

Editing Data in DC and Transient Magnetics

............................................................95
Editing Data in AC Magnetics ....................101
Editing Data in Electrostatics .....................107
Editing Data in DC Conduction Problems .110
Editing Data in AC Conduction Problems .112
Editing Data in Transient Electric Analysis
..........................................................115
Editing Data in Heat Transfer Problems.....117
Editing Data in Stress Analysis ..................120
Periodic Boundary Conditions ....................124
Editing Curves ............................................126
Temperature Units ......................................127
Using Formulas ...........................................129
Copying, Renaming and Deleting Labels ...........143
Chapter 6 Electric Circuit Definition 145
What is a Circuit? ................................................145
How to Create a Circuit ......................................146
Adding Electric Components to the Circuit
..........................................................146
Specifying Properties for Circuit Components
..........................................................147
Adding Components Representing Model
Blocks to the Circuit .........................149
Connecting Circuit Components with Wires
..........................................................149
Editing Circuit .....................................................150
 Contents vii

Moving, Copying and Resizing Circuit

Elements ...........................................150
Rotating Circuit Components .....................152
Deleting Circuit Elements...........................152
Chapter 7 Solving the Problem 153
Adaptive Mesh Refinement ................................154

Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution 157

Building the Field Picture on the Screen ............158
Interpreted Quantities .................................158
Field Presentation Methods ........................166
Field Picture Constructing ..........................168
Zooming ......................................................172
Selecting a Time Layer ...............................172
Animation ...................................................173
Calculator Window .............................................174
Examining Local Field Data ...............................175
Analysis of Connected Electric Circuit ..............176
Current and Voltage Time Plots for the
Circuit Elements ...............................178
Parameter Calculation Wizards...........................180
Inductance Wizard ......................................181
Capacitance Wizard ....................................185
Impedance Wizard ......................................187
Editing Contours .................................................188
X-Y Plots.............................................................190
X-Y Plot Control.........................................191
viii Contents

Calculating Integrals ...........................................192

Data Tables..........................................................227
Table Columns ............................................228
Table Rows .................................................229
Plots and Tables versus Time .............................230
Time Plot.....................................................230
Time Plot Curves ........................................232
Time Dependencies Table ..........................233
Controlling the Legend Display ..........................235
Trajectories of Charged Particles ........................235
Theoretical Background..............................235
Using Trajectories .......................................237
Export of Field Calculation Results ....................240
Printing the Postprocessor Pictures ............241
Copying the Postprocessor Pictures ...........241
Field Export into File ..................................243
Additional Analysis Opportunities .....................244
Field Distribution Along the Contour
Harmonic Analysis ...........................244
Partial Capacitance Matrix Calculation for the
System of Conductors ......................245
Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem 250
Introduction .........................................................250
Creating 3D Model by Extrusion................251
Creating 3D Model by Importing from CAD
..........................................................252
 Contents ix

2D and 3D problems ...........................................253

2D problems ................................................253
3D problems ................................................254
Problem definition – adding 3D features ............255
Geometry model in the 3D subsystem ................256
Creating 3D Model by Extrusion................257
Creating 3D Model by Importing ...............262
3D View of the Model Editor .....................265
Manipulation with 3D view ........................266
Image rotation, panning and zooming ................268
Object selection...........................................271
Hidden and Transparent Bodies .................273
Cutting the Model by a Plane .....................274
Text label assignment to the 3D model objects
..........................................................276
Control of the Density of 3D Mesh ............277
3D Finite Element Mesh .............................278
Editing material properties and boundary
conditions .........................................280
Solving 3D problems ..........................................280
Result analysis.....................................................280
Calculation results window.........................281
Result presentation modes control ..............282
Field view presentations .............................284
Local field values calculation .....................305
Integral calculation .....................................306
x Contents

Chapter 10 Add-ins 309

Add-ins Available in QuickField ........................310
Advanced Add-in Features .................................311
Adding, Editing and Deleting Add-ins .......311
Creating Your Own Add-ins.......................311
Add-in Properties Dialog Box ....................312
Add-in Menu Item Dialog Box ...................313

Chapter 11 Theoretical Description 315

Magnetostatics ....................................................316
Field Sources...............................................317
Boundary Conditions ..................................318
Permanent Magnets ....................................320
Calculated Physical Quantities ...................321
Inductance Calculation ...............................324
Transient Magnetics ............................................325
Field Sources...............................................327
Boundary Conditions ..................................329
Permanent Magnets ....................................331
Calculated Physical Quantities ...................332
AC Magnetic .......................................................335
Field Sources...............................................338
Boundary Conditions ..................................340
Calculated Physical Quantities ...................342
Impedance Calculation ...............................346
Electrostatics .......................................................347
Field Sources...............................................348
 Contents xi

Boundary Conditions ..................................348

Calculated Physical Quantities ...................350
Capacitance Calculation .............................352
DC Conduction Analysis ....................................353
Field Sources...............................................354
Boundary Conditions ..................................355
Calculated Physical Quantities ...................356
AC Conduction Analysis ....................................357
Field Sources...............................................358
Boundary Conditions ..................................359
Calculated Physical Quantities ...................360
Transient Electric Analysis .................................363
Field Sources...............................................363
Boundary Conditions ..................................364
Calculated Physical Quantities ...................365
Heat Transfer.......................................................368
Heat Sources ...............................................369
Boundary Conditions ..................................370
Calculated Physical Quantities ...................373
Stress Analysis ....................................................374
Displacement, Strain and Stress .................374
Thermal Strain ............................................379
External Forces ...........................................380
Restriction Conditions ................................381
Calculated Physical Quantities ...................382
Coupled Problems ...............................................385
xii Contents

Importing Joule Heat to Heat Transfer

Problem.............................................386
Importing Temperature Field to Stress
Analysis Problem .............................387
Importing Magnetic Forces to Stress Analysis
Problem.............................................387
Importing Electric Forces to Stress Analysis
Problem.............................................388
Importing Magnetic State to DC or AC
Magnetic Problem ............................388
Importing Temperature Field to AC Magnetic
Problem.............................................389

Index 390
 13

About This Manual

What Is QuickField?
Welcome to QuickField Finite Elements Analysis System.
QuickField is a PC-oriented interactive environment for
electromagnetic, thermal and stress analysis. Standard
analysis types include:
• Electrostatics.
• DC and AC conduction analysis.
• Linear and nonlinear DC and transient magnetics.
• AC magnetics (involving eddy current analysis).
• Linear and nonlinear, steady state and transient heat
transfer and diffusion.
• Linear stress analysis.
• Coupled problems.
During a 15-minute session, you can describe the problem
(geometry, material properties, sources and other
conditions), obtain solution with high accuracy and analyze
field details looking through full color picture. With
QuickField, complicated field problems can be solved on
your PC instead of large mainframes or workstations.

How to Use this Manual

This manual has eleven chapters:
14 About This Manual

Chapter 1, “Getting Started”, describes first steps of using

QuickField. In this chapter, you will learn how to install and
start the package.
Chapter 2, “Introductory Guide”, briefly describes the
organization of QuickField and gives an overview of
analysis capabilities.
Chapter 3, “Problem Description”, explains how to
specify the analysis type and general problem features.
Chapter 4, “Model Geometry Definition”, explains how to
describe geometry of the model, build the mesh, and define
material properties and boundary conditions.
Chapter 5, “Problem Parameters Description”, introduces
non-geometric data file organization, and the way to attach
this file to the model.
Chapter 6, “Electric Circuit Definition”, describes the
circuit schematic editor.
Chapter 7, “Solving the Problem”, tells you how to start
the solver to obtain analysis results.
Chapter 8, “Analyzing Solution”, introduces QuickField
Postprocessor, its features and capabilities.
Chapter 9, “Working with 3D Problem”, describes
QuickField capabilities for solving and analyzing three-
dimensional problems.
Chapter 10, “Add-ins”, describes QuickField add-ins, and
methods of their creation and use.
Chapter 11, “Theoretical Description”, contains
mathematical formulations for all problem types that can be
 Conventions 15

solved with QuickField. Read this chapter to learn if

QuickField can solve your particular problem.

Conventions
In this manual we use SMALL CAPITAL LETTERS to specify
the names of keys on your keyboard. For example, ENTER,
ESC, or ALT. Four arrows on the keyboard, collectively
named the DIRECTION keys, are named for the direction the
key points: UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW, RIGHT ARROW, and
LEFT ARROW.
A plus sign (+) between key names means to hold down the
first key while you press the second key. A comma (,)
between key names means to press the keys one after the
other.
Bold type is used for QuickField menu and dialog options.
 16

C H A P T E R 1

Getting Started

Required Hardware Configuration

Operating Windows 7 Service Pack 1 or later,
System (64- Windows 8.1,
bit versions Windows 10.
only) with
latest
updates:
Video driver should support OpenGL
3.3 or higher for 3D analysis
Peripherals: USB port for hardware copy-
protection key (not required for
Student’s version or workstation
installations of networked
Professional versions).

QuickField Installation
QuickField can be supplied on a CD, or packed in ZIP-
archive. Depending on the format, do the following:
 QuickField Installation 17

• Professional QuickField in a ZIP-archive - unpack the

archive preserving the directory structure and run
Autorun.exe from the root of the unpacked directory tree.
• Student QuickField in a ZIP-archive - unpack the archive
in the same way and run Setup.exe.
• QuickField on a CD - insert the CD and, if not started
automatically, run Autorun.exe from the CD root.

Autorun Applet
On the left side of the Autorun screen you can see several
menu topics organized in a scrollable tree. When you
highlight a topic, additional topic-related information
appears in the bottom pane. To execute the command
associated with this topic double-click it or click Run in the
right-bottom corner of the window.
Menu topics allow you to:
• See the complete QuickField User's Guide in Adobe PDF
format (Read User’s Guide command);
• Learn QuickField interactively (Virtual classroom
command);
• Find technical support and sales contact information
(Contact Us);
• Install QuickField (Install QuickField command
group).
With the Student version of QuickField the last command
starts QuickField installer.
With QuickField Professional the installation steps depend
on the type of license you purchased. For single-user
license, choose the Single-user QuickField option below.
18 Chapter 1 Getting Started

If your QuickField is licensed for multiple users, install the

workstation component (Network: workstation option) on
every workstation, and the license server (Network: license
option) on the server computer.

Using QuickField Setup Program

QuickField installer can be launched either from the
Autorun applet or manually by running Setup.exe found in
the unpacked ZIP-archive with QuickField.

Note. Installation of QuickField always requires

administrator privileges.

First of all, installer offers to review the license agreement.

To continue the installation, you must accept its conditions
checking I accept the license agreement. That activates the
Install and the Advanced buttons. We strongly recommend
choosing Install which automatically installs all
components of QuickField in the default folder.
Still, if you want to change the installation folder, or, for
some reason, skip installation of individual components,
choose Advanced. The installer will first prompt you to
select the installation folder for QuickField and its help
system. Secondly, it will display the tree of QuickField
components. To skip installation of a component, click the
down arrow to the left of the component's name and choose
Entire feature will be unavailable. Having finished with
the tree click Install to begin the installation process.
Having transferred all necessary files to your hard drive the
installer might ask you to reboot the system. Press OK to
agree. If you have other software protected by Sentinel
 QuickField Installation 19

hardware key (e.g. another version of Professional

QuickField), installer might also ask whether you want to
upgrade the Sentinel system driver. We recommend you to
agree. Then attach the protection key to your computer (to
the license server computer in case of network license) and
wait for the notification message that the device is detected
and ready to go. After that, QuickField is ready to use.
If you met any troubles answering the questions of
QuickField Setup program you may try to find answers in
the Installation Guide.htm file in the Doc folder on your
QuickField compact disk.

QuickField password (for Professional version only)

After the end of installation you are ready to start
QuickField for the first time. Before that, you must attach
your hardware copy-protection key. Having installed the
single-user licensed QuickField attach the key to the USB
port of your computer. Otherwise, attach the key to the USB
port of the computer acting as a license server and be sure
that the license server software is properly installed and
running. This procedure is detailed in NetLicence.htm file in
the Doc folder on your QuickField compact disk.
During the first run of QuickField you must enter the
password supplied by Tera Analysis Ltd. The password is a
case insensitive string of 16 Latin letters uniquely
identifying the hardware copy-protection key and the
purchased subset of QuickField options. Every time you
change the key or the set of options you must enter the new
password to activate it.
20 Chapter 1 Getting Started

If you upgrade QuickField without changing the subset of

options, you can use the same password with the upgraded
version of QuickField. To make it possible you need to
choose Edit->Password from QuickField menu.
In its first run QuickField should not be used as automation
server (e.g. from LabelMover or ActiveField samples). In
such case its behavior would be unpredictable since there
would be no way to enter the password. To avoid this, we
recommend starting QuickField in interactive mode
immediately after the installation.

Modifying, Repairing and Removing QuickField

Having installed QuickField you can always modify or
repair its configuration or uninstall it from your computer.
To do that, open the Control Panel and start the
Add/Remove Programs (or Programs and Features,
depending on the Windows version you are using) applet.
After that, choose QuickField from the list of installed
software and choose the appropriate item from the menu.
Installer provides you with three options:
• Modify (or Change) lets you to add another QuickField
component or remove any optional QuickField
component that was installed on your computer;
• Repair automatically restores the installed QuickField
configuration. For example, you might need it having
unintentionally deleted some of mandatory files or after
virus attack.
• Remove (or Uninstall) completely removes QuickField
from your hard disk.
 QuickField Installation 21

Installing Several Versions of QuickField

Simultaneously
When you install QuickField alongside one or several older
versions installed in different folders, old installations
remain usable. You can even run them simultaneously.
However, you should be aware that each copy of QuickField
attempts to register itself in the system registry as the default
handler of all QuickField documents and automation
requests. Any client program that uses QuickField will be
served by the copy of QuickField that was registered last.
To register another version of QuickField as the default
handler, start it in interactive mode. On Windows with UAC
enabled, QuickField successfully registers itself only when
it is started with administrator’s privileges.
If you remove (uninstall) any of installed QuickField
versions, a part of information related to other versions is
also removed from the system registry. To restore usability
of another QuickField version after such action, you would
have to start that version in interactive mode.

Application-Wide Options
QuickField Options panel may be displayed using the
command Tools>Options… in the main menu. Left pane of
the window shows the list of the options, and the pages for
viewing/editing the chosen option are shown in the right
pane. Pressing the OK button saves the options. Options are
stored separately for each user of the computer.
22 Chapter 1 Getting Started

• Option Problem location allows selection of the folder,

where the search starts for loading or saving the problem
files. If this field is empty, search starts from the current
folder.
• QuickField may open the last used problem at start. This
behavior may be cancelled using the switch Open last
problem.
• Length units may be adjusted anytime individually for
each problem. Default value is meter, but it may be
changed using the Length Units option.
• Temperature units, selected in the Option panel, are
applied to all QuickField problems. They are used for
display of temperatures in numerical values or plots, but
do not affect the internal stored data and results, which
are always kept in Kelvins.
If it is necessary to enter the numerical value or formula
in units other than set in the Options panel - it can be
done by addition the suffix ",K" for Kelvins, ",C" for
Celsius degrees or ",F" for Fahrenheit degrees to the
right of the value.
For example: 10+25*(t-1), K
Comma separates the value and temperature unit. Unit
letter may be lowercase or uppercase. Suffix with
temperature units is shown in the string only if the value
 QuickField Installation 23

is defined by formula and temperature units in it are

different from the default units.
• The number precision option allows selection of the
significant digits number ranging from 2 to 8 in the data
entry fields or in the results display. Some parameters are
displayed with the precision one less or one more than
set in this option. Default precision value is 5. This value
is appropriate for most users.
• The option DXF Import tolerance sets the allowed
geometrical tolerance as a fraction from the model size,
which may also be defined in the geometric model
properties panel. If the distance between nodes is less
than the set tolerance they will be merged during the
import.
• Default number of the color levels for the QuickField
color map display is 20. This parameter can be changed
using the Color grades option.
• The option Animation step is related to the AC
problems, i.e. problems formulated in the frequency
domain. Default frame step for the animated field
presentation is 5 degrees. This parameter may be
adjusted here.
• Model editor and circuit editor save the history of user
actions for possibility of reversing them. Maximal undo
level is 100 commands. This value should satisfy most
of QuickField users, but if necessary it may be changed
using the option Undo depth. Larger value of the undo
depth uses more memory.
 24

C H A P T E R 2

Introductory Guide

This chapter briefly describes the basic organization of the

QuickField program. It presents an overview of the
available capabilities.
The aim of this chapter is to get you started with modeling
in QuickField. If you are new to the QuickField, we strongly
recommend you to study this chapter. If you haven't yet
installed QuickField, please do so. For information on
installing QuickField, please see Chapter 1.

Basic Organization of QuickField

In QuickField, you work with several types of documents:
problems, geometry models, material libraries and so on.
Each document is opened into a separate window within the
main application window of QuickField. You can open any
number of documents at once. When switching between
windows, you switch from one document to another. Only
one document and one window are active at a time, so you
can edit the active document. Editing actions are listed in
the menu residing on the top of main window of QuickField.
Menu contents are different for different document types.
You can also use context-specific menus, which are
available by right-button mouse clicking on specific items
in document window.
The QuickField documents are:
 Basic Organization of QuickField 25

Problem corresponds to specific physical problem solved by

QuickField. This document stores the general problem
parameters, such as the type of analysis ("Electrostatics",
"Magnetostatics", "Heat transfer" and etc.) or the model
type (planar or axisymmetric). The detailed description of
working with problems is given in Chapter 3.
Geometric Model is a complete description of the geometry,
the part labels and the mesh of your model. Several
problems may share the same model (this is particularly
useful for coupling analysis). Editing models is described in
details in Chapter 4.
Property Description or Data documents are specific to
types of analysis (Electrostatics data, Stress Analysis data,
etc.) These documents store the values of material
properties, loadings and boundary conditions for different
part labels. Data documents can be used as material libraries
for many different problems. The detailed description of
how to specify material properties and boundary conditions
is given in Chapter 5.
Electric Circuit defines the associated electric circuit and
the parameters of its elements. You can associate circuits
with problems of the following types:
• AC Magnetics
• Transient Magnetics
For the problem to be solved and analyzed, it must reference
the model and data documents. For convenience, the
problem can reference two data documents at once: one
document containing properties for commonly used
materials (material library), and another document
26 Chapter 2 Introductory Guide

containing data specific for the problem or group of

problems.
The last of QuickField documents stores the solution results.
QuickField creates it while solving the problem. The file
always has the same name as and belongs to the same folder
as the problem description file. Its extension is .res.
Between sessions, QuickField documents are stored in disk
files, separate file for each document. During the session,
you can create new documents or open existing ones. The
detailed description of how to get and explore the results of
the analysis is given in Chapter 7 and Chapter 8.
Using this very flexible architecture, QuickField helps you
build and analyze your design problems very quickly. In
analyzing a problem, the typical sequence of phases that you
go through with QuickField is depicted in the flowchart
below:

Create new, empty problem Provide data for the materials,

File > New Problem loads and boundary conditions

Specify the problem Obtain the solution

parameters Problem > Solve
Problem > Properties

Define the geometry, part Review the results and obtain

labels and mesh for the model the postprocessing parameters
Problem > Geometry Model Problem> View Field Picture
 Window Management Tips 27

Window Management Tips

QuickField is a multi-document application, so you can
work with several documents – geometry, materials, results,
etc. – at once. We will discuss dealing with specific
documents later; here are the common principles for
creating and opening documents, switching between the
editors and arranging the windows.
There are three basic window types in QuickField:
1. The Problem window presents the structure of the
problem and its components.
2. The Document window shows graphics and tables related
to the model geometry, or the field picture, the circuit,
etc.
3. Tools windows display additional information and
provide control functions.
Windows of each type can be differently arranged on the
screen.

Problem Window
The problem window is normally docked on the left side of
the main QuickField window. When several problems are
open at once, their windows can be docked side by side, or
in a column, or they can be tabbed in a single pane, leaving
maximum space for graphics. This window can also be left
floating on top of the other windows.
To move the problem window, simply drag it to the new
position holding by the window title. While dragging, the
possible docking positions are shown by the diamond
shaped arrows. When you move the pointer over the
28 Chapter 2 Introductory Guide

diamonds, QuickField shows the corresponding rectangle

where the window can be docked if you release the mouse
button.

Document Windows
QuickField document windows, such as the model editor,
the field plot, or the electric circuit window, occupy the
main are of the QuickField workspace; they cannot be
docked. For fast switching between these windows, there is
a tab bar near the bottom edge of the main window, similar
to the Windows task bar.
A document window can be minimized to an icon, or
maximized, or arranged with its regular size and position,
which you can change by dragging any corner or edge of the
window. This is useful to display several document
windows at once. QuickField can also tile all document
windows automatically, when you choose Tile Vertically
or Tile Horizontally in the Window menu.
Some document windows can be split into two or four
panes. To split the window, drag the small gray rectangle on
top of the vertical scrollbar or on the left of the horizontal
scrollbar. You can also choose Split in the Window menu.
To switch between panes, click it with the mouse or use F6.
To restore the single view, double-click the splitter or drag
it to the window border until it disappears.

Tool Windows
Finally, the tool windows–the field calculator, color legend,
circuit elements list, etc. –are usually docked within the
corresponding document window. Like the problem
 Overview of Analysis Capabilities 29

window, you can drag and dock tools within their parent’s
boundaries. When floating, tools can be dragged anywhere
on the screen, even to another monitor.

Properties Window
The Properties window can be opened using the Properties
command in the View menu. This window is docked to the
problem window (as shown in the picture) by default or can
be switched to floating. The Properties window displays
different editing fields relevant to the current object (the
problem, geometry model, etc.) Some properties are for
information only (shown in grey), the others can be changed
by typing in the new value or selecting from the dropdown
list. The changed property value comes into effect
immediately.

Overview of Analysis Capabilities

This section provides you with the basic information on
different analysis capabilities. For detailed formulations of
these capabilities, see Chapter 11.

Magnetostatic Analysis
Magnetic analysis is used to design or analyze variety of
devices such as solenoids, electric motors, magnetic shields,
permanent magnets, magnetic disk drives, and so forth.
Generally, the quantities of interest in magnetostatic
analysis are magnetic flux density, field intensity, forces,
torques, inductance, and flux linkage.
QuickField can perform linear and nonlinear magnetostatic
analysis for 2-D and axisymmetric models. The program is
30 Chapter 2 Introductory Guide

based on a vector potential formulation. Following options

are available for magnetic analysis:
Material properties: air, orthotropic materials with
constant permeability, ferromagnets, current carrying
conductors, and permanent magnets. B-H curves for
ferromagnets can easily be defined through an interactive
curve editor, see the "Editing Curves" section in Chapter 5.
Loading sources: current or current density, uniform
external field and permanent magnets.
Boundary conditions: Prescribed potential values
(Dirichlet condition), prescribed values for tangential flux
density (Neumann condition) , constant potential constraint
for zero normal flux conditions on the surface of super-
conductor.
Postprocessing results: magnetic potential, flux density,
field intensity, forces, torques, magnetic energy, flux
linkage, self and mutual inductances.
Special features: An integral calculator can evaluate user-
defined integrals along specified contours and surfaces. The
magnetic forces can be used for stress analysis on any
existing part (magneto-structural coupling). A
self-descriptive Inductance Wizard is available to simplify
the calculation of self- and mutual inductance of the coils.
The magnetic state of the media calculated using the
demagnetization curves of all the involved materials can be
remembered for future use. In particular, it allows for
calculation of self- and mutual differential inductances of
multi-coil systems
 Overview of Analysis Capabilities 31

Transient Magnetic Analysis

Transient magnetics allows performing transient or steady
state AC analysis designing a variety of DC or AC devices
such as electric motors, transformers, and so forth.
Generally, the quantities of interest in transient magnetics
analysis are time functions of magnetic flux density, field
intensity, external, induced and total current densities,
forces, torques, inductance and flux linkage. The transient
magnetic field simulation can be coupled with electric
circuit. The circuit can contain arbitrarily connected
resistors, capacitors, inductances, and solid conductors
located in the magnetic field region.
Material properties: air, orthotropic materials with
constant permeability, ferromagnets, time-dependent
current carrying conductors, and permanent magnets. B-H
curves for ferromagnets easily defined with interactive
curve editor, see the "Editing Curves" section in Chapter 5.
The electrical conductivity of material can depend on
temperature. The dependence of conductivity on
temperature is given in tabular form using the Curve
Editor. The temperature value can be defined for each block
by a number or a formula of time and coordinates.
Loading sources: time-dependent current or current
density, uniform external field and permanent magnets.
Electric circuit can contain any number of time-dependent
current and voltage sources. QuickField introduces
powerful Formula Editor allowing to define time
dependency with a wide set of intrinsic functions.
Boundary conditions: prescribed potential values
(Dirichlet condition), prescribed values for tangential flux
32 Chapter 2 Introductory Guide

density (Neumann condition), constant potential constraint

for zero normal flux conditions on the surface of super-
conductor.
Postprocessing results: magnetic potential, flux density,
field intensity, external, induced and total current densities,
forces, torques, magnetic energy, flux linkage, self and
mutual inductances.
Special features: a special formula editor allows specifying
virtually any type of time-dependent sources (currents and
current densities, Neumann boundary condition). An
integral calculator can evaluate user-defined integrals along
specified contours and surfaces. The magnetic forces can be
used for stress analysis on any existing part
(magneto-structural coupling). Joule heat generated in the
conductors can be used for transient heat transfer analysis of
your model (electro-thermal coupling). QuickField provides
a special type of inter-problem link to import field
distribution from another problem as initial state for
transient analysis. Transient magnetic field simulation can
be coupled with electric circuit. The circuit can contain
arbitrarily connected resistors, capacitors, inductances, and
solid conductors located in the magnetic field region.

AC Magnetic Analysis
AC magnetic analysis is used to analyze magnetic field
caused by alternating currents and, vise versa, electric
currents induced by alternating magnetic field (eddy
currents). This kind of analysis is useful with different
inductor devices, solenoids, electric motors, and so forth.
Generally the quantities of interest in AC magnetic analysis
 Overview of Analysis Capabilities 33

are electric current (and its source and induced component),

voltage, generated Joule heat, magnetic flux density, field
intensity, forces, torques, impedance and inductance. The
AC magnetic field simulation can be coupled with electric
circuit. The circuit can contain arbitrarily connected
resistors, capacitors, inductances, and solid conductors
located in the magnetic field region.
A special type of AC magnetic is nonlinear analysis. It
allows estimating with certain precision the behavior of a
system with ferromagnets, which otherwise would require
much lengthier transient analysis.
Following options are available for AC magnetic analysis:
Material properties: air, orthotropic materials with
constant permeability or isotropic ferromagnets, current
carrying conductors with known current or voltage.
The electrical conductivity of material can depend on
temperature. The dependence of conductivity on
temperature is given in tabular form using the Curve
Editor. The temperature value can be defined for each block
by a number or a formula of coordinates. In addition, the
temperature field can be imported) from a linked problem of
heat transfer analysis.
The tab Core loss allows entering properties for the soft
magnetic material, which are required to calculate the core
losses in it.
Loading sources: voltage, total current, current density,
uniform external field. Electric circuit can contain any
number of time-dependent current and voltage sources.
34 Chapter 2 Introductory Guide

Boundary conditions: prescribed potential values

(Dirichlet condition), prescribed values for tangential flux
density (Neumann condition), constant potential constraint
for zero normal flux conditions on the surface of super-
conductor.
Postprocessing results: magnetic potential, current density,
voltage, flux density, field intensity, forces, torques, Joule
heat, magnetic energy, impedances, self and mutual
inductances.
Special features: An integral calculator can evaluate user-
defined integrals along specified contours and surfaces. The
magnetic forces can be used for stress analysis on any
existing part (magneto-structural coupling); and power
losses can be used as heat sources for thermal analysis
(electro-thermal coupling). Two wizards are available for
calculation of the mutual and self-inductance of coils and
for calculation of the impedance.

Electrostatic Analysis
Electrostatic analysis is used to design or analyze variety of
capacitive systems such as fuses, transmission lines and so
forth. Generally the quantities of interest in electrostatic
analysis are voltages, electric fields, capacitances, and
electric forces.
QuickField can perform linear electrostatic analysis for two-
dimensional, axisymmetric and three-dimensional models.
The program is based on Poisson's equation. Following
options are available for electrostatic analysis:
Material properties: air, orthotropic materials with
constant permittivity.
 Overview of Analysis Capabilities 35

Loading sources: voltages, and electric charge density.

Boundary conditions: prescribed potential values
(voltages), prescribed values for normal derivatives (surface
charges), and prescribed constraints for constant potential
boundaries with given total charges.
Postprocessing results: voltages, electric fields, gradients
of electric field, flux densities (electric displacements),
surface charges, self and mutual capacitances, forces,
torques, and electric energy.
Special features: An integral calculator can evaluate user-
defined integrals along specified contours and surfaces.
Floating conductors with unknown voltages and given
charges can be modeled. Electric forces can be imported
into stress analysis (electro-structural coupling). A
Capacitance Wizard is available for calculation of the self-
and mutual capacitance of the conductors.
3D analysis limitations: current QuickField version does
not support the anisotropic materials and coupled problems
in 3D Electrostatic analysis.

DC Conduction Analysis
DC conduction analysis is used to analyze variety of
conductive systems. Generally, the quantities of interest in
DC conduction analysis are voltages, current densities,
electric power losses (Joule heat).
QuickField can perform linear DC conduction analysis for
two-dimensional, axisymmetric and three-dimensional
models. The program is based on Poisson's equation.
Following options are available for DC conduction analysis:
36 Chapter 2 Introductory Guide

Material properties: orthotropic materials with constant

conductivity.
The electrical conductivity of material can depend on
temperature. The dependence of conductivity on
temperature is given in tabular form using the Curve
Editor. The temperature value can be defined for each block
by a number or a formula of coordinates.
Loading sources: voltages, electric current density.
Boundary conditions: prescribed potential values
(voltages), prescribed values for normal derivatives (surface
current densities), and prescribed constraints for constant
potential boundaries.
Postprocessing results: voltages, current densities, electric
fields, electric current through a surface, and power losses.
Special features: An integral calculator can evaluate user-
defined integrals along specified contours and surfaces. The
electric power losses can be used as heat sources for thermal
analysis (electro-thermal coupling).
3D analysis limitations: current QuickField version does
not support anisotropic materials, temperature-dependent
conductivity and coupled problems in 3D DC Conduction
analysis.

AC Conduction Analysis
AC conduction analysis is used to analyze electric field
caused by alternating currents and voltages in imperfect
dielectric media. This kind of analysis is mostly used with
complex insulator systems and capacitors. Generally, the
 Overview of Analysis Capabilities 37

quantities of interest are dielectric losses, voltage, electric

field components, forces, and torques.
The following options are available for AC conduction
analysis:
Material properties: air, orthotropic materials with
constant electric conductivity and permittivity.
Boundary conditions: prescribed voltage values (Dirichlet
condition), prescribed values for boundary current density
(Neumann condition), constant potential constraint for
describing conductors in surrounding dielectric media.
Postprocessing results: voltage, electric field, current
density, power and losses, forces, and torques.
Special features: An integral calculator can evaluate user-
defined integrals along specified contours and surfaces.
Electric forces can be imported into stress analysis (electro-
structural coupling); and electric losses can be used as a heat
source for the thermal analysis (electro-thermal coupling).

Transient Electric Field

Transient electric analysis is a generalization of
electrostatics and conduction analyses:
• An electrode potential or induced current density (field
sources) can be an arbitrary function of time;
• Dielectric materials can be moderately
conductive, to account for dielectric losses;
• Electric conductivity and permittivity of any
material can vary with electric field.
In contrast to electrostatics, prescribed electric charge
density cannot be a field source.
38 Chapter 2 Introductory Guide

This analysis type may be used to study the field distribution

in objects subjected to pulse sources, e.g., lightning-induced
overvoltages. It may also be applied to design modern
insulation constructions, which include nonlinear field
equalizing elements, varistor overvoltage protection, and
other applications, which involve zinc oxide varistors,
semiconductive ceramics, and similar materials.
The following options are available for transient electric
analysis:
Material properties: air, orthotropic materials with electric
field dependent conductivity and permittivity.
Boundary conditions: prescribed voltage values (Dirichlet
condition), prescribed values for boundary current density
(Neumann condition) , constant potential constraint for
describing conductors in surrounding dielectric media.
Postprocessing results: voltage, electric field, conduction
and displacement current density, ohmic and reactive power
and losses, forces and torques.
Special features: A calculator of is available for evaluating
user-defined integrals on given curves and surfaces.
Capacitance wizard is a convenient tool to calculate the
capacitance using different methods.

Thermal Analysis
Thermal analysis plays an important role in design of many
different mechanical and electrical systems. Generally the
quantities of interest in thermal analysis are temperature
distribution, thermal gradients, and heat losses. Transient
analysis allows you to simulate transition of heat
distribution between two heating states of a system.
 Overview of Analysis Capabilities 39

QuickField can perform linear and nonlinear thermal

analysis for two-dimensional and axisymmetric models; and
linear steady-state thermal analysis for three-dimensional
models. The program is based on heat conduction equation
with convection and radiation boundary conditions.
Following options are available for thermal analysis:
Material properties: orthotropic materials with constant
thermal conductivity, isotropic temperature dependent
conductivities, temperature dependent specific heat.
Loading sources: constant and temperature dependent
volume heat densities, convective and radiative sources,
Joule heat sources imported from DC or AC conduction or
AC or transient magnetic analysis.
Boundary conditions: prescribed temperatures, boundary
heat flows, convection, radiation, and prescribed constraints
for constant temperature boundaries.
Postprocessing results: temperatures, thermal gradients,
heat flux densities, and total heat losses or gains on a given
part; with transient analysis: graphs and tables of time
dependency of any quantity in any given point of a region.
Special features: A postprocessing calculator is available
for evaluating user-defined integrals on given curves and
surfaces. Plate models with varying thickness can be used
for thermal analysis. The temperatures can be used for
thermal stress analysis (thermo-structural coupling). Special
type of inter-problem link is provided to import temperature
distribution from another problem as initial state for
transient thermal analysis.
40 Chapter 2 Introductory Guide

3D analysis limitations: current QuickField version does

not support anisotropic materials, non-linear dependencies
(dependence of the thermal conductivity or volume power
of the heat source from the temperature), radiation boundary
condition, transient analysis and coupled problems.

Stress Analysis
Stress analysis plays an important role in design of many
different mechanical and electrical components. Generally,
the quantities of interest in stress analysis are displacements,
strains and different components of stresses.
QuickField can perform linear stress analysis for 2-D plane
stress, plane strain, and axisymmetric models. The program
is based on Navier equations of elasticity. Following options
are available for stress analysis:
Material properties: isotropic and orthotropic materials.
Loading sources: concentrated loads, body forces,
pressure, thermal strains, and imported electric or magnetic
forces from electric or magnetic analysis.
Boundary conditions: prescribed displacements, elastic
spring supports.
Postprocessing results: displacements, stress components,
principal stresses, von Mises stress, Tresca, Mohr-Coulomb,
Drucker-Prager, and Hill criteria.
 41

C H A P T E R 3

Problem Description

Structure of Problem Database

A special database is built for each problem solved with
QuickField. The core of the database is the problem
description, which is stored in file with the extension .pbm.
The problem description contains the basics of the problem:
its subject, plane, precision class, etc., and references to all
other files, which constitute the problem database. These
files are the model file, with standard extension .mod, or
.m3d, the connected electric circuit file .qcr (where
applicable) and physical data (property description) files
with extension .dms, .dhe, .des, .dtv, .dcf, .dec, .dht, or
.dsa, depending on the subject of the problem.
The problem description may refer to one or two files of
physical data. Both files have the same format, and differ
only in purpose. Usually, the first data file contains specific
data related to the problem, as the second file is a library of
standard material properties and boundary conditions,
which are common for a whole class of problems.
Depending on the problem type, you may share a single
model file or a single data file between several similar
problems.
While solving the problem, QuickField creates one more
file—the file of results with the extension .res. This file
42 Chapter 3 Problem Description

always has the same name as the problem description file,

and is stored in the same folder.

Editing Problems
• To create a new, empty problem description, click New
in the File menu and then select QuickField problem in
the list that appears. Then enter the name and path of the
new problem. You can also create a new problem as a
copy of another problem being currently opened. In that
case new problem inherits all the properties of the sample
one and the referenced model and data documents are
copied if necessary.
• To open an existing document, click Open in the File
menu, or use drag and drop features of Windows.
Open problem documents are shown in a special view to the
left of main QuickField window. In problem view, you can
edit problem description options and references to files. The
tree shows the names of files, which the problem currently
references.
• To change problem settings or file names, click
Problem Properties in the Problem menu or context
(right mouse button) menu.
• To start editing a referenced document (model, data,
secondary data or other problem referenced as coupling
link), double-click its name in the tree, or click Edit File
in the context menu, or click correspondent item in Edit
menu.
• To solve the problem, click Solve Problem in the
Problem menu or context (right mouse button) menu.
 Editing Problems 43

• To analyze the results, click View Results in the

Problem menu or context menu.

Editing problem description properties

Problem type: Select the type of analysis, which your

problem belongs to.
Model class: Select the geometry class of your model:
Plane-parallel, Axisymmetric, 3D Extrusion or 3D Import.
The first two classes lead to two-dimensional analysis,
where the last two introduces three-dimensional analysis
(see chapter 9). Enter the length of plane-parallel model in
44 Chapter 3 Problem Description

z-direction (perpendicular to the model plane) into the LZ

field. Default depth of the model LZ is one meter.

Precision: Select the precision you need. Note that higher

precision leads to longer solution time.
Formulation: Select the formulation of planar stress
analysis problem.
Frequency: Type the value of frequency for the
time-harmonic problem. Note the difference between
frequency f and angular frequency :  = 2f.
Files: Edit the file names of your model, data files, and
circuit file (if applicable). You may use long file names. If
the name is given without the full path, it is assumed with
respect to the problem description file. You can also click
Browse to select file in any folder on your hard disk or the
network.
Edit: Instantly loads selected file into the new QuickField
window.

Establishing Coupling Links

The stress analysis, heat transfer, and transient magnetic
problems can incorporate data, which come from other
analysis types. The data types are:
 Editing Problems 45

• electric and/or magnetic forces;

• temperature field for the stress analysis;
• power losses generated by the current flow for the heat
transfer;
• remembered (frozen) magnetic state of the materials
from another problem;
• temperature field for calculating of the temperature
dependent electrical conductivity;
Transient problems can import initial state of field
distribution from another steady state or transient problem
(at specified time moment in case of importing from
transient into static problem).
To establish a link between the problem that imports data
and the problem that originates them, click Links tab in
problem description dialog box.
46 Chapter 3 Problem Description

To add a data link:

1. Select the type of the data in the Data Type list;
2. Type a name of the source problem in the Problem
box, or click Browse button to make the selection
from the list of existing problems;
3. In case the source problem is of transient analysis
type, specify the time moment you wish to import in
the Time field; if this specific time layer does not
exist in the results file, the closest time layer will be
imported;
4. And, click Add button to add the link to the list of
data sources.
To change a data link:
1. Select the link of choice in the Data Sources list;
2. Change the source problem name or the moment of
time as necessary;
3. And, choose Update button to update the link in the
list of data sources.
To delete a link:
1. Select the link of choice in the Data Sources list box;
2. And, click Delete button to delete the link from the
list of data sources, or use Delete All button to delete
all data links at once.
The links to the imported data are considered to be a part of
the problem description. The changes made in them are
preserved only if you choose OK when completing the
problem description editing. And, vice versa, if you would
choose Cancel button or press ESC, the changes made in data
 Editing Problems 47

links will be discarded along with other changes in problem

description.

Setting Time Parameters

With problems of transient analysis type, you need to set up
the time parameters, before the problem can be solved. To
do so, click Timing tab in the problem description dialog
box.

Calculate up to: Specify the period of time you wish to

simulate. Simulation always starts at ‘zero’ time moment.
With the step of: Specify the step size for the calculation.
In transient analysis, this is the most important parameter
controlling the precision of calculations in time domain: the
smaller the step, the better the precision. Usually you will
have minimum of 15 to 20 steps for the whole integration
period. It may have sense to start with bigger value of this
parameter and then decrease it if the result seems to change
not smoothly enough.
48 Chapter 3 Problem Description

If for some model you cannot estimate suitable time

parameters, we recommend that you set some arbitrary
value for the time period, and set the step size to have 5-7
points of integration, and then explore the X-Y plots against
time in several points in the domain to tune the parameters.
Auto: specifies that QuickField should calculate step size
automatically.
Store the results every: defines the time increment for
saving the results of calculation to the file. This value must
be equal or greater than the step size.
Starting from the moment: defines the first point to be
written to the file. If this value is zero, the initial state will
be written.
Initial temperature: Enter the temperature value for the
initial (zero) moment of time. Temperature may be defined
as a constant or coordinate-dependent formula. If the initial
temperature is not defined, it is considered zero. If the initial
temperature value (formula) is set and also the coupled
problem provides the initial temperature distribution then
the imported temperature has a priority.

Automatic Time Step Size Calculation in Transient

Analysis
In transient analysis, QuickField is now capable to
automatically calculate and adjust the time step size for the
integration process.
To calculate the initial time step size, the following
conservative estimate is used:
t0 = min (2/4),
 Editing Problems 49

where ξ is the "mesh size" (diameter of a mesh element) and

𝜆 ⎯ for problems of heat
𝛼=
𝜌𝐶 transfer,
1 ⎯ for magnetic
𝛼=
𝜇𝜎 problems.
The ratio 2/4 is evaluated in all the mesh elements in the
model, and the smallest value is used as an initial time step
size.
As the solution progresses, the time steps are adjusted
automatically by an adaptive time stepping scheme.
The next time step is adjusted by
tn +1 = ktn,
where k is a scaling factor varying from 0.25 to 4.0 (with
discrete values of 0.25; 0.5; 1.0; 2.0; 4.0) and dependent on
behavior of potential and its time derivative, as well as all
the time- and coordinate-dependent sources and boundary
conditions in the model.
The two factors are taken into account when choosing the
value of k:
• The norm of time derivative variation on previous time
step in all mesh nodes:
‖𝑢̇ 𝑛 − 𝑢̇ 𝑛−1 ‖
Δ𝑢̅𝑛 = 2
‖𝑢̇ 𝑛 ‖ + ‖𝑢̇ 𝑛−1 ‖
• The inverse of characteristic time:
{Δ𝑢𝑛 }𝑇 {𝐹𝑛 − 𝐹𝑛−1 }
𝜔𝑛 =
{Δ𝑢𝑛 }𝑇 [𝐾𝑇𝑛 ]{Δ𝑢𝑛 }
50 Chapter 3 Problem Description

In thermal analysis {Fn} is the heat flow vector associated

with conduction, convection, and radiation. In magnetics
{Fn} is a vector of induction, u - is a potential value, and KT
is a stiffness matrix in the finite-element analysis.
The actual value of scaling factor k is chosen based upon
two dimensionless characteristics: Δ𝑢̅𝑛 and 2/tnn, by
means of predetermined proprietary threshold tables, and
the smaller is considered to be used for the next time step
size, thus guaranteeing to produce smooth and accurate time
dependency in every spatial point of the model.

Choosing Length Units

QuickField allows you to use various units for coordinates
when creating model's geometry. You can use microns,
millimeters, centimeters, meters, kilometers, inches, feet, or
miles.
 Editing Problems 51

Chosen units are associated with each particular problem,

which gives you freedom to use different units for different
problems. Usually units of length are chosen before creating
the model geometry. It is possible to change units of length
later, but it does not affect physical dimensions of the
model. So, if you create your geometry as a square with 1 m
side and then switch to centimeters, you will get a square
measured 100 cm by 100 cm, which is the same as it was
before. To actually change size of the model you should
rather use Scaling option of the Move Selection command
of the Model Editor (see page 62 for details).
The choice of length units does not affect units for other
physical parameters, which always use standard SI units.
E.g., the current density is always measured in A/m2 and
never in A/mm2. The only physical quantity that is measured
in chosen units of length, is the displacement vector in stress
analysis problems.

Cartesian vs. Polar Coordinates

Problem geometry as well as material properties and
boundary conditions can be defined in Cartesian or polar
coordinate systems. There are several places in QuickField
where you can make choice between Cartesian and polar
coordinate systems. Using Coordinate System section in
problem description dialog box you can define the default
coordinate system associated with a problem. The same
option is also available in the Model Editor and in the
Postprocessor. Definition of orthotropic material properties,
some loads and boundary conditions depends on the choice
of the coordinate system. You can choose Cartesian or polar
coordinate system for each element of data individually and
52 Chapter 3 Problem Description

independently from the default coordinate system

associated with the problem. This choice is available in the
dialog boxes of the Data Editor.

Problem Properties Window

The Properties window can be opened using the Properties
command in the View menu. This window is docked to the
task windows by default or can switched to floating.

The Properties window dynamically displays the current

problem's properties.
Here you can review and modify the common properties of
the problem such as problem type, class, accuracy, and
geometry or material data file names. Changing certain
problem parameters will invalidate the existing solution. In
this case you will be given a warning.
To link a problem in the “Coupled problems” section, select
the imported physical property type and choose or enter the
 Editing Problems 53

name of the source problem. The new link will be checked

and if the problem meets the coupling criteria, the new link
will be added to the list. To remove an existing link, simply
clear the source problem filename from the corresponding
property.
 54

C H A P T E R 4

Model Geometry Definition

This chapter describes the process of building the geometric

model—a type of QuickField document describing the
problem geometry.
The information given here describes the two-dimensional
modelling. The Chapter 9 contains detailed information
concerned three-dimensional analysis. Nethertheless, to
understand how to create and modify the 3D geometry
model you likely need to know the basics of 2D modelling.

Terminology
Geometric Model, or simply Model, is the name we use for
the collection containing all geometric shapes of a problem.
Besides being an object container, the model helps to link
the contained objects with related material properties, field
sources, and boundary conditions.
Vertex, edge and block are three basic types of geometric
objects contained by QuickField models.
Each Vertex represents a point. Point coordinates could be
either explicitly specified by user or automatically
calculated by QuickField at the intersection of two edges.
For each vertex you can define its mesh spacing value and
 Terminology 55

its label. The mesh spacing value defines the approximate

distance between mesh nodes in the neighborhood of the
vertex. Define vertex label to link a vertex with, for
example, a line source or load.
Each Edge represents a linear segment or a circular arc
connecting two vertices. Model edges do not intersect each
other. Creating new model edge QuickField splits it as many
times as needed at intersection points with existing model
edges and at the points represented by existing model
vertices. QuickField also automatically creates new model
vertices representing intersection points of the new edge and
splits the old model edges at these points. Define edge label
to link an edge with, for example, related boundary
conditions.
Each Block represents a continuous subregion of the model
plane. External block boundary is a sequence of edges.
Blocks might contain holes. Each of internal boundaries
separating a block from its holes is either a sequence of
edges or a single isolated vertex.
All blocks included in field calculation must be meshed and
labeled. QuickField can mesh any subset of model blocks.
The mesh density depends on mesh spacing values defined
for model vertices. These values are either calculated
automatically by QuickField or specified for particular
vertices by the user. Define block label to link the block
with, for example, related material properties or distributed
field sources.
Each Label is a string of up to 16-character length. Labels
establish the correspondence between model objects -
blocks, edges, and vertices - and numerical data describing
56 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

such real-world entities as material properties, loads and

boundary conditions. Any printable characters including
letters, digits, punctuation marks and space characters are
permitted. Labels cannot begin with space; trailing spaces
are ignored. Labels are case sensitive.
The Mesh Spacing value defines an approximate distance
between mesh nodes in the neighborhood of a model vertex.
Mesh spacing property is associated with vertices and
measured in the current units of length. Setting mesh
spacing values for some vertices you can control the
accuracy of the solution.

Geometry Description
Model development consists of three stages:
• Geometry description and manipulation;
• Definition of properties, field sources and boundary
conditions;
• Mesh generation.

Creating Model Objects

To describe model geometry create vertices and edges that
form boundaries of all subregions having different physical
properties. Use Move and Duplicate operations to adjust
shapes and coordinates of created objects to your needs. To
perform editing actions upon several objects at once use the
selection mechanism. Assign labels to blocks, edges, and
vertices to link them with such real-world objects as
material properties, boundary conditions and loads. Build
mesh in all blocks participating in field calculation.
 Geometry Description 57

There are two options available for creating the finite

element mesh for your model:
• Fully automated method that generates a smooth mesh
with a density based on region's dimensions and sizes of
geometrical details. This option does not require any
information from the user.
• The second method allows you to choose the mesh
density. In this case you need to define the spacing values
at few vertices of your choice. Spacing values for other
vertices are calculated automatically to make the mesh
distribution smooth.
Creating Edges
To create new edges:
• Choose Insert Mode in the Edit menu, or click the
Insert Vertices/Edges toolbar button or context menu
item, or press INS, to switch model view into insert mode.
• Specify the angle of the new edge in the New Edge Angle
box on the toolbar. Use one of the predefined angles
provided in the list, or type another value in the edit box.
To create a linear segment specify zero angle.
• Left-drag the mouse from the starting point of the edge
to its end, or use SHIFT+DIRECTION keys. The ends of the
created edge can coincide with the existing model
vertices, otherwise QuickField automatically creates the
new vertex (vertices) as needed, so that QuickField,
adding the new edge to the model, always connects two
existing model vertices together. Switch on the snap to
grid option (default), to force the new vertices on the
current grid. Navigating with the keyboard, use the CTRL
key to fine tune the points.
58 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

Creating Vertices
To create new vertices:
• Choose Insert Mode in the Edit menu, or click the
Insert Vertices/Edges toolbar button or context menu
item, or press INS, to switch model view into insert mode.
• Make sure that current coordinate grid settings fit
coordinates of the vertices you want to create.
• Use mouse or DIRECTION keys to move the cursor to the
vertex insertion point and double-click the left mouse
button or press ENTER.
Or:
• Choose Add Vertices from the Edit menu.
• Enter new vertex coordinates and click Add. Repeat if
you need more vertices.
• Click Close.
Attraction Distance
To avoid small unrecognizable inaccuracies in geometry
definition, new vertices or edges cannot be created very
close to the existing objects. Creation of new geometric
objects is controlled by the value we denote by  and call the
attraction distance.
The following rules apply to creation of new vertices and
edges.
• New vertices cannot be created within 2-neighborhood
of the existing vertex.
• New edge cannot connect the ends of the existing edge
and lie inside its -neighborhood.
 Geometry Description 59

The value of  is proportional to the size of the visible

region, so to create very small details you would have to
zoom in the model window.

Basic Objects Manipulation

Objects Selection
To select geometric objects:
1. If the Insert Mode is on, press INS to switch it off.
2. Keep CTRL pressed if you want to add objects to the
selection set instead of replacing it.
3. Click any model object to select it alone, or press any
mouse button outside of selected objects and drag
diagonally to select all objects that entirely fit inside the
displayed rubberband rectangle.

Note. Keep in mind that when you click inside a block

QuickField select neither boundary edges nor vertices.
Similarly, when you click in the middle of an edge
QuickField does not select either of its ending vertices. This
might be important for correct understanding of such model
operations as Delete, Duplicate, and Move.

If you want to select a block and its boundary edges or an

edge and its ending vertices, drag the mouse to select the
required objects with a rubberband rectangle.
You can also use Select All and Unselect All commands in
the Edit or context menu. Note that you can select objects
of different types - blocks, edges or vertices - at once.
The set of selected model objects is shared between the
windows displaying the model. If several windows display
60 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

the same model, selected objects are highlighted in all of

them.
Keyboard shortcuts:
Select All CTRL+A
Unselect All CTRL+D
To select all model objects having the same label, click this
label in the Problem Tree View.
Geometric Objects: Duplicating and Moving
The Duplicate feature allows easily create geometric objects
at regularly defined coordinates. To duplicate:
1. Select the set of model objects (vertices, edges and
blocks) you want to duplicate.
2. Choose Duplicate Selection from the Edit or context
menu. QuickField will display the Duplicate Selection
dialog asking for parameters.
3. Choose the required transformation, enter its parameters
in the dialog fields, and click OK. QuickField will add
the duplicated objects to the model automatically
selecting all of them. The rest of the objects will be
unselected
 Geometry Description 61

QuickField copies labels and spacing values associated with

duplicated objects wherever
possible. New model blocks are
always unmeshed.
The first copy of a model object is
always the result of the specified
transformation applied to the object
itself. When the transformation
allows to create several copies of
every involved object
simultaneously, the second and the
following copies of any object are the results of the
transformation applied to the preceding copies
You can also move the selected objects to another location.
The only limitation is that QuickField will not perform
moves that change the model topology. You cannot move
vertices or edges into any block or out of the containing
block. To move selected objects, choose Move Selection in
the Edit or context menu. The displayed Move Selection
dialog is similar to the Duplicate Selection dialog described
above.
Successful Move preserves all labels and spacing values.
Mesh is preserved in the blocks that are not reshaped.
QuickField always removes the mesh from the reshaped
blocks before checking that the topology remains
unchanged. So, if you try a move that changes the model
topology QuickField will block it displaying the
corresponding message, and in result of the operation you
might find that some of the blocks are no longer meshed.
62 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

If you do not like the results of your operation, use Undo to

restore the previous state of the model
Geometric transformations available with move and copy
operations are:
• Displacement — parallel displacement is applied to
selected objects for specified displacement vector. With
copy operation, several copies can be asked for, it means
that copying operation will be performed several times,
each time being applied to the previous result.
Parameters needed are displacement vector components.
• Rotation — selected objects are rotated around the
specified point for the specified angle. With copy
operation, several copies can be asked for, it means that
copying operation will be performed several times, each
time being applied to the previous result. Parameters
needed are center of rotation coordinates and angle
measured in degrees.
• Symmetry — selected objects are mirrored; symmetry
line is specified by coordinates of any point on it and the
angle between the horizontal axis and the symmetry line.
Positive value of an angle means counter-clockwise
direction. This transformation is available for copy
operation only.
• Scaling — selected objects are dilated (constricted) by
means of homothetic transformation. Parameters needed
are center of homothety and scaling factor. This
transformation is available for move operation only.
There is also a simpler method of copying and moving of
the geometric objects – mouse dragging (see Drag and Drop
 Geometry Description 63

and Clipboard Editing). Drag-and drop is possible within

the same or different model editor windows.
Deleting Objects
To delete geometric objects:
1. Select the objects you want to delete.
2. In the Edit or context menu, click Delete Selection.
If the selection contains the vertex (vertices) adjacent to
exactly two remaining edges that could be merged together,
QuickField, having deleted the separating vertex,
automatically performs the merge.
Otherwise, when one of vertices being deleted is adjacent to
one or several of remaining edges, QuickField adds the
adjacent edges to the list of objects to be deleted and
requests the user to confirm the action.
This feature is frequently used for "clipping" of the obsolete
parts of model edges.
Example: Consider the model shown in Pic.1 below with
the semicircles having the radiuses of 2 and 3 and the
common center at (0, 0). Suppose that you need to create
several horizontal edges inside the block with the distance
between consecutive edges equal to 0.5.
The fastest way to create them would be the following:
• Set focus to the model window clicking inside it.
• Choose Grid Settings from View menu and set Spacing
to 0.5.
• Press INS to enter the Insert Mode.
• Drag mouse from (0, 3) to (4, 3) to create the new edge
connecting these points.
64 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

• Press INS to leave the Insert Mode. You will get the
model shown in Pic.2.

Pic.1 Pic.2
• Select the new edge dragging the left mouse button from
(-0.25, 3.25) to (4.25, 2.75).
• Choose Duplicate Selection from the Edit menu, set
displacement ordinate to -0.5, set Copies to 12, and click
OK. You will get the model shown in Pic.3.
• Select the right ends of horizontal edges dragging the left
mouse button from (3.75, 3.25) to (4.25, -3.25).
• Choose Delete Selection from the Edit menu and click
Yes to confirm deletion.
• Select the left ends of the edges dragging the left mouse
button from (-0.25, 1.75) to (0.25, -1.75) and delete them
similarly. You will get the required model (see Pic.4).
 Geometry Description 65

Pic.3 Pic.4
Keyboard shortcuts:
Delete DEL

Drag and Drop and Clipboard Editing

What Can Be Done with Drag and Drop?
You can move or copy any group of model objects - vertices,
edges, and blocks - to another place on the model plane, or
to another model opened by this or another session of
QuickField.
How to Start Dragging?
First of all, find out which objects you want to drag and
select them. To find out how to select model objects in
QuickField, see Objects Selection.
Place the mouse pointer over one of selected objects and
press any mouse button. The shape of the cursor and the
color of the selected objects will change.
66 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

Note. Placing the pointer over selection might be difficult

when the selected set of objects does not contain blocks and
snap-to-grid option is on. In such case we suggest you to
place the pointer over one of the vertices you are going to
drag.

Keep in mind that if you press a mouse button with the

pointer outside of selection, QuickField, instead of
dragging, initiates a rubberband selection. In such case the
shape of the cursor and the color of selected objects do not
change when you press the mouse button down.
The difference between dragging with left and right mouse
buttons is described in Actions Performed on Drop.
Defining the Exact Drop Position
When you press a mouse button with pointer over the
selection QuickField displays the bright red dot close to the
current pointer position. This dot indicates the so-called
anchor point that helps to set the exact position of the copied
or moved objects after drop.
In the beginning the exact position of the dot depends on:
• the distance between the pointer and the nearest model
vertex; and
• the distance between the pointer and the nearest
background grid node, unless the snap-to-grid option is
off
In particular, when you press the mouse button with the
mouse pointer over a model vertex QuickField always
positions the anchor at the same point.
 Geometry Description 67

When you drag the objects the anchor point is also dragged.
QuickField keeps displaying it as a bright red dot. The
dragged anchor always coincides with one of the model
vertices or, unless the snap to grid option is off, with one of
the background grid nodes. You can see the coordinates of
the dragged anchor point in the status bar.
After the drop QuickField calculates the difference between
initial and final anchor positions and shifts all dragged
objects exactly for the length of that vector.
Example: Suppose that you want to move a group of model
objects containing the point with coordinates (a, b). After
the move the new coordinates of the point should be (c, d).
Here is the sequence of required actions:
• If there is no vertex at (a, b), add it choosing Add Nodes
from the Edit menu and entering the coordinates in the
dialog.
• If there is no vertex at (c, d), add it in the same way.
• Select the objects to move including the vertex at (a, b).
• Place mouse pointer over this vertex and press the left
button. You will see the anchor at (a, b).
• Drag the objects until the anchor coincides with the
vertex at (c, d) and release the mouse. The first vertex
will be moved exactly to (c, d).
• Delete one or both of the created vertices (in most cases,
the first vertex will not exist after move) if you no longer
need them.
Visual Drag Effects
To help you drag and drop objects correctly QuickField
provides visual feedback consisting of:
68 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

• the dragged anchor position indicated by the bright red

dot and its coordinates in the status bar;
• the shape of the cursor;
• the rubberband representation of the dragged edges;
• the status message telling how to change the drag mode.
Using of the anchor is described in Defining the Exact Drop
Position
A shape of the cursor reflects your choice between moving
and copying of the objects. The Copy cursor displayed by
QuickField shows the plus sign ('+') while the Move cursor
does not. As usual, the cursor displayed over the places
where drop is not allowed looks like the "No Parking" sign.
The rubberband always contains all the edges those will be
moved or copied to another position upon Drop. When you
move connected objects the rubberband also contains the
connecting edges.

Note: the rubberband does not contain any of selected

isolated vertices. This does not mean that these vertices will
not be moved or copied. When isolated vertices constitute
the whole selection, the only things that move during drag
are the cursor and the anchor.

When you change the drag mode the rubberband feedback

and the shape of the cursor are changed appropriately.
Drag Modes and Drop Effects
Dragging of model objects can be performed in different
modes. The drag mode used immediately before the drop
defines the actions performed by QuickField.
 Geometry Description 69

Drag mode is defined by:

• the mouse button you keep pressed while dragging; and
• the state of CTRL and ALT keyboard keys before the drop.
There is no way to change the mouse button in the middle
of the drag - you press it at the beginning and release to
perform the drop. On the other hand, you can change the
state of CTRL and ALT keyboard keys at any moment.

Note. If you drag with right mouse button make sure that the
ALT key is released before the drop. If you release the right
mouse button with the ALT key pressed QuickField will do
nothing.

To get the specific drop effect choose the drag mode

according to the following rules:
• To choose the required action from the displayed context
menu drag with right mouse button and keep control keys
released before the drop.
• To move the objects inside the same model preserving
connections between the moved and the stationary parts
drag with left mouse button and keep control keys
released before the drop.
• To move the objects inside the same model breaking
connections between the moved and the stationary parts
drag with left mouse button and press ALT before the
drop.
• To copy the objects inside the same model drag with left
mouse button and press CTRL before the drop.
70 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

• To copy the objects to another model drag with left

mouse button and keep CTRL key released before the
drop.
• To move the objects to another model drag with left
mouse button and press ALT keeping CTRL released
before the drop. QuickField cannot preserve connections
between different models.
Canceling Drop
To cancel drop either press the ESC key on the keyboard or
click the alternate mouse button before drop. Besides that,
drag will not be started if you release the pressed button
without moving the mouse. In the latter case QuickField
proceeds as if you performed the corresponding mouse
click.
Actions Performed on Drop
Depending on the drag mode used at the drop moment
QuickField chooses the action from the following list:
• Moving the dragged objects preserving their connections
with the rest of the model;
Or,
• Moving the dragged objects breaking their connections
with the rest of the model;
Or,
• Copying the dragged objects.
If you drag with the right mouse button, QuickField displays
the context menu with available drop actions and waits for
your choice. Besides the actions listed above this menu
 Geometry Description 71

contains the Cancel option. If you close the menu without

choosing any item, QuickField does nothing.
If you dragged with the left mouse button, QuickField
defines the required action depending on the last drag mode
used before the drop. The correspondence between the drag
modes and the actions performed after drop is described in
Drag Modes and Drop Effects.
The effects of drag-copying are the same as if you invoked
the Duplicate command for the selected objects shifting the
copies together with the anchor point.
The effects of drag-moving are sometimes different from
the similar Move operation. Here are the main differences:
• The Move operation never moves objects from one
model to another. Drag-moving can move objects to
another model breaking the connections with the
stationary part of the source model.
• The Move operation does not allow changing the model
topology - it does not allow moving vertices to other
blocks, or creation of intersections. Drag-moving inside
the same model does not have any limitations.
• The Move operation always preserves the labels of the
related objects. Drag-moving might cause labels to
change.
See also Dragging to Another Model.
Undo after Drag and Drop
QuickField Model Editor performs Undo/Redo operations
on per-model basis. It maintains separate stack of model
states for every model and, when you request Undo or Redo,
72 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

restores the state of the model before or after the

corresponding operation.
If several model windows are opened simultaneously,
Model Editor performs Undo/Redo for the model displayed
in the active window. To make another window active, click
anywhere inside it. Click scrollbar if you do not want to
change the current selection set of the model.
Unlike other Model Editor operations, Drag and Drop might
affect two different models at once. When you drag a group
of items moving them from one model to another,
QuickField changes both the source and the target models.
In case you want to Undo the effects of the whole operation
you need to do it for each of these models separately. If you
decide to Undo the effects only on one of the models, you
should be careful and prior to performing Undo make sure
that proper model window is active at the moment.
Dragging to Another View
In some cases moving model objects could be quite
inconvenient. For example, this would be the case when you
need to move or copy relatively small objects across
relatively large spaces. Inconveniency would be caused by
the fact that it is impossible simultaneously select the small
source objects and fit the target place inside the window.
This inconveniency could be easily eliminated with Drag
and Drop between different views of the same model. Try
the following:
• Open the second window for the same model choosing
New Window from Window menu.
• Arrange the windows so that both are visible.
 Geometry Description 73

• Zoom in the first window on the source objects. Select

those objects you want to move or copy.
• Zoom in the second window on the target place.
• Drag the selected objects from the first to the second
window.
Dragging to Another Model
There are several things that make dragging to another
model slightly different from that where the source and the
target models are one. Here is the short list of the
differences:
• You cannot move objects to another model preserving
connections between the moved and the stationary parts
of the source model.
• Move is the default operation (the operation performed
on drop with released control keys) when you drag inside
the same model; Copy is the default when you drag to
another model.
• To undo the effects of Move to another model you would
have to perform Undo twice - once for each of the
involved models.
• Both Move and Copy to another model might cause the
target problem to become incompletely defined. This is
caused by the fact that Model Editor automatically adds
all missing labels associated with the moved/copied
objects to the target model, but fails to copy the
corresponding label definitions from the source to the
target data file.
• Both Move and Copy to another model might make the
target coordinates of an object different from its source
coordinates. This is the case when the source and the
74 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

target models use different length units.

Copying/moving objects to another model Model Editor
preserves the real-world sizes, for example, the source
length of 1 m becomes 100 cm when the source model
uses meters and the target model uses centimeters as their
length units.
Using Clipboard
You can copy selected model objects to the Clipboard and
then Paste them to another place of the same model, or
transfer to another model. Doing this you can either preserve
the original objects, or Cut them from the source model.
To invoke Copy, Cut, or Paste choose the corresponding
command from the Edit or context menu, or click the
corresponding toolbar button, or press one of the keyboard
shortcuts listed below.
The Copy/Cut commands are disabled when none of the
model objects are selected. The Paste command is disabled
when the Clipboard does not contain geometric objects
copied with the copy/cut operations.
When you paste one or several objects into a model,
positioning of the pasted objects relative to each other
remains the same as in the source model. If the target model
is empty QuickField preserves the original coordinates of
the pasted objects. Otherwise, to separate the pasted objects
from the rest of the target model QuickField places them
behind the right bound of the target model. This makes
possible dragging of the objects to another position and
preserves original object properties - labels and mesh
spacing values.
 Geometry Description 75

The pasted objects remain selected after the operation. All

other objects in the target model become unselected.
Keyboard shortcuts:
Copy CTRL+C
Cut CTRL+X
Paste CTRL+V

Undo/Redo Operations
To undo the latest operation, make sure that the active
window shows the geometric model you are editing and
choose Undo <your last operation> from the Edit menu.
To redo the last operation undone, make sure that the active
window shows the geometric model you are editing and
choose Redo <last operation undone> from the Edit
menu. QuickField modifies the corresponding menu items
to show you which operations would be undone and redone.
By default QuickField allows you to undo 25 latest
operations for every model. You cannot increase the number
of undoable operations above 100 but you can make it any
number between 0 and 100 at any time. You can find the
detailed description of this feature in Undo Settings.
The operations that could be undone are listed in Undoable
Operations.
Keyboard shortcuts:
Undo CTRL+Z
Redo CTRL+Y
Undo Settings
To be able to undo and redo your editing operations
QuickField maintains internal stack of increments to
76 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

geometrical model database associated with these

operations. The topmost increment on stack corresponds to
the latest editing operation performed. QuickField also
keeps track of its current stack position that steps in top-to-
bottom direction with every Undo action and steps in the
opposite direction with every Redo action.
The depth of this internal stack defines maximum number
of operations you can undo. When the total number of
editing operations on the model exceeds the stack depth, the
database increments corresponding to the eldest operations
are destroyed to free stack positions for new increments.
When you start QuickField the stack depth has its default
value of 25 that allows to undo last 25 editing operations
done on the model.
Maintaining geometrical model database increments
impacts QuickField memory requirements. To make you
able to influence this impact QuickField provides the
possibility to reduce the depth of internal undo stack. You
can do it at any time setting the depth value to any integer
between 0 and 100 (both limits included). Ultimately,
setting the stack depth to 0 switches off storage of database
increments and effectively disables Undo/Redo feature until
you make stack depth positive.
To change undo stack depth for a model do the following:
• Make sure that active window shows the model that you
want to change depth for;
• Choose Undo Settings... from the Edit menu
• After Undo Settings dialog appears on screen, change
undo stack depth to desired value and click OK.
 Geometry Description 77

If the new depth value exceeds the old one, only the depth
of the stack is affected. Stack contents remains unchanged
allowing you to undo and redo the operations performed
before this change. The same is true if the new depth value
is less than the old one but still exceeds the number of
accumulated stack positions.
Suppose, for example, that you started QuickField,
performed 10 editing operations and invoked Undo 5 times.
At this moment the stack accumulates 10 stack positions. If
you decide to reduce stack depth to 10 no database
increments will be lost. If, however, you decide to perform
one more editing operation before reducing the depth, you
lose the possibility to redo anything and the number of
accumulated positions becomes equal to 6. After that you
can set the depth to 6 and lose nothing.
The only case you lose some of accumulated data changing
undo stack depth is when you reduce the depth to the value
that is less than the number of accumulated stack positions.
In such case, QuickField performs the following actions:
• if the new depth value exceeds the number of positions
below current stack position, QuickField discards
several topmost database increments to make the number
of remaining increments equal to new stack depth;
• if the new depth value is less than the number of
positions below current stack position, QuickField
retains only the database increments at the current stack
position and immediately below it making the number of
retained database increments equal to new stack depth.
Suppose once again that you started QuickField, performed
10 editing operations and invoked Undo 5 times. If at this
78 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

moment you set depth to 7, only 3 topmost positions will be

discarded. You will still be allowed both to undo 5
operations with database increments below current stack
position and to redo 2 operations with increments retained
above current stack position. On the other hand, if you
decide to set depth to 2 you will only be able to undo 2
operations with database increments retained immediately
below current position.
Undoable Operations
You can undo the following types of geometric operations
(we use menu item labels whenever appropriate):
• Add Edge
• Add Vertices
• Build Mesh
• Cut
• Delete Edges
• Delete Vertices
• Delete Selection
• Drag
• Drop
• Duplicate
• Import DXF
• Move Selection
• Paste
• Properties
• Refine Mesh
• Remove Mesh
• Select
• Select All
 Geometry Description 79

• Unselect All

Definition of Properties, Field Sources and Boundary

Conditions
Labels establish the correspondence between geometrical
objects and their physical properties, such as material
properties, boundary conditions, or field sources.
Assigning Labels to Objects
To assign labels to objects:
• Select the required objects
• Choose Properties from the Edit or context menu.
• Type the label and click OK.

You can simultaneously set different labels to different

kinds of objects - blocks, edges, or vertices - defining these
labels on different pages of the Selection Properties dialog.

Meshing Technology
Having described a reasonable part of the model geometry
you can start building the finite element mesh. It is
80 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

important to remember that the mesh you build even for a

highly complex geometry can be rather non-uniform.
Namely, you can set the size of mesh elements in some of
the model blocks to be much less than in the other blocks.
In such cases the meshing technology we call geometric
decomposition will automatically produce smooth transition
from large to small elements of the mesh. As a rule, the
places where the mesh has to be the finest are those with the
highest field gradient and those where you need higher
precision.
In case of simple model geometry we suggest to leave
calculation of element sizes to QuickField. The same applies
to the case of preliminary design analysis when draft
precision should perfectly suit your needs. Click the
Build Mesh toolbar button and QuickField will
automatically generate suitable mesh.
It might happen, however, that the quality of the
automatically generated mesh would not satisfy you. For
such cases, QuickField provides you with the way to set the
mesh density manually. You control the mesh density
defining mesh spacing values for particular model vertices.
The mesh spacing value defined for a vertex specifies the
approximate distance between adjacent mesh nodes in the
neighborhood of the vertex.
You never need to define the spacing for all model vertices.
To obtain a uniform mesh it would be enough to set the
spacing for a single vertex. If you need non-uniform mesh
start with defining the spacing values only for the vertices
where you need the finest and the roughest mesh. The
spacing values will be automatically interpolated to other
 Geometry Description 81

model vertices smoothing the mesh density distribution

across the meshed blocks. Use selection mechanism to
simplify assigning the same mesh spacing value to several
vertices at once.
With spacing values in place you are ready to build the mesh
and eventually solve your problem.
In some cases the obtained solution results might show that
you need more precise results in some places of the model.
This is the good reason to change the density of your mesh.
Doing that, do not forget the following:
• When you change the spacing value for a vertex,
QuickField automatically removes the mesh from all
blocks adjacent to this vertex.
• The spacing values defined along the boundaries of the
blocks retaining their mesh will be frozen as if they were
defined manually.
To set mesh spacing:
• Select vertices, edges or blocks, in neighborhood of
which you need to specify the same spacing value.
• Choose Properties from the Edit or context menu.
• Type the spacing value and click OK.
If you specify mesh spacing for selected blocks or edges the
spacing value is assigned to the vertices on the ends of the
edges and/or on block boundaries.
If the spacing visibility switch is on (Spacing in View
menu), the explicitly set spacing values are shown as small
circles around the vertices
To build mesh do one of the following:
82 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

• Choose the appropriate option of Build Mesh submenu

in the Edit or context menu. QuickField will build mesh
in the blocks specified by the chosen option.
• Click Build Mesh toolbar button. QuickField will build
mesh in:
• Selected blocks, if any exist
• Otherwise, in labeled blocks, if any exist
• Otherwise, in all model blocks.
QuickField can mesh any subset of model blocks at a time.
However, when you start to solve the problem all blocks
included in field calculation must be covered with mesh.
You can watch the mesh building process in real time if
Mesh or Domains toggle in View menu is on.
To remove the mesh do one of the following:
• Choose the appropriate option from the Remove Mesh
submenu of the Edit or context menu. The blocks
described by the chosen option will be unmeshed.
• Click the Remove Mesh toolbar button. All selected
blocks will be unmeshed. If none of the blocks are
selected, mesh will be removed from all model blocks.

Geometry Model Properties Window

The Properties window can be opened using the Properties
command in the View menu. This window is docked to the
task windows (as shown in the figure) by default or can
switched to floating.
The Properties window dynamically displays the current
model's properties.
 Tuning the View of the Model 83

The figure shows the statistics related to the geometry model

as well as the properties of the selected geometric objects
(blocks, edges, and nodes). Some properties like the object
label or the discretization step may be changed by typing it
in or selecting the new value from the drop-down list.
The label value is set separately for every type of geometric
object.
To set the step of discretization, switch the mode to Manual
and enter the new Spacing value or select one from the list.

Tuning the View of the Model

QuickField provides the following ways to control the
contents of the model window:
84 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

• Zooming the Model - gives you the ability to see more

or less of your model to deal with small or large objects.
• Setting Model Discretization Visibility - makes the
picture more suitable to specific tasks of model creation
process.
• Changing Background Grid Settings - simplifies
creation of model vertices and edges.
Consider also opening several windows for the same model
and tuning them differently. To do so, choose New Window
from the Window menu.

Zooming
To match window size with the size of the model:
• Click Zoom to Fit toolbar button.
To magnify the picture:
• Click Zoom In toolbar button.
• With left button pressed drag the mouse diagonally
drawing a rubberband rectangle around that part of the
model you want to fill the window, and release the
button.
Or
• Click inside the window. QuickField will use
magnification factor 2 relative to the clicked point.
Shortcut: CTRL + emulates click at the
central point of the window.
To see more of the model:
• Click Zoom Out toolbar button.
Shortcut: CTRL -
 Tuning the View of the Model 85

Model Discretization Visibility

There are four switches in the View menu that control the
discretization visibility level: Mesh, Domains, Breaking,
and Spacing. These are accessible in the View menu. When
all these switches are off, QuickField displays blocks
without discretization. This mode is the most convenient
when you describe the geometry and assign labels to
objects. When the Spacing switch is on, QuickField draws
the circles with corresponding radiuses around the vertices
where the spacing values have been set manually.
When the Breaking switch is on, the ends of the elements
are indicated with tic marks along the edges. It is convenient
to switch both Spacing and Breaking on while setting the
mesh spacing values. Turn the Mesh switch on to view the
mesh building process. In the end you will see the complete
triangular mesh. If the Domains switch is on and the Mesh
switch is off, QuickField displays the subdomains prepared
for triangulation by the geometric decomposition process.

Background Grid
Grid makes creation of model vertices and edges easier and
helps to check correctness of the model. To change the grid,
choose Grid Settings in the Edit or context menu and
change the dialog fields described below according to your
needs.
86 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

The Show Grid option allows to switch grid visibility on

and off.
The Snap to Grid option allows to switch grid attraction on
and off. When attraction is on new vertices can appear either
at intersection points of model edges or at grid nodes. This
makes model description faster and results in more
consistent models.
The Grid Spacing field defines the sizes of the grid cell. To
define different horizontal and vertical sizes, first check the
Anisotropic box.
The Anisotropic option allows to define the grid cell with
different horizontal and vertical sizes.
The Scale with Zoom option allows to switch between
different policies related to changing grid cell sizes with
zoom.
When the option is on (default) the grid cell sizes retain
approximately the same values in screen coordinates.
When the option is off the grid cell sizes retain the same
values in length units defined for the model.
 Exchanging Model Fragments with Other Programs 87

The Grid Origin field defines the coordinates of one of grid

nodes. This allows to create vertices at even distances from
the point with such coordinates.

Exchanging Model Fragments with Other

Programs
Importing Model Fragments from DXF Files
You can import model geometry or its fragments from a
DXF file produced by any of major CAD systems. To do so,
click Import DXF in the File menu and enter the required
file name in the dialog. If needed, the window will be
automatically zoomed after the import to fit the entire
model.
When importing the 2D geometry from CAD systems it is
often required to fix the imported model errors. In particular,
some nodes closely positioned to other nodes or edges in
fact should be merged into the single node. This algorithm
is controlled by the relative accuracy parameter (as a
fraction of the model size), which may be adjusted in the
model property window. Dimensionless parameter
Settings/DXF import/ Tolerance defines the geometry
tolerance as a ratio from the maximal model size.
88 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

Ignore extents? is a flag for ignoring the size of the model

fragment recorded in the DXF file. In some cases this
information is incorrect and may prevent the successful
model import.
We provide the special add-in to QuickField that allows you
to import sketches from running SolidWorks® application
to QuickField models. Choose Import from SolidWorks...
command from the Edit menu to invoke this add-in.
For more details refer to online help library.

Exporting Model Fragments to DXF Files

You can export model geometry or its fragments to files in
DXF format which is readable by QuickField and by all
major CAD system. To do so, choose Export DXF from the
File menu and specify the name of the output file in the
dialog. If some of the model objects are selected, choose
whether to export the selected objects or the entire model.
It is also possible to export the model mesh to an ASCII text
file. This feature allows to interact with other finite element
analysis programs. In particular, you can use QuickField as
a mesh generator for your own FEM solver.
The detailed description of the resulting file format can be
found in the QuickField Help. In brief – the file contains the
data defining the model geometry, the finite element mesh
and the labels assigned to model objects. We provide the
utility allowing to import files in this format to MATLAB®
in the form compatible with Partial Differential Equations
Toolbox (PDE Toolbox).
 Exchanging Model Fragments with Other Programs 89

Copying Model Picture to Windows Clipboard

You can copy the model picture, as you see it in the window,
to clipboard for subsequent including it to your paper or
report in any word-processing or desktop publishing utility.
• To copy the picture, click Copy Visible Picture in the
Edit or context menu.
The picture is copied to the clipboard in both vector (WMF
and EMF) and raster (device independent bitmap)
representation.

Exporting Model Picture

The model picture may be saved to a file in either vector or
raster representation. Vector formats include Windows
Metafile format (WMF) or Extended Windows Metafile
(EMF).
The list of supported raster formats includes BMP, GIF,
TIFF, JPEG and PNG. Select BMP for maximum picture
quality, (without compression), GIF if you prefer the
minimum size, JPEG or PNG as a compromise between size
and quality, and TIFF for best compatibility with prepress
or publishing software.
For raster formats QuickField allows to define the height
and width of the resulting picture in pixels. Their default
value is agreed with the actual size of the copied window.
Increasing of the raster picture size requires more disk
space, but provides higher quality pictures for publishing.
90 Chapter 4 Model Geometry Definition

To save the picture into the file:

• Select “Export Picture” in the File menu of the
window with the picture displayed. File name and
format selection dialogue will be shown.
• Select needed File Type from the list, and set the
name and location of the file in the File Name field.
• Click on OK button.
• The Picture Properties dialog box will be displayed
if one of the raster formats is chosen. Here you may
accept the default picture size, or redefine it by setting
other height and width.

Printing the Model

You can directly print the model picture to your local or
network printer, just as you see the model in the window,
with the same zooming and discretization visibility.
• To print the picture, choose Print from the File menu.
You will be able to choose the printer and set up such
picture settings as paper size and orientation, before the
printing process begins.
• To preview the output before printing, choose
Print Preview from the File menu.
• To see how the picture looks on the printer of your
choice, choose Print Setup.
 91

C H A P T E R 5

Problem Parameters Description

Before solving the problem you have to describe properties

of materials and define field sources and boundary
conditions. QuickField associates groups of related
parameters with labels storing these labeled groups in
property description files. When you edit the geometric
model you label some of its elements thereby linking these
elements with properties associated with the labels.
Labeling blocks, edges and vertices is described in
Chapter 4 "Model Geometry Definition".
Property description labels can be divided into groups:
With 2D-analysis:
• block labels describing material properties and loads for
sub-regions of the model;
• edge labels assigning specific boundary conditions to
model boundaries;
• vertex labels describing singular sources or constraints
applied to points of the model.
With 3D-analysis:
• body labels describing material properties and loads for
three-dimensional solids of the model;
• face labels assigning specific boundary conditions to
model boundary faces;
92 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

• edge labels assigning specific boundary conditions to

model boundary edges;
• vertex labels describing singular sources or constraints
applied to points of the model.
Property descriptions differ between different problem
types. QuickField opens property descriptions for different
problem types in different windows and stores them in a
different files with different file extensions:
Problem type File extension
DC and Transient magnetics .dms
AC (time-harmonic) magnetics .dhe
Electrostatics .des
DC conduction .dcf
AC conduction .dec
Transient electric analysis .dtv
Steady state and Transient heat .dht
transfer
Stress analysis .dsa
• To create empty property description, open File menu,
click New, and select appropriate document type from
the list.
• To load property descriptions from the existing file, open
File menu and click Open, or drag the file from
Windows Explorer into QuickField window, or open the
corresponding QuickField problem and double-click the
name of the file in problem description window.
 Editing properties of materials and boundary conditions 93

Editing properties of materials and boundary

conditions
Having opened the property description file, you will see a
new window displaying property labels as a tree. The tree
contains three branches representing, top to bottom, labels
assigned to blocks, edges and vertices. To provide visual
assistance to users, QuickField accompanies all labels with
meaningful icons.
Icons displayed by the labels mean:
2D Analysis 3D Analysis
Block label Body label specifying
specifying material material properties
properties
Edge label specifying Face label specifying
boundary condition boundary condition
Vertex label Edge label specifying
specifying boundary boundary condition
condition or source
Vertex label specifying
None boundary condition or
source
Label without associated properties that is
referenced in a model
Empty block label. The blocks assigned this
label will be excluded from calculations.
Label associated with default boundary
condition and zero source
94 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

Creating a New Label

To create a new label:
1. Open Insert menu and click Block Label, Edge Label or
Vertex Label (Body Label, Face Label, Edge Label or
Vertex Label in a case of 3D analysis), or click New
Label in the context (right mouse button) menu of the
corresponding branch of labels in the tree.
2. A new label appears in the list prompting you to specify
the label’s name.
3. Type the name and press enter.
4. After you define the data, new label appears in the list of
existing labels. If data editing was canceled, new label is
not created.

Editing Label Data

To edit the data associated with a label:
• double-click the label in the list, or
• select the label and click Properties in Edit menu, or
• right-click the label and choose Properties from context
menu.
You will see a dialog box dependent on the types of the
problem and the geometric object linked to the label.
To close the dialog accepting all changes, click OK. To
close the dialog discarding changes, click Cancel.
 Editing Label Data 95

Editing Data in DC and Transient Magnetics

Block labels in magnetostatic problems can be associated

with data containing two components of magnetic
permeability tensor, the total current or the current density,
and the magnitude and the direction of permanent magnet’s
coercive force.
To specify linear or circular magnetization, select
Cartesian or Polar coordinates respectively. In case of
Cartesian coordinates the angle is measured from the
horizontal axis. In case of Polar coordinates the angle is
measured from the radius vector.
Both magnitude and direction of coercive force could be a
function of coordinates and time.
For nonlinear materials, magnetic permeability is replaced
with magnetization curve. To define a new curve, check
Nonlinear. It will get you into B-H curve editor. If B-H
96 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

curve is already defined, the dialog box contains the

B-H Curve button allowing you to open the curve editor.
Editing the magnetization curve is discussed in "Editing
Curves" section later in this chapter.

Cartesian Polar
α
α

α α α α
α

When you associate data with a new label, the text boxes for
magnetic permeability components contain None. The word
None in these boxes or absence of the values mean blocks
with the label will be excluded from calculations. To define
the material’s properties (thereby including the blocks into
calculation), type in the required value of magnetic
permeability.
As long as Anisotropic is unchecked, QuickField changes
the components of magnetic permeability tensor
synchronously. To specify different components, check
Anisotropic before entering the required values. The dialog
 Editing Label Data 97

labels besides tensor components reflect the coordinate

system (Cartesian or Polar) selected for the property.
For transient problems, QuickField allows specifying non-
zero electric conductivity in any block. In such case, it
calculates the distribution of eddy currents in this block. The
electrical conductivity of the material can be a function of
coordinates and time or may depend on temperature.
Dependency is given in tabular form and automatically be
approximated by a spline. To specify the electrical
conductivity, which depends on temperature, check the
Function of Temperature check box to get into the curve
editor.
Enter a number or a formula into the Temperature field.
The formula describes the temperature dependency on time
and coordinates. Please note that all coordinates in a formula
are given in meters with no regards to the length units you
have chosen for the problem.

Note. The temperature value could be given either in Celsius

or Kelvin degrees, but you have to use the same units in the
Temperature field and in the curve.

The ways you define field sources for transient and non-
transient problems are slightly different. Also transient
problems allow using two types of conductors, stranded and
solid. QuickField distinguishes between these types by the
specified electric conductivity. Zero electric conductivity
value implies stranded conductor and no eddy currents in
the block. Non-zero value implies solid conductor and
forces QuickField to calculate eddy current distribution for
the block.
98 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

For non-transient problems, as well as for zero electric

conductivity blocks in transient problems, you can define
the field source either by current density value or by the total
number of ampere-turns (total current). For total current,
QuickField will, depending on your choice, either consider
the blocks labeled with the label as single conductor or as
several conductors connected in series. Serially connected
conductors always carry the same current with calculated
current densities inversely proportional to their squares.
Providing total number of ampere-turns for axisymmetric
problems, you can additionally specify that current density
in your coil varies inversely to radius rather than being
distributed uniformly. It might be closer to reality if your
block represents massive spiral coil with considerably
different internal and external diameters.
The specified current density can depend on coordinates.
Besides that, for transient problems, both the current density
and the total current can be time-dependent. To specify
time- or coordinate-dependent physical property, type the
required formula in place of numerical value. Formulas are
discussed in detail in "Using Formulas" section later in this
chapter.
For transient problems, QuickField allows specifying non-
zero electric conductivity in any block. In such case, it
calculates the distribution of eddy currents in this block. For
non-zero electric conductivity blocks in transient problems,
you define the field source as applied voltage or total
current. QuickField considers the voltage as applied to
whole conductor. The voltage, therefore, cannot depend on
coordinates but can be time-dependent.
 Editing Label Data 99

If the field analysis is performed with the electric circuit

connected, then applied voltage or the full current for the
solid conductor (with non-zero conductivity) cannot be
defined in the label properties window. Instead of it, include
all the conductive blocks into electric circuit with voltage or
current sources attached to them. Only the parallel or serial
connection of the separate conductors with the same label
assigned should be defined in the label properties window.

Edge labels can be associated with boundary conditions.

Select condition type and enter appropriate values.
Dirichlet (known magnetic potential) and Neumann (a
density of surface current) boundary conditions can depend
on coordinates. For transient problems, they can also be
time-dependent. To specify time- or coordinate-dependent
boundary condition, enter the required formula in place of
numerical value. Formulas are discussed in detail in "Using
Formulas" section later in this chapter.
100 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

Vertex labels in magnetostatic problem can be associated

with known magnetic potential or concentrated current
values. Check one of the options and enter appropriate
value.
In transient magnetic problem magnetic potential or linear
current can be time dependent. To specify time dependent
boundary condition enter the required formula in place of
numerical value. Formula syntax and other details are
discussed in detail in "Using Formulas" section later in this
chapter.
Magnetic potential and concentrated current can depend on
coordinates. In such case, QuickField calculates individual
boundary condition values for all vertices linked to the label.
 Editing Label Data 101

Editing Data in AC Magnetics

Block labels in problems of AC magnetics can be associated

with data containing the values of two components of
magnetic permeability tensor, the value of electric
conductivity and one of three values defining the field
source: source current density, voltage, or total current.
When you associate data with a new label, the text boxes for
magnetic permeability components contain None. The word
None in these boxes or absence of the values mean that
blocks with this label will be excluded from calculations. To
define the material’s properties (thereby including the
blocks into calculation), type in the required value of
magnetic permeability.
As long as Anisotropic is unchecked, QuickField changes
the components of magnetic permeability tensor
synchronously. To specify different components, check
Anisotropic before entering the required values. The dialog
102 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

labels besides tensor components reflect the coordinate

system (Cartesian or Polar) selected for the property.
When dealing with nonlinear materials, instead of magnetic
permeability you need to define the magnetization curve. To
do so, check the Nonlinear box and QuickField will display
the Edit B-H Curve dialog that allows to define the curve.
To reopen the Edit Curve dialog later, click the Edit B-H
Curve button.

Note. In AC Harmonic Magnetics the magnetic flux density

value at every field point depends on time. So, the magnetic
permeability values do the same. To calculate the field
values QuickField defines such equivalent time-
independent magnetic permeability that the average
magnetic field energy, (B·H)/2, for the period remains
unchanged.

Defining a magnetization curve with the Curve Editor you

specify the DC-based B(H) dependency and QuickField
automatically recalculates the curve for the problem-defined
frequency. The graph shows the original DC-based curve in
green color while the curve recalculated for the problem-
defined frequency is dashed red.
Enter the value of electrical conductivity to the
Conductivity field or leave zero for non-conductive
material. The electrical conductivity of the material may
depend on temperature. Dependency is given in tabular form
and automatically be approximated by a spline. To specify
the electrical conductivity, which depends on temperature,
check the Function of Temperature check box, to get into
the curve editor.
 Editing Label Data 103

Enter a number or a formula into the Temperature field.

The formula describes the temperature dependency on
coordinates. Please note that all coordinates in a formula are
given in meters no regards to length units you have choose
for the problem.
You can import the temperature field from a coupled heat
transfer problem. To do that create and solve a heat transfer
problem based on the same geometry model, and link it to
the problem. When the imported temperature field and
temperature given by a constant or a formula are both
available, the imported temperature will be used.

Note. The temperature value could be given either in Celsius

or Kelvin degrees, but you have to use the same units in the
Temperature field and in the curve.

If the field analysis is performed with the electric circuit

connected, then applied voltage or the full current for the
solid conductor (with non-zero conductivity) cannot be
defined in the label properties window. Instead of it, include
all the conductive blocks into electric circuit with voltage or
current sources attached to them. Only the parallel or serial
connection of the separate conductors with the same label
assigned should be defined in the label properties window.
The ways you define field sources are different for
conductors and non-conductive blocks. For solid
conductors, you specify either applied voltage or total
current. For non-conductive blocks and stranded conductors
you always specify zero conductivity value and the field
source can only be specified by total current or current
density values.
104 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

You can specify coordinate-dependent current density phase

and magnitude. To do it, enter the required formula in place
of numerical value. Formula syntax and other details are
discussed in detail in "Using Formulas" section later in this
chapter.
For total current and applied voltage, QuickField will,
depending on your choice, either consider the blocks labeled
with the label as single conductor or as several conductors
connected in series. Serially connected conductors always
carry the same current, whereas current densities will be
calculated when QuickField finishes solution of the
problem.

Note. Unless the conductors are connected in series, the

value of total current associated with a block label specifies
the gross current in all blocks labeled with that label.

With time-harmonic problems, you always specify

amplitude (peak) values for all alternating quantities.
The tab “Core loss” allows entering properties for the soft
magnetic material, which are required to calculate the core
losses in it. These parameters are optional. If no data
entered, then with default zero values the core losses will
not be calculated in the corresponding blocks. Entered
parameters are considered to be in W/m3 units.
 Editing Label Data 105

There are two main causes for the magnetic material losses:
ohmic losses generated by eddy currents, and losses caused
by the cyclic reversal of the magnetization and proportional
to the area of the hysteresis loop. If the non-zero
conductivity is specified, then for this material eddy current
losses are calculated automatically and there is no need to
specify the loss coefficients separately.
Situation is different for the laminated cores, which are
made of thin isolated sheets. In the laminated cores the
electrical conductivity should be set as 0, otherwise the eddy
currents simulated with QuickField will be too large.
However, even the small eddy currents generate the losses.
They are usually taken into account using some empirical
formula.
QuickField uses the empirical Bertotti formula for core loss
calculation:
p = kh·f·B2 + kc·f 2· B2 + ke· (f·B)1.5
Here B – magnitude of the module of the flux density vector
per period, f – problem frequency, kh, kc, ke – volume power
loss coefficients for specific magnetic material. Default zero
values of the loss coefficient will exclude the corresponding
loss component from the calculations.
106 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

First term of the formula above corresponds to the hysteresis

losses, second- to the Eddy current losses, and third
approximates the additional magnetic losses, not covered by
first two loss types.
Specific loss coefficients for the given material are
calculated outside QuickField by data fitting using the
known or measured tables of the volume losses per flux
density and frequency pст = f(B, f).
More details about the loss coefficient calculations may be
found at
www.quickfield.com/glossary/core_loss_coefficients.htm

Edge labels can be associated with boundary conditions.

Select condition type and enter appropriate values.
Dirichlet (known magnetic potential) and Neumann (a
density of surface current) boundary conditions can depend
on coordinates. To specify coordinate-dependent boundary
condition, enter the required formula in place of numerical
 Editing Label Data 107

value. Formulas are discussed in detail in "Using Formulas"

section later in this chapter.
For details about the periodic boundary condition, please see
section "Periodic Boundary Conditions" later in this
chapter.

A vertex label in AC magnetics can be associated with

known potential or concentrated current values. Check one
of the options and enter appropriate value.
Magnetic potential and concentrated current can depend on
coordinates. In such case, QuickField calculates individual
boundary condition values for all vertices linked to the label.

Editing Data in Electrostatics

108 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

Block labels in electrostatics problem can be associated with

data containing two components of electric permittivity
tensor and electric charge density.
When you associate data with a new label, the text boxes for
electric permittivity components contain None. The word
None in these boxes or absence of the values means blocks
with the label will be excluded from calculations. To define
the material’s properties (thereby including the blocks into
calculation), type in the required value of electric
permittivity.
As long as Anisotropic is unchecked, QuickField changes
the components of electric permittivity tensor
synchronously. To specify different components, check
Anisotropic before entering the required values. The dialog
labels besides tensor components reflect the coordinate
system (Cartesian or Polar) selected for the property.
You can specify coordinate-dependent electric charge
density. To do it, enter the required formula in place of
numerical value. Formula syntax and other details are
discussed in detail in "Using Formulas" section later in this
chapter.
When working with 3D electrostatic analysis, the
permittivity and a given charge density are given in a body
label. You edit the body label almost in the same way as a
2D block label, except that anisotropy is not supported here
so far.
 Editing Label Data 109

Edge labels can be associated with boundary conditions.

Select condition type and enter appropriate values.
Dirichlet (known voltage) and Neumann (known normal
component of electric induction) boundary conditions can
depend on coordinates. To specify coordinate-dependent
boundary condition, enter the required formula in place of
numerical value. Formulas are discussed in detail in "Using
Formulas" section later in this chapter.
For details about the periodic boundary condition, please see
section "Periodic Boundary Conditions" later in this
chapter.

A vertex label in electrostatics can be associated with known

potential or concentrated charge values. Check one of the
options and enter appropriate value.
110 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

The values of known potential and concentrated charge can

depend on coordinates. In such case, QuickField calculates
individual boundary condition values for all vertices linked
to the label.

Editing Data in DC Conduction Problems

Block labels in DC conduction problem can be associated

with data containing two components of electric
conductivity tensor.
When you associate data with a new label, the text boxes for
electric conductivity components contain None. The word
None in these boxes or absence of the values means blocks
with the label will be excluded from calculations. To define
the material’s properties (thereby including the blocks into
calculation), type in the required value of electric
conductivity.
As long as Anisotropic is unchecked, QuickField changes
the components of electric conductivity tensor
synchronously. To specify different components, check
Anisotropic before entering the required values. The dialog
labels besides tensor components reflect the coordinate
system (Cartesian or Polar) selected for the property.
 Editing Label Data 111

The electrical conductivity of the material may depend on

temperature. Dependency is given in tabular form and
automatically be approximated by a spline. To specify the
electrical conductivity, which depends on temperature,
check the Function of Temperature check box to get into
the curve editor.
Enter a number or a formula into the Temperature field.
The formula describes the temperature dependency on
coordinates. Please note that all coordinates in a formula are
given in meters no regards to length units you have choose
for the problem.

Edge labels can be associated with boundary conditions.

Select condition type and enter appropriate values.
Dirichlet (known voltage) and Neumann (known normal DC
conduction density) boundary conditions can depend on
coordinates. To specify coordinate-dependent boundary
condition, enter the required formula in place of numerical
value. Formulas are discussed in detail in "Using Formulas"
section later in this chapter.
112 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

For details about the periodic boundary condition, please see

section "Periodic Boundary Conditions" later in this
chapter.

A vertex label in DC conduction problem can be associated

with known potential or external current values. Check one
of the options and enter appropriate value.
The values of known potential and external current can
depend on coordinates. In such case, QuickField calculates
individual boundary condition values for all vertices linked
to the label.

Editing Data in AC Conduction Problems

Block labels in AC conduction problems can be associated

with data containing the values of two components of
 Editing Label Data 113

electric permittivity tensor and two components of electric

conductivity.
When you associate data with a new label, the text boxes for
electric permittivity components contain None. The word
None in these boxes or absence of the values means blocks
with the label will be excluded from calculations. To define
the material’s properties (thereby including the blocks into
calculation), type in the required value of electric
permittivity.
As long as Anisotropic is unchecked, QuickField changes
the tensor components synchronously. To specify different
component values, check Anisotropic before entering the
required values. The dialog labels besides tensor
components reflect the coordinate system (Cartesian or
Polar) selected for the property.
With time-harmonic problems, you always specify
amplitude, or peak, values for all alternating quantities.

Edge labels can be associated with boundary conditions.

Select condition type and enter appropriate values.
114 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

Dirichlet (known voltage) and Neumann (normal

component of the current density) boundary conditions can
depend on coordinates. To specify coordinate-dependent
boundary condition, enter the required formula in place of
numerical value. Formulas are discussed in detail in "Using
Formulas" section later in this chapter.
For discussion on periodic boundary condition, please see
section "Periodic Boundary Conditions" later in this
chapter.

A vertex label in AC conduction problem can be associated

with known potential or external current values. Check one
of the options and enter appropriate value.
The values of known potential and external current can
depend on coordinates. In such case, QuickField calculates
individual boundary condition values for all vertices linked
to the label.
 Editing Label Data 115

Editing Data in Transient Electric Analysis

Block labels in transient electric problem are similar to AC

Conduction, except both permittivity and conductivity can
be nonlinear.
When you associate data with a new label, the text boxes for
electric permittivity components contain None. The word
None in these boxes or absence of the values means that the
blocks with this label will be excluded from calculations. To
define the material’s properties (thereby including the block
into calculation), type in the required value of electric
permittivity.
To define the field dependent permittivity or conductivity,
check the corresponding Nonlinear box, the curve editor
will appear allowing to enter or edit the dependency curve.
As long as Anisotropic is unchecked, QuickField changes
the tensor components synchronously. To specify different
component values, check Anisotropic before entering the
required values. The dialog labels besides tensor
components reflect the coordinate system (Cartesian or
Polar) selected for the property.
116 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

Edge labels can be associated with boundary conditions.

Select condition type and enter appropriate values.
Dirichlet (known voltage) and Neumann (normal
component of the current density) boundary conditions can
depend on coordinates and on time. To specify coordinate
and time dependent boundary condition, enter the required
formula in place of numerical value. Formulas are discussed
in detail in "Using Formulas" section later in this chapter.
For details about the periodic boundary condition, please see
section "Periodic Boundary Conditions" later in this
chapter.

A vertex label can be associated with known potential or

external current. Check one of the options and enter
appropriate value.
 Editing Label Data 117

These values can be time or coordinate dependent. In this

case QuickField calculates individual boundary condition
values for all vertices linked to the label.

Editing Data in Heat Transfer Problems

Block labels in heat transfer problem can be associated with

data containing two components of thermal conductivity
tensor and heat source volume power. For transient
problems the data should also contain specific heat and
volume density values.
When you associate data with a new label, the text boxes for
thermal conductivity components contain None. The word
None in these boxes or absence of the values means that
blocks with the label will be excluded from calculations. To
define the material’s properties (thereby including the
blocks into calculation), type in the required value of
thermal conductivity.
As long as Anisotropic is unchecked, QuickField changes
the components of thermal conductivity tensor
118 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

synchronously. To specify different components, check

Anisotropic before entering the required values. The dialog
labels besides tensor components reflect the coordinate
system (Cartesian or Polar) selected for the property.
To define thermal conductivity as a function of temperature,
check Nonlinear in Thermal Conductivity field group. It
will get you into temperature curve editor for defining
 = (T). Curve editing is discussed in detail in "Editing
Curves" section later in this chapter.
To define heat source volume power as a function of
temperature, check Function of Temperature. It will get
you into temperature curve editor for defining q = q(T).
Curve editing is described in detail in "Editing Curves".
Heat source volume power can be dependent on coordinates
or, in transient problems, on time. To define coordinate- or
time-dependent heat source volume power, enter the
required formula in place of numerical value. Formulas are
discussed in detail in "Using Formulas" section later in this
chapter.
To define specific heat as a function of temperature, check
Nonlinear in For Time-Domain Only field group. It will get
you into temperature curve editor for defining C = C(T).
Curve editing is described in detail in "Editing Curves".
 Editing Label Data 119

Edge labels can be associated with boundary conditions.

Heat flux, convection, and radiation can be combined
together implying that the heat flow through the surface will
consist of several components. Check appropriate condition
types and enter the required values.
Dirichlet (known temperature), Neumann (heat flux),
convection and radiation boundary conditions can be
coordinate- and, in transient problems, time-dependent. To
specify coordinate- or time-dependent boundary condition,
enter the required formula in place of numerical value.
Formulas are discussed in detail in "Using Formulas"
section later in this chapter.
For details about the periodic boundary condition, please see
section "Periodic Boundary Conditions" later in this
chapter.
120 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

A vertex label in heat transfer problem can be associated

with known temperature or linear heat source. Check one of
the options and enter appropriate value.
The values of known temperature and heat source capacity
can be coordinate- and, in transient problems, time-
dependent. QuickField calculate individual coordinate-
dependent boundary condition values for all vertices linked
to the label. To specify coordinate- or time-dependent
boundary condition, enter the required formula in place of
numerical value. Formulas are discussed in detail in "Using
Formulas" section later in this chapter.

Editing Data in Stress Analysis

Block labels in stress analysis problem can be associated
with three groups of data values, Elasticity, Loads, and
Allowable Stresses. You specify the data contained in these
groups on related dialog pages. All text box labels on these
pages always reflect the coordinate system (Cartesian or
Polar) selected for the property.
 Editing Label Data 121

1. Elasticity

When you associate data with a new label, the text boxes for
Young's moduli contain None. The word None in these
boxes or absence of the values means that blocks with the
label will be excluded from calculations. To define the
material’s properties (thereby including the blocks into
calculation), type in the required values of Young's moduli.
As long as Anisotropic is unchecked, only two of the values
entered on this dialog page remain independent. As you type
in a new value, QuickField automatically updates the rest of
them. To describe orthotropic materials with seven
independent values, check Anisotropic before entering the
required values.
122 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

2. Loads

Body Force vector components can depend on coordinates.

To specify coordinate-dependent loads, enter the required
formula in place of numerical value. Formulas are discussed
in detail in "Using Formulas" section later in this chapter.
The ways you define data for thermal loading are different
for coupled thermo-structural problems and non-coupled
problems:
• For uncoupled problems, you specify the difference in
temperature between strained and strainless states. This
difference is assumed to be the same for all blocks
labeled with this label.
• For coupled thermo-structural problems, you specify the
strainless state temperature of the blocks subjected to
thermal loading. This temperature is assumed to be the
same for all blocks labeled with this label. Solving the
problem, QuickField defines individual strained state
temperature for each of these blocks.
 Editing Label Data 123

3. Allowable Stresses

The values of allowable stresses do not affect problem

solution. They are used only in postprocessing to calculate
the Mohr-Coulomb, Drucker-Prager, and Hill criteria. You
don't need to define allowable stresses, if these criteria are
of no interest to you.

Edge labels can be associated with prescribed displacement

along one or both of coordinate axes combined with
prescribed surface forces. You either define the latter as
normal pressure or specify required Cartesian or polar
coordinate values. To apply fixed displacement along an
124 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

axis, check the appropriate box and enter the required

displacement value.

A vertex label in stress analysis can be associated with rigid

or elastic support along one or both of coordinate axes, or
with concentrated external force. To describe rigid
constraint along an axis, check the appropriate box and enter
the required displacement value.

Periodic Boundary Conditions

A special type of boundary conditions is implemented in
QuickField to reduce the model size when simulating
periodic structures, like poles in electric machines, –
periodic boundary conditions. These conditions apply to
two opposite sides of a model and force the fields on both
boundaries to be either the same (even periodicity) or
opposite (odd periodicity). The periodic condition is more
generic than Dirichlet or Neumann condition, since it does
not imply that the field is symmetric (no normal component)
or antisymmetric (no tangential field) on the given
 Editing Label Data 125

boundary. Both components may exist, but they are forced

to be the same or opposite.

Unlike other finite element packages, QuickField does not

require that the mesh be equal on both boundaries, and is
capable of merging potential values on edges with
mismatching edge mesh.
To apply this type of condition, simply check the
correspondent box (Even or Odd Periodical) for the label
assigned to edges on the two boundaries – QuickField will
analyze the geometry and detect the periodicity
automatically.

Note. If you expect symmetric or antisymmetric field

behavior, even though the structure is periodic, it is still
more efficient to apply Dirichlet or Neumann boundary
condition.
126 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

Editing Curves
Curves in QuickField represent dependencies between two
physical properties, e.g., magnetic field intensity and flux
density or temperature and thermal conductivity. To define
a curve in QuickField, you open this curve’s editor and enter
coordinates of several points on its graph. QuickField
accumulates the points in a table and provides you with
graphical representation of the curve interpolating between
the table points with cubic splines. QuickField solver always
uses the interpolated values displayed on screen during the
edit session.

To add a new point to the curve, do the following:

1. Either click the leftmost cell of the last row that
is marked New, or press on the toolbar.
2. Enter the argument value and press ENTER. The
cursor will move to the next cell
3. Enter the function value and press ENTER again.
 Editing Label Data 127

To correct a table value, simply type the new value in the

table cell.
To copy table rows to the Clipboard, either select these rows
in the table or select the corresponding points on the graph
and press (CTRL+C). The copied rows could be later pasted
into the table.
To remove the point, select it in the table or on the graph
and click Delete button or press the DEL key.
You may control the scaling of the graph with use of zoom
buttons. To make the whole graph visible, click Zoom to fit
button.
Dragging a dialog window boundary allows to resize the
window. QuickField remembers the resulting window size
and position for future use.
The graph image could be copied to the Clipboard and/or
saved to a file. To do that, invoke the corresponding
commands in the context (right-click) menu of the graph.
To finish editing, click Close or press ESC. Note that
subsequent canceling of label data editing with ESC or
Cancel will discard all changes including those made during
curve editing.

Temperature Units
In QuickField Options it is possible to choose the
temperature units (Kelvins, Celsius or Fahrenheit degrees)
which then will be used everywhere in QuickField for this
user for all QuickField problems. These units will be used
for display of numerical data or plots, but they do not affect
128 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

the saved data and results, which are always stored in

Kelvins.
If it is necessary to enter the numerical value or formula in
units other than set in the Options panel - it can be done by
addition the suffix ",K" for Kelvins, ",C" for Celsius
degrees or ",F" for Fahrenheit degrees to the right of the
value.

In this example the formula gives the temperature in

Kelvins, and x variable is the horizontal axis coordinate.
Symbols of the temperature units to the right of the entry
field are automatically changed in case of the suffix use.
Comma separates the value and temperature unit. Unit letter
may be lowercase or uppercase. Suffix with temperature
units is shown in the string only if the value is defined by
formula and temperature units in it are different from the
default units.
When the temperature units are changed, or the QuickField
problem is transferred to the computer with different
 Editing Label Data 129

temperature units, numerical values will be automatically

recalculated into new units. Formulas will gain suffixes with
the temperature units they were originally created with. This
will assure correct results of the problem, but the field
pictures, tables and maps will be displayed in the currently
set temperature units.

Using Formulas
Solving a problem you might need to specify a boundary
condition or a field source as a function of time or
coordinates. To do that, QuickField allows entering
formula-defined field values instead of constant numerical
values. The fields accepting formula-defined values are
specified above in this chapter. Besides that, the fields
accepting formula-defined values can be distinguished by
adjacent button and by the appropriate tooltip text.
Formula in QuickField is a mathematical expression
constructed of numbers, arithmetical operators, parentheses,
built-in constants and functions and predefined variables.
Formula syntax is typical for most algorithmic languages
and standard mathematical notation.
When you specify a formula-defined value QuickField
checks the formula syntax and reports syntax errors to you.
If the syntax is correct, calculator tries to calculate the result
using current values of predefined variables. This
calculation might also result in error if, for example, the
value of a function argument does not belong to the
function’s domain of definition. As with syntax errors,
QuickField reports such errors to you.
130 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

Physical properties allowing definitions with formulas

The following properties can be defines with formulas
(f(x,y) denotes function of coordinates, f(t) denotes function
of time).
Magnetostatics f(x,y) f(t)
Block Current density +
labels Total current -
Coercive force +
Edge Magnetic potential +
labels Tangential field (surface current +
density)
Vertex Magnetic potential +
labels Linear (concentrated) current +

Transient magnetics f(x,y) f(t)

Block Current density in stranded + +
labels conductors
Total current - +
Voltage applied to solid - +
conductors
Coercive force + +
Conductivity + +
Temperature + +
Magnetic potential + +
 Editing Label Data 131

Transient magnetics f(x,y) f(t)

Edge Tangential field (surface current + +
labels density)
Vertex Magnetic potential + +
labels Linear (concentrated) current + +

AC magnetics (phase and magnitude) f(x,y) f(t)

Block Current density in stranded +
labels conductors
Total current in solid conductors -
Voltage applied to solid -
conductors
Conductivity (magnitude only) +
Temperature +
Edge Magnetic potential +
labels Tangential field (surface current +
density)
Vertex Magnetic potential +
labels Linear (concentrated) current +

Electrostatics f(x,y) f(t)

Block Electric charge density +
labels
Voltage +
132 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

Edge Surface charge (normal +

labels component of electric
induction)
Vertex Voltage +
labels Concentrated (linear) charge +

DC Conduction f(x,y) f(t)

Block Temperature +
labels
Edge Voltage +
labels Normal current density +
Vertex Voltage +
labels Concentrated current +

AC Conduction (phase and magnitude) f(x,y) f(t)

Block Not applicable -
labels
Edge Voltage +
labels Normal current density +
Vertex Voltage +
labels External current +

Transient Electric f(x,y) f(t)

Block Not applicable - -
labels
 Editing Label Data 133

Transient Electric f(x,y) f(t)

Edge Voltage + +
labels Normal current density + +
Vertex Voltage + +
labels External current + +

Heat Transfer f(x,y) f(t)

Block Heat source volume + +
labels power
Edge Temperature + +
labels Heat flux + +
Film coefficient and + +
temperature of contacting
fluid medium
Emissivity coefficient + +
and ambient radiation
temperature
Vertex Temperature + +
labels Heat source + +
* Time-dependent values are used only in transient heat
transfer problems

Stress Analysis f(x,y) f(t)

Block Components of body +
labels force density
134 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

Stress Analysis f(x,y) f(t)

Temperature difference +
between strained and
strainless states
Edge Prescribed displacement +
labels allows only linear
dependency on
coordinates
Normal pressure +
Components of surface +
force density
Vertex External force +
labels Elastic support -
Syntax
QuickField formula is an expression composed of the
following elements:
• Numerical constants
Integer (Example: 123)
Fixed-point (Examples:
123.45 123. 0.123 .123)
Floating-point (Examples:
1e12 5.39e+8 0.1E-12 .2E+2)
• Arithmetic operators
+ addition (Ex: 2+2)
- subtraction (Ex: 3-5)
* multiplication (Ex: 1.23*0.12)
/ division (Ex: 1E5/0.01)
^ raising to a power (Ex: 3.14^2)
 Editing Label Data 135

• Unary operators
+ sign retaining (Ex: +180)
- sign change (Ex: -180)
• Embedded functions
abs - absolute value
sign - sign
max - maximum
min - minimum
step - step-function by 1
impulse - impulse segment
sin - sine
cos - cosine
tan - tangent
asin - arc sine
acos - arc cosine
atan - arc tangent
atan2 - angle of the vector defined by two
arguments
exp - exponent
log - natural logarithm
sqrt - square root
pow - raising to a power
saw - saw-tooth periodic function
• Embedded constants
pi - pi
e -e
• Predefined variables
t - current time
x - Cartesian coordinate x
y - Cartesian coordinate y
r - polar coordinate r
136 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

phi - polar coordinate φ (in

degrees).
• Parentheses (change the order of operations)
• Space and tabulation characters

Notes:
1. Numerical values should not contain group separators.
Use dots ('.') as decimal separators regardless of regional
settings.
2. QuickField allows using both e and E to separate
mantissa and magnitude in floating point values.
3. The names of embedded functions, constants and
predefined variables are case insensitive.
4. QuickField allows enclosing of names in double quotes.
For example, sin (t) is equivalent to "sin"(t).
5. Operation precedence (highest to lowest): ^, then * and
/, then + and -. Use parentheses, if you need to change this
order.
6. QuickField allows to insert any number of spaces inside
a formula without impact, provided the inserted spaces are
not inside names.
7. Place function arguments inside parentheses after the
name of the function and separate them with commas (',').
Constants and Predefined Variables
pi 3.141592653589793238462643 The constant equal
to the ratio of the
length of any circle
to its diameter.
 Editing Label Data 137

e 2.718281828459045235360287 The constant equal

to the base of
natural logarithms.
t Predefined variable
denoting the current
time value. Used
with transient
problems.
x 0 Predefined variable
denoting the x-
coordinate.
y 0 Predefined variable
denoting the y-
coordinate.
Functions
Name Formula Comments

abs 𝑎𝑏𝑠(𝑣) = |𝑣| The function value is equal to

𝑣, 𝑖𝑓 𝑣 ≥ 0 absolute value of the argument.
= {
−𝑣, 𝑖𝑓 𝑣 < 0
sign 𝑣 The function value is equal to
𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛(𝑣) =
|𝑣| the sign of the argument.
1, 𝑖𝑓 𝑣 > 0
= { 0, 𝑖𝑓 𝑣 = 0
−1, 𝑖𝑓 𝑣 < 0
138 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

max max(1, …) The function value is equal to

the maximum of all arguments.
You must specify 2 or more
arguments.
min min(1, …) The function value is equal to
the minimum of all arguments.
You must specify 2 or more
arguments.
step 1, 𝑖𝑓 𝑣 ≥ 0 The function value is equal to 0
𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑝(𝑣) = {
0, 𝑖𝑓 𝑣 < 0 for negative arguments and to 1
for non-negative arguments.
The function has a step
discontinuity when its
argument value is 0.
impuls 𝑖𝑚𝑝𝑢𝑙𝑠𝑒(𝑣, 𝑙, 𝑟) = impulse(v,l,r)
e 0, 𝑖𝑓 𝑣 < 𝑙 1

= {1, 𝑖𝑓 𝑙 ≤ 𝑣 ≤ 𝑟 v
0, 𝑖𝑓 𝑣 > 𝑟 l r

The function represents

impulse restricted to [l, r]
segment. If l > r, an error
occurs. The function value is
equal to 1 when v is between l
and r, both ends included;
otherwise, its value is 0.
 Editing Label Data 139

sin sin() The function value is equal to

sine of the argument. The
argument is defined in degrees.
cos cos() The function value is equal to
cosine of the argument. The
argument is defined in degrees.
tan tan() The function value is equal to
  90º + k180º, tangent of the argument. The
where k is integer argument is defined in degrees.
If argument value is an odd
multiple of 90º an error occurs.
asin asin() = arcsin() The function value is equal to
-1    1 arc sine of the argument in
degrees. The argument value v
must conform to inequality -1 
  1, otherwise an error
occurs.
acos acos() = arccos() The function value is equal to
-1    1 arc cosine of the argument in
degrees. The argument value v
must conform to inequality -1 
  1, otherwise an error
occurs.
atan atan() = arctan() The function value is equal to
arc tangent of the argument.
The value is given in degrees.
140 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

atan2 atan(1, 2) = The function value is equal to

arctan(1/2) the angle between the x-axis
and the direction from
coordinate origin to the point
with ordinate 1 and abscissa
2. The value is given in
degrees and is always between
0 and 360. If both arguments
are zero, the value is also zero.
Otherwise, if 2 is zero, the
value is 90, for positive 1, or
270, for negative 1.
exp exp() = e The function value is equal to
exponent of the argument.
Calculation might cause the
overflow error.
log log() = ln() The function value is equal to
natural logarithm of the
argument. The argument value
must be positive, otherwise an
error occurs
sqrt sqrt() =  The function value is equal to
square root of the argument.
The argument value must be
non-negative, otherwise an
error occurs.
 Editing Label Data 141

pow pow(, p) = p The function value is equal to

the first argument value raised
to the power defined by second
argument value. An error
occurs unless the arguments
conform to the following
conditions: the first argument is
non-negative; if the first
argument value is 0, the second
argument is positive.
Calculation might cause the
overflow error.
saw saw(,p) = saw(v,p)
1
𝑣/𝑝, 𝑖𝑓 0 ≤ 𝑣 < 𝑝
{𝑠𝑎𝑤(𝑣 + 𝑝), 𝑖𝑓 𝑣 < 0 v
𝑠𝑎𝑤(𝑣 − 𝑝), 𝑖𝑓 𝑣 ≥ 𝑝 p 2p 3p 4p

saw(,p,p0) = saw(v,p,p0)
𝑣 1
, 𝑖𝑓 0 ≤ 𝑣 < 𝑝
𝑝
p p0 p p0 v
0, 𝑖𝑓 𝑝 ≤ 𝑣 < 𝑝 + 𝑝0
𝑠𝑎𝑤(𝑣 + (𝑝 + 𝑝0)),
𝑖𝑓 𝑣 < 0
𝑠𝑎𝑤(𝑣 − (𝑝 + 𝑝0)),
{ 𝑖𝑓 𝑣 ≥ 𝑝 + 𝑝0
142 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

Relative to its first argument this function is periodic. In

case of two arguments the period is equal to the second
argument value. In case of three arguments the period is
the sum of the last two argument values. The function
value is always 0 for  = 0, always 1 for  = p and in
between the function is linear relative to . In case of
three arguments the function value is always 0 for other
values of .
The last two argument values must be non-negative. The
period must be positive. Otherwise an error occurs.

Note. To expand the function f(t) defined on the interval

(0, p) use the expression f(t)  (saw (t, p)).

Examples
The table below contains examples you can use to learn
writing your own QuickField formulas. The left column
contains mathematical formulas with the corresponding
QuickField expressions contained in its right counterpart.
You can evaluate expressions and view a plot using our
online utility
www.quickfield.com/qf_formula_plotter.htm
Mathematical notation Formula syntax

t (1-t)  (2-t) t*(1-t)*(2-t)

2t2 - t - 3 2*t^2 - t - 3
e-t²/2 exp(-t^2 / 2)

log2t log(t) / log(2)

 Copying, Renaming and Deleting Labels 143

200sin(18000t + 240) 200*sin(18000*t+240)

2t 2^t
arcsin 2 asin(sqrt(2))
𝑡
tan
2.4 ∗ 10−8
tan(t / 2.4e-8)
|2t| abs(2*pi*t)

{
𝑡, 𝑖𝑓 𝑡 < 0.5 t*step(0.5-t) + (1-t)*step(t-
1 − 𝑡, 𝑖𝑓 𝑡 ≥ 0.5 0.5)
0, 𝑖𝑓 𝑡 < 0
{
𝑡, 𝑖𝑓 0 ≤ 𝑡 < 0.5 t*impulse(t,0,0.5) + (1-
1 − 𝑡, 𝑖𝑓 0.5 ≤ 𝑡 < 1 t)*impulse(t,0.5,1)
0, 𝑖𝑓 𝑡 ≥ 1
sin 𝑡 , 𝑖𝑓 sin 𝑡 > cos 𝑡
{
cos 𝑡 , 𝑖𝑓 sin 𝑡 ≤ cos 𝑡 max(sin(t), cos(t))
𝑡
, 𝑖𝑓 0 ≤ 𝑡 < 2
{ 2 saw(t, 2)
periodic with period 2
10 ∙ 𝑒 5𝑡 , 𝑖𝑓 0 ≤ 𝑡 < 2
{ 10, 𝑖𝑓 2 ≤ 𝑡 < 3 10 * exp(5 * saw(t,2,1))
periodic with period 3
10 ∙ 𝑒 5𝑡 , 𝑖𝑓 0 ≤ 𝑡 < 2
{ 0, 𝑖𝑓 2 ≤ 𝑡 < 3
10 * exp(5 * saw(t,3)) *
periodic with period 3 impulse(saw(t,3), 0, 2/3)
𝑒 𝑡−1 , 𝑖𝑓 0 ≤ 𝑡 < 1
{ 𝑒 1−𝑡 , 𝑖𝑓 1 ≤ 𝑡 < 2
exp(saw(t,1,1)-1) +
periodic with period 2 exp(saw(2-t,1,1)-1) - exp(-1)

Copying, Renaming and Deleting Labels

Labels can be copied within single property description
document or between documents of the same type.
144 Chapter 5 Problem Parameters Description

To copy a label:
1. In the list of labels, choose Copy from the
label’s context menu.
2. Switch to destination window and click Paste
in the Edit menu or context menu.
Or,
1. Drag the label to destination position with left
mouse button.
To delete a label:
• In the list of labels, choose Delete from the label’s
context menu, or
• Select the label and click Delete in the Edit menu.
To move (cut and paste) a label:
1. In the list of labels, choose Cut from the label’s
context menu.
2. Switch to destination window and click Paste
in the Edit menu or context menu.
Or,
1. Holding SHIFT pressed, drag the label to
destination position with left mouse button.
 145

C H A P T E R 6

Electric Circuit Definition

This chapter describes the electric circuit schema

description with QuickField Circuit Editor.
QuickField supports simultaneous finite element analysis of
the time harmonic magnetic and transient magnetic
problems with simulation of the currents and voltages in the
connected electric circuit.
Electric circuit schemas in QuickField are stored in files
with extensions .qcr. You may include corresponding
circuit schema file into the problem database along with
other files comprising QuickField problem (geometry
model file *.mod, data and library files, results file *.res) by
editing problem properties.

What is a Circuit?
Electric circuit consists of circuit components connected
with wires. Circuit components in QuickField can be of two
kinds:
1. First group includes usual electric circuitry
components, such as:
• resistors,
• capacitors,
• inductors,
• voltage sources,
146 Chapter 6 Electric Circuit Definition

• current sources.
2. Second group is specific for QuickField and
represents blocks of the geometric model. These
elements are used to provide interaction between
circuit and other parts of QuickField problem.

Note. If the problem supports the external electric circuit co-

simulation then every solid conductor block (i.e. a block
with non-zero conductivity) from the geometric model
should be included into the circuit only once.

How to Create a Circuit

To describe an electric circuit, you typically should do the
following:
• Insert electric circuit components (resistors, capacitors,
inductors, sources);
• Specify their properties;
• Add conductive blocks from the geometric model;
• Connect circuit elements with wires.
Circuit may be then edited by changing element properties
and their connection topology. You can edit, move, rotate
and delete circuit elements. You can select several elements
and perform operations with all selected elements at once.

Adding Electric Components to the Circuit

To add new components to the circuit:
1. In the Insert menu, click Resistor, Capacitor, Inductor,
Voltage Source or Current Source, depending on
 How to Create a Circuit 147

component you want to add. Alternatively you can press

corresponding toolbar button.
2. Place cursor to the point where you want new component
to appear and click left mouse button.

Notes:
• The point where you click the mouse button will be the
left pin of the new device.
• Circuit components are always aligned to a nearest grid
point. It means that component will be placed so that its
pins are at grid points.
• To insert component in the middle of some wire you
can just click on this wire. Wire segment will be split in
two and component will be inserted between them.

Specifying Properties for Circuit Components

To set properties for circuit component:
• double click the component in the schema, or
• select the component and click Properties in the Edit
menu, or
• right click the component and choose Properties from
context menu.
148 Chapter 6 Electric Circuit Definition

Specifying Properties for Electric Components

For electric components, you can set the following

properties:
Label. You can change the label for the component. It is not
necessary to change this property, because you can use the
default label names. But meaningful label names improve
the model clarity and therefore recommended. Label names
should be unique within the circuit.
Value. Depending on component type, you should specify
its numeric value: resistance R, capacity C, inductance L,
current I or voltage V.
For current and voltage sources you can specify formula as
a value. For transient problems, you can specify formula
containing t (time).
φ (phase). For AC problems, for voltage sources and current
sources, you should specify phase value here.
Properties for components representing model blocks
For components representing model blocks, you can set the
following property:
 How to Create a Circuit 149

Block. You may change the name of the QuickField block

in this field. Combo box provides the list of all blocks that
should be added to the circuit, that is, the list of all solid
conductors of the model. Each block can be specified only
once.

Adding Components Representing Model Blocks to

the Circuit
To add component representing model block to the circuit:
1. Click the button Insert Block from Model or
choose Block from Model in the Insert menu.
2. Place cursor to the point where you want new
component to appear and click left mouse
button.
Or, you may use drag and drop from the problem tree:
1. Click label of some block in the Problem
Editor tree.
2. Drag it to the circuit editor window keeping the
mouse button pressed.
3. Place cursor to the point where you want new
block to appear and release the mouse button
then.

Connecting Circuit Components with Wires

To add a wire to the circuit:
1. Click the toolbar button Insert Wire or choose
Wire in the Insert menu.
2. Click on the start point of the wire and drag
cursor to the end point of the wire. Then release
150 Chapter 6 Electric Circuit Definition

the mouse button. The wire connecting start

point and end point will be added.

Notes:
• This way you may add either the vertical wire segment,
or horizontal wire segment, or two wire segments, vertical
and horizontal, making the right angle. To create wire of
more complex shape you should repeat this operation
several times.
• Wires are always aligned to a nearest grid node. It
means that the wire will be placed so that its end points are
at grid nodes.
Adding Junction Points
To add a junction point, you should just place a wire so that
one of end points belongs to some existing wire. Junction
point will be added in this point automatically.
Placing a wire so that it intersects another wire in a middle
point for both wires is different. In this case the junction
point will not be added, and the wires will be considered as
not connected.

Editing Circuit
Moving, Copying and Resizing Circuit Elements
To move circuit element to another place:
 Editing Circuit 151

1. Place cursor over element you want to move.

Cursor should have the shape of four-pointed
arrow.
2. Click left mouse button and drag the selected
element keeping the button pressed.
To resize a wire:
1. Place cursor over the wire end point. Cursor
should have the shape of two-pointed arrow.
2. Click mouse button and drag the end point to a
new location.
You can not only resize the wire, but also move it sideway
during this operation.
To move several elements at once:
1. Select circuit elements you want to move.
2. Place cursor over one of selected elements.
3. Click mouse button and drag the selected
elements.
Dragging with Attached Elements
When you drag the circuit elements, another element
attached to them could be dragged or resized to preserve
connections between elements and wires. For example,
when you drag some electric component the wires attached
to it could be also moved or resized.
Dragging without Attached Elements
Sometimes it is more convenient to drag circuit elements so
that attached wires and elements are not dragged. For
example, you may want to change the circuit topology by
placing the electric component to another position. For this,
152 Chapter 6 Electric Circuit Definition

press alt and keep it pressed until you release the mouse
button.
Copying Elements
Instead of moving elements, you can make a copy of
selected elements. For this, press ctrl and keep it pressed
until you release the mouse button.

Rotating Circuit Components

To rotate circuit components for 90°, 180° or 270°
counterclockwise:
1. Select the components you want to rotate.
2. In the Edit menu click Rotate, and then choose
the angle value: For 90°, For 180° or For
270°.
You can also use toolbar button Rotate for 90°. Press this
button several times to rotate components for desired angle.

Deleting Circuit Elements

To delete circuit elements:
1. Select the elements you want to delete.
2. In the Edit menu or context menu, click
Delete.
 153

C H A P T E R 7

Solving the Problem

This chapter describes how to solve the prepared problem,

and methods QuickField uses to solve.
Several conditions have to be met to solve a problem. The
problem type, plane, required precision and other
parameters have to be specified in the problem description
file. The model geometry file must contain complete model
with mesh and labels. Each label referred by the model file
is to be defined in the problem's private or library data file.
To obtain the problem solution, click Solve Problem in the
Problem menu or context (right mouse button) menu of the
Problem editor. You may skip this action and directly
proceed to the analysis results by clicking Analyze Results
in the Problem or context menu. If the problem has not been
solved yet, or its results are out of date, the solver will be
invoked automatically.
Each solver runs in its separate thread, so you can solve
several problems at once or edit or analyze other problems
while the problem is being solved. There is of course no
since in editing any document related to the problem being
solved.
Special bar indicator lets you see the progress of the solution
process. To interrupt it, click Cancel on the indicator's
panel. When solving a transient problem, you have an option
to keep the results for already stored time steps.
154 Chapter 7 Solving the Problem

Linear problems are solved by using a powerful

preconditioned conjugate gradient method. The
preconditioning based on the geometric decomposition
technique guaranties a very high speed and close to linear
dependence between number of nodes and the resulting
solution time. Nonlinear problems are solved using the
Newton-Raphson method. The Jacobian matrix arising at
each step of the Newton-Raphson method is inverted the
same way as it is done for linear problems.
We use the Euler’s method (constant time step size) for
solving transient problems, with initial value set to zero or
taken from another field calculation. This method is
extremely fast and stable, however we recommend having
at least 15-20 time steps for the whole transitional process
to achieve accurate and smooth results.

Adaptive Mesh Refinement

QuickField is capable of adaptive refinement the mesh
basing on results of previously solved problem (process also
known as H-refinement). This capability practically
eliminates the need for manual mesh control, allowing
automatic mesh density adjustment in regions of highly
inhomogeneous field.
Adjusted mesh spacing is calculated in every mesh node
basing on the variation of the energy density in the node's
vicinity, which is proven to be the most reliable estimation
of error distribution. Although it is not possible to guarantee
the precision, the refined mesh reaches its optimum
providing the best precision for overall given number of
mesh nodes.
 Adaptive Mesh Refinement 155

Smooth mesh is generated with adjusted spacing

distribution, but manually set mesh controls are also
honored as top limits, guaranteeing that the mesh spacing
will never exceed the user-specified values.
Even with fully automatic initial mesh, one h-refinement
iteration is sufficient for most of the problems. The adaptive
mesh refinement is available for all simulation types
supported by QuickField, including non-linear and transient
problems.
 157

C H A P T E R 8

Analyzing Solution

This chapter explains the procedures for detailed

examination of the results using the QuickField
postprocessor. Here we describe working with the solution
of a two-dimensional problem. Analyzing of a three-
dimensional solution is described in the Chapter 9.
To analyze the problem solution, choose View Results in
the Edit or context menu of the problem window, or click
the Analyze Results toolbar button. QuickField will open
the Field Picture window displaying the solution results in
the most appropriate way for the problem type. You can
change the presentation mode and adjust other window
settings choosing the View->Field Picture menu item.
There are several ways in QuickField to picture a field: as
field lines (isolines), as a vector map, and as a color map
with colors corresponding to intensities of the selected
physical quantity. For stress analysis problems QuickField
can also display the strain and stress tensor map, and picture
the deformed boundary and shape.
For time-harmonic and transient problems QuickField
allows one to animate the field picture viewing its changes
in time.
QuickField also provides the following ways to analyze the
solution results:
158 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

• Examining local field values — values of physical

quantities at the specified points.
• Integrating over the line or surface defined by the
specified contour, or over the volume or surface bounded
by the contour.
• Building plots and tables that show the distribution of
local field values along the selected contour.
• Building tables and plots showing local and integral
values in transient problems versus time.
• Calculating conductor and coil parameters such as
inductance, capacitance, and impedance with specialized
wizards.
• Exporting various tables or pictures or the whole finite-
element solution to other software programs.
• Building tables and plots showing voltages and currents
at various elements of the associated electric circuit.
• Displaying the trajectories of a charged particle beam in
the electrical field.
Any picture or numerical value displayed by the
postprocessor can be copied to Windows clipboard for use
with any word-processing or desktop publishing utility or
subsequent use with spreadsheets or user-written programs.

Building the Field Picture on the Screen

Interpreted Quantities
The set of the physical quantities, which can be displayed
by the Postprocessor, depends on the problem type.
 Building the Field Picture on the Screen 159

For the DC and transient magnetic problems:

• Vector magnetic potential A in plane-parallel problem or
flux function  = 2rA in axisymmetric case;
• Vector of magnetic flux density B = curl A;
• Vector of magnetic field intensity H = B / ;
• Magnetic permeability  (its largest component in
anisotropic media);
• Magnetic field energy density:
w = (BH)/2 —in linear media,
w = HdB —in ferromagnetic media.
With transient magnetic problem following additional field
quantities are available:
• Total electric current density j = j0 + jeddy,
• Source current density j0,
• Eddy current density
𝜕𝐴
𝑗𝑒𝑑𝑑𝑦 = −𝜎 .
𝜕𝑡
• Joule heat density
1
𝑄 = 𝑗2
𝜎
For the AC magnetic problem:
• Complex amplitude of vector magnetic potential A (flux
function rA in axisymmetric case);
• Complex amplitude of voltage U applied to the
conductor;
160 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

• Complex amplitude of total current density j = j0 + jeddy,

source current density j0 and eddy current density jeddy =
−i σA.
All these complex quantities may be shown in form of
momentary, root mean square (RMS) or peak value in
time dimension. E.g., complex quantity z = z0ei(t+ ) can
z

be shown as:
• momentary value at a given phase 0 = –t0
• z = Re[z0ei(z – 0)] = z0 cos(z – 0);
0

• peak value z0;

• RMS value zRMS = z0 / 2.
 Building the Field Picture on the Screen 161

Note. To display the momentary values, the phase is

specified in degrees. This value of the phase is applied to
all the displayed quantities. When you need the momentary
values at a given moment of time t, e.g., for comparison
with the transient solution, you can obtain the
corresponding phase value using the formula
0 = –t0 = –360°f t0
where f is the magnetic field frequency in Hz, time t is in
seconds. The minus sign in this formula may appear odd
and non-intuitive; nonetheless it is necessary to provide the
commonality in the definition of the term “phase” when
defining the sources and boundary conditions on one hand,
and when post processing the momentary values on the
other. Let us assume that the voltage is specified in the
Data Editor to have a phase of 30°. According to the
complex presentation U=U0 cos(t +), this means that
the momentary value reaches its maximum at the moment
of time t = –30°. This implies that the momentary value
in the postprocessor must also be at the maximum when
t = –30°, or at phase equal to +30°, QED.

• Complex vector of the magnetic flux density B = curl A;

• Complex vector of magnetic field intensity
1
𝐇 = 𝐁,
𝜇
where  is the magnetic permeability tensor.
Complex vectors may be shown in form of momentary,
RMS or peak magnitude.
• Time average and peak Joule heat density
162 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

1 2 3
𝑄= 𝑗 + 𝑘ℎ ∙ 𝑓 ∙ 𝐵2 + 𝑘𝑐 ∙ 𝑓 2 ∙ 𝐵2 + 𝑘𝑒 ∙ (𝑓 ∙ 𝐵)2
𝜎
• Time average and peak magnetic field energy density
w = (BH)/2;
• Time average Poynting vector (local power flow)
S = [ExH];
• Time average Lorentz force density vector F = [jxB];
• Magnetic permeability  (its largest component in
anisotropic media);
• Electric conductivity σ.
Besides that, if the solved problem is coupled with the
electric circuit, then the following parameters can be
displayed in the circuit window:
• Effective I, amplitude Iabs, momentary (for the chosen
phase) and complex (Ire, Iim) values of the current in the
circuit branches;
• Effective U, amplitude Uabs, momentary (for the chosen
phase) and complex (Ure, Uim) values of the voltage drop
across the circuit component;
• Defined parameter value (resistance R, inductance L,
capacitance C) for the passive circuit components.
For the electrostatic problem:
• Scalar electric potential (voltage) U;
• Vector of electric field intensity E = −grad U;
• Tensor of gradient of electric field G = grad E;
• Vector of electrostatic induction D = E;
• Electric permittivity  (or its largest component in
anisotropic media);
• Electric field energy density w = (ED)/2.
 Building the Field Picture on the Screen 163

For the DC conduction problem:

• Scalar electric potential U;
• Vector of electric field intensity E = −gradU;
• Vector of current density j = σ E ;
• Electric conductivity σ (its largest component in
anisotropic media);
• Ohmic losses per volume unit w = (jE)/2.
For the AC conduction problem:
• Complex amplitude of electric potential U;
• Complex vector of electric field intensity E = −grad U
• Complex vector of electrostatic induction D = E;
• Complex vector of active ja = σE, reactive jre = iE,
and apparent japp = ja + jre current density;
All these complex quantities may be shown in form of
momentary, root mean square (RMS) or peak value in
time dimension. E.g., complex quantity z = z0ei(t+ ) may z

be shown as:
• momentary value at a given phase 0 = –t0
• z = Re[z0ei(z – 0)] = z0 cos(z – 0);
0

• peak value z0;

• RMS value zRMS = z0 / 2.
164 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Note. To display the momentary values, the phase is

specified in degrees. This value of the phase is applied to
all the displayed quantities. When you need the momentary
values at a given moment of time t, e.g., for comparison
with the transient solution, you can obtain the
corresponding phase value using the formula
0 = –t0 = –360°f t0
where f is the magnetic field frequency in Hz, time t is in
seconds.

• Time average and peak active Qa = ja · E, reactive

Qre = jre · E, and apparent Qapp = japp · E power density;
• Electric permittivity  (or its largest component in
anisotropic media);
• Electric conductivity σ (or its largest component in
anisotropic media).
For transient electric field:
• Electric potential U;
• Electric field intensity E = −gradU;
𝜕
• Vector of active jactive = σE, reactive jreactive = 𝜀𝐄 and
𝜕𝑡
apparent japparent = jactive + jreactive current density;
• Active power (losses) density Qactive = jactive · E, reactive
Qreactive = jreactive · E, and apparent Qapparent = japparent · E
power density;
• Tensor of gradient of electric field G = grad E;
• Vector of electrostatic induction (displacement) D = E;
• Electric permittivity (E);
• Electric conductivity σ(E).
 Building the Field Picture on the Screen 165

For heat transfer problem:

• Temperature T;
• Vector of heat flow F = −grad(T);
• Thermal conductivity  (its largest component in
anisotropic media).
For stress analysis problem:
• Displacement vector ;
• Strain tensor  and its principal values;
• Stress tensor  and its principal values;
• Von Mises stress (stored energy of deformation
criterion):

1
σ𝑒 = √ [(𝜎1 − 𝜎2 )2 + (𝜎2 − 𝜎3 )2 + (𝜎3 − 𝜎1 )2 ]
2
where 1, 2 and 3 denote the principal stresses in
descending order.
• Tresca criterion (maximum shear): e = 1 - 3;
• Mohr-Coulomb criterion: e = 1 - 3,
where  = [+]/[-], and [+] and [-] denote tensile and
compressive allowable stress.
• Drucker-Prager criterion:
2
√𝜒 − 𝜒 1 1 − √𝜒
𝜎𝑒 = (1 + √𝜒)𝜎𝑖 − 𝜎̅ + ( ∙ 𝜎̅)
1 + √𝜒 [𝜎− ] 1 + √𝜒
where
166 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

1
σ𝑖 = √ [(𝜎1 − 𝜎2 )2 + (𝜎2 − 𝜎3 )2 + (𝜎3 − 𝜎1 )2 ]; 𝜎̅
2
𝜎1 + 𝜎2 + 𝜎3
=
3
• Tsai-Hill failure index for orthotropic materials:
𝜎12 𝜎1 𝜎2 𝜎22 𝜏12
2
𝐶𝑡ℎ = 2− 2 + 2+ 2
𝑋1 𝑋1 𝑋2 𝑆12
where 1, 2 and 12 are computed stresses in the material
directions and,
X1 = X1T if 1>0; X1 = X1C if 1<0
X2 = X2T if 2>0; X2 = X2C if 2<0
S12 = S12+ if 12>0; S12 = S12- if 12<0,
where X1T, X2T, X1C, X2C, S12+ and S12- are tensile,
compressive and shear allowable stresses.
The Tsai-Hill failure index is calculated only for those
materials, where allowable stresses were defined (while
editing the block data, see “Problem Parameters
Description”). If any pair of allowable stresses is not
given, the corresponding term is dropped while
calculating the Tsai-Hill Index.

Field Presentation Methods

Several methods are available for displaying the field
picture:
 Building the Field Picture on the Screen 167

Color map for distribution of a chosen

scalar quantity. The color map is
accompanied by the legend showing
the correspondence between colors
and numerical values.
You can adjust the color scale by
changing the range limits for the
chosen quantity.
Color map may be shown in gray
scale mode if you want to optimize it
for monochrome printing.
Field lines. Those are isotherms for
temperature fields, lines of equal
potential in electrostatics and flux
lines for magnetostatic problems.
You can manipulate the picture by
changing the distance between
neighboring lines. This distance is
measured in units of chosen quantity.
Vectors—family of line segments
showing magnitude and direction of
the vector quantity. Vectors are drawn
in the nodes of the regular rectangular
grid.
You can change the grid cell size and
the scaling factor for a desired vector
quantity.
168 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

The following methods are specifically for stress analysis

problems:
Deformed boundary and shape
indicated by means of deformed and
original rectangular grid.
Stress tensor display as a pair of
eigenvectors reflecting the direction
of principal axes, magnitudes and
signs of principal stresses (blue color
denotes tension, red color—
compression);
With these methods, you can change the grid cell size and
the scaling factors in order to manipulate the appearance.
It is possible to combine several visualization methods in
the same picture to obtain the most expressive result.
QuickField can display several different field pictures for
the same problem. To open a new window, click
New Window in the Window menu.

Field Picture Constructing

When entering the Postprocessor, the default form of the
field picture appears on the screen. You may use
Field Picture in the View menu or context menu to select
other display methods or quantities.
 Building the Field Picture on the Screen 169

Shown dialog box corresponds to the problem of

magnetostatic.
To choose desired visualization method, select
corresponding check box. You can select any combination
of methods at once. If none of the methods is selected, only
the model's geometry is shown.
This dialog box also allows changing scaling parameters for
selected methods of presentation and the number of color
grades used with the color map. When you select some edit
box, you can choose Suggest button to obtain suggested
value of corresponding parameter. Note that suggested
values for Minimum and Maximum fields are calculated
for the currently visible part of the model.
In case of AC magnetic problem, equilines and vectors are
drawn at specified phase. The Field View dialog box allows
setting phase value. For more expressive field picture, you
170 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

can order the second family of equilines or vectors, shifted

with regard to the first by 90°.

The Field View dialog box for the stress analysis problem
additionally allows to select tensor quantity visualization.
 Building the Field Picture on the Screen 171

Sizes of the vector symbols for all vector quantities except

the displacement vector are determined by the
corresponding physical value multiplied by the scaling
factor and by the cell size. Similar method is used for stress
tensor components. Unlike other vector quantities, the size
of the displacement vector on the screen does not depend on
the cell size. It is determined by the dimensionless scaling
factor, the unit value of which means that the displacement
is shown in its natural scale.
Color map of temperature difference in stress analysis
problem visualizes temperature distribution as it is defined
by user or imported from linked heat transfer problem. In
the last case, temperature is shown only in those blocks,
where it is really taken into account.
The Failure Index option is available when the model
contains at least one block with correctly defined allowable
stresses.
172 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Choosing the OK button causes redrawing the field picture

on the screen. Cancel closes the dialog box without
redrawing the picture and preserves preceding values of all
the parameters.
To save the field window settings and the associated contour
for future, use File / Save Status. To restore the saved
settings, use File / Restore Status.

Zooming
Zooming in postprocessor view is very similar to Model
Editor.
To magnify the picture:
1. Click Zoom In on the toolbar
2. Select (click and drag diagonally) the
rectangular part of the picture to fill the whole
window with.
To see more of the model:
• Click Zoom Out on the toolbar; or
• Click Zoom to Fit to see the whole model.

Selecting a Time Layer

For transient problems the displayed field picture always
corresponds to the selected time moment displayed in the
Time combobox on the postprocessor toolbar. Initially,
QuickField displays the last time moment. To change it,
specify another value in the combobox. QuickField will
automatically display the field view corresponding to the
specified time moment.
 Building the Field Picture on the Screen 173

When you change the time value QuickField adjusts both

the field pictures, XY-Plots and tables. The scaling factors
will remain unchanged.
• For time-harmonic problems the displayed field picture
corresponds to the selected phase. QuickField uses the
same combobox to display the selected phase value in
degrees. To change it, specify another value in the
combobox. QuickField will automatically display the
field view corresponding to the specified phase.

Animation
When the analysis results depend on time (transient and
time-harmonic problems), QuickField can present animated
field pictures. To start animation, choose View / Animation
or click the corresponding toolbar button .
During the animation, two speed control buttons appear on
the toolbar allowing you to change the animation speed. The
moment of time or the phase on the toolbar changes
synchronously with the picture.
During the first loop, QuickField accumulates the animation
frames in memory. Depending on the size of the problem,
this can take considerable time, and the speed control has no
effect.
Animation stops automatically upon any user action that
changes the contents or the scaling of the field picture.
174 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Note. Even though the problem results can be stored with

varying time steps, the animation shows the frames in equal
time intervals.

Calculator Window
Calculator Window is a window normally docked to the left
side of the field view.
To open the calculator window, choose
Calculator Window command in the View menu or
corresponded button on the postprocessor toolbar. The
calculator window also opens when choosing Local Values,
Integral Values or one of the Wizard commands in View
menu.
The calculator window is organized in several trees, which
root items correspond to several kinds of numerical data.
These are:
• Local Values shows several field quantities at a point of
interest;
• Integral calculator lists available quantities calculated
by integration over given line, surface or volume;
• Inductance Wizard opens wizard, which helps you
calculate self or mutual inductance of the coils and
conductors;
• Capacitance Wizard opens wizard guiding you through
steps needed to calculate self or mutual capacitance of
your conductors in electrostatics problems;
• Impedance Wizard opens wizard, which helps you
calculate the impedance of the conductors in AC
magnetic problems.
 Examining Local Field Data 175

To open the set of values, double-click the corresponding

item, or select it and press ENTER.
The calculator window is initially docked to the left side of
the field view. To change its width, point to the gray splitter
strip between windows and drag it to the left or to the right.
You can dock the window to the right side of the field view
or make it floating as ordinary popup window. Point at the
window caption and drag it to the desired position.
You can select one or several items in the tree and copy them
to the clipboard or drag to any application that supports
drag-and-drop copy/paste operation (almost any word
processor or spreadsheet). To select more than one item,
click on it holding the SHIFT key (block selection) or the
CTRL key (random selection). Context (right mouse button)
menu also works in the calculator window. It provides you
with the subset of commands for manipulating the field
picture in the active view.
With a transient problem all the values in the calculator
window correspond to the chosen time layer. See “Selecting
a Time Layer” section above for more details.

Examining Local Field Data

To obtain local field data, click Local Values in the View
menu or context (right mouse button) menu in field picture
window. Otherwise, if the calculator window is already
open, double-click the Local Values item in the tree. The
message appears prompting you to click the point. Then you
can click points where you need to know the values of the
field quantities.
176 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

To enter coordinates of the point of interest from keyboard,

select any of coordinates with mouse and then click it again
(after a period, to avoid the double-click effect) or choose
Edit Point command from context menu. You can edit
either Cartesian or polar coordinates.
To leave this mode, close local values window, or choose
Local Values in the menu again or click corresponding
button on the toolbar.
The local values of physical quantities obtained in the Local
Values mode can be copied to clipboard for printing
numerical results, or to pass them to other application
program, e.g., a spreadsheet program to produce a report.
Click the Copy button in the Local Values window. To see
or copy exactly those field quantities you need, you can
expand or collapse branches in the tree.

Analysis of Connected Electric Circuit

If the field problem with the connected electric circuit is
solved, the data about the currents and voltages in all
branches is available for viewing and analysis.
To open the electric circuit calculation results window use
the Coupled Circuit command in the View menu, or
correspondent button in the toolbar.
As a result the split window will be displayed. Right pane
shows the electric circuit schema, left pane lists the circuit
components. Components list pane may be hidden or shown
by the Circuit Components command of the View menu.
 Analysis of Connected Electric Circuit 177

Effective value of the current in the circuit component and

voltage drop along it is shown in the tool tip window
displayed with small delay after the mouse cursor points to
the circuit component. More details about the circuit
component are available in the component list pane.
Every list item is presented by its definition (shown in semi-
bold font) and two or three groups of data. Electric current
and voltage drop are displayed for every item; the nominal
value is also shown for passive components and sources.
Components selection in the list and schema is synchronized
automatically.
Every circuit component corresponds to several lines in the
list. By default all lines but the first one are hidden. To
expand them you should click on the small + (plus) sign to
the left from the component.
In the time-harmonic problems for the current and voltage
drop in every circuit branch component effective value,
instantaneous value for the selected phase, and complex
value components in the algebraic and trigonometric forms
are shown.
178 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

It is possible to select any number of lines in the circuit

components list and put them into the clipboard (Copy
command in the Edit menu). Selected lines may also be
dragged into other application, for example text editor or
spreadsheet.

Current and Voltage Time Plots for the Circuit

Elements
When the transient problem with connected electric circuit
is analyzed, the window displaying the results for a transient
magnetic problem with attached circuit might contain up to
4 kinds of different panes:
• Electric circuit itself;
• The time dependency graphs for the currents in the
selected circuit elements;
• The time dependency graphs for the voltages in the
selected circuit elements;
• The table of currents and voltages in all circuit elements.
 Analysis of Connected Electric Circuit 179

You can resize the panes. You can also hide panes if there
is not enough of window space for all of them. Twin
boundary frames indicate the existence of hidden panes in
between.
The plots are displayed curves are plotted for each selected
circuit component. The correspondence between the curves
and circuit elements is shown by using the same color of a
curve and related line in the circuit element list. Curves are
redrawn when the circuit elements are selected or deselected
in the list or in the electric schema drawing.
The scale of XY-plot could be adjusted by corresponding
toolbar buttons: . Pressing the zoom-in button (with
180 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

plus sign) changes the cursor shape to a cross, after that you
can drag over the rectangle of interest.
The graph image could be printed, copied to the Clipboard,
and/or saved to a file in any of the supported raster or vector
formats. To do that, invoke the corresponding commands in
the context (right-click) menu of the graph.
The table of circuit currents and voltages could be printed,
copied to the Clipboard, and/or saved to a text file. To do
that, invoke the corresponding commands in the context
(right-click) menu of the table.

Parameter Calculation Wizards

The most common design parameters in QuickField are
calculated through wizards. These calculations still could be
done by using the ordinary integral quantities available in
the postprocessor, but wizards allow you to get the results
quicker and in most cases you can avoid manual building of
the contour of integration and manipulating with complex
values.
These three wizards are available in QuickField:
• Inductance Wizard calculates self or mutual inductance
of the coil or conductor in AC or DC magnetic problems;
• Capacitance Wizard calculates self or mutual
capacitance of the conductors in electrostatics problems;
• Impedance Wizard calculates impedance of the
conductor in AC magnetic problems.
To start the wizard, choose Wizard in View menu, or
double-click the corresponding item in the calculator
window. If the calculator window is open while you start the
 Parameter Calculation Wizards 181

wizard, all the parameters calculated by the wizard are

shown in that view. You can start wizard again from not
only its start page but also from any other page by double-
clicking the corresponding value in the Values tree.
Some of the wizards provide several alternative ways to
calculate the desired quantity. Each way is represented in
the calculator window as a separate tree.

Inductance Wizard
Inductance wizard helps you to calculate self and mutual
inductance of your coils in the problem of DC or AC
magnetics.
When your model contains several coils that carry different
currents, the flux linkage with one of them can be calculated
as
𝜙𝑘 = 𝐿𝑘𝑘 ∙ 𝑖𝑘 + ∑ 𝑀𝑛𝑘 ∙ 𝑖𝑛
𝑛
where Lkk is the self inductance of the coil k, Mnk is the
mutual inductance between the coils n and k, ik is the current
in the coil k.
On the other hand, stored magnetic energy also derives from
current and inductance:
1
𝑊= (∑ 𝐿𝑘𝑘 ∙ 𝑖𝑘2 + ∑ 𝑀𝑛𝑘 ∙ 𝑖𝑛 ∙ 𝑖𝑘 )
2
𝑘 𝑛≠𝑘
Before using the inductance wizard, you have to formulate
your problem in such a way that all the currents (space,
surface or linearly distributed) but one are set to zero. There
must be no permanent magnets in your model. In that case
182 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

equation above becomes extremely simple and you can get

inductance value as:
L = /i,
where  is the flux linkage with the coil excited by current
i, or
L =2W/i2,
where W is stored magnetic energy and i is the only current.
The first approach gives the self-inductance, if you get the
flux linkage and the current in the same coil and mutual
inductance if the coils are different. The second approach
gives only the self-inductance.
Initial page of the inductance wizards invites you to choose
between two approaches described above. After choosing
one of them click the Next button.
The second page of inductance wizard allows you to define,
which blocks represent the cross section of your coil. In
general, two blocks represent each coil in the model plane:
forward and return wires. If there is only one side of the coil
in your model, the second one is assumed as being
symmetrical to the first one or as being infinitely distant of
the model and not affecting the field distribution.
 Parameter Calculation Wizards 183

To define each side of your coil, simply point the

corresponding item in the Block Labels list and drag it to
one of the side list. You can also use the Add buttons. No
matter, which side of your coil you call Right Side and
which Left Side. If only one side of the coil is represented
in the model, drag item Symmetry to the opposite list if
return wire of the coil is symmetrical to the direct one, or
leave the list empty if return wire does not affect the
electromagnetic state of your model.
You can select and drag more than one item at once if the
cross section of your coil is split to several blocks.
Enter the Number of Turns for your coil if it is more than
one.
As result of any action on the lists or number of turns the
Flux Linkage value will change automatically being
calculated as
184 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

∫𝐿 𝐴 𝑑𝑠 ∫𝑅 𝐴 𝑑𝑠
𝜙 =𝑁∙( − ) ⎯ for planar case;
∫𝐿 𝑑𝑠 ∫𝑅 𝑑𝑠

∫𝑅 𝑟𝐴 𝑑𝑠 ∫𝐿 𝑟𝐴 𝑑𝑠 ⎯ for axisymmetric
𝜙 = 2π𝑁 ∙ ( − )
∫𝑅 𝑑𝑠 ∫𝐿 𝑑𝑠 case;

where A is the vector magnetic potential; R and L denote the

right and the left side of the coil accordingly, r is the radius
of the point.
For planar problems flux linkage and the inductance are
calculated per one meter of axial depth no matter what
length unit you have chosen.
When you finish with flux linkage calculation, click on the
Next button. In the Current page you can select the current
exciting the field and provide a number of turns in your coil.
 Parameter Calculation Wizards 185

Capacitance Wizard
Capacitance wizard helps you to calculate self and mutual
capacitance of your conductors.
When your model contains several conductors, the charge
of one of them can be calculated as:
𝑞𝑘 = 𝐶𝑘𝑘 ∙ 𝑈𝑘 + ∑ 𝐶𝑛𝑘 ∙ 𝑈𝑛
𝑛
where Ckk is the self-capacitance of the conductor k, Cnk is
the mutual capacitance between the conductors n and k, Uk
is the voltage drop on the conductor k.
On the other hand, stored energy also derives from charge
and capacitance as:
1 𝑞𝑘2 𝑞𝑛 ∙ 𝑞𝑘
𝑊 = (∑ +∑ )
2 𝐶𝑘𝑘 𝐶𝑛𝑘
𝑘 𝑛≠𝑘
and from the voltage and capacitance as:
1
𝑊= (∑ 𝐶𝑘𝑘 ∙ 𝑈𝑘2 + ∑ 𝐶𝑛𝑘 ∙ 𝑈𝑛 ∙ 𝑈𝑘 )
2
𝑘 𝑛≠𝑘
Before using the capacitance wizard, you have to formulate
your problem in such a way that all field sources (space,
surface or linear distributed charge or voltage) but one are
set to zero. In that case equation above becomes extremely
simple and you can get capacitance value if you know any
two of these three quantities: charge, voltage, stored energy.
When formulating your problem, you can apply known
voltage to the conductor and measure the charge it produces
or vice versa. Measuring the charge is a bit more complex
186 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

than the voltage. It requires you to build the closed contour

surrounding your conductor (but not coinciding with its
surface) before you start the capacitance wizard. The easiest
way to formulate the problem for capacitance calculating is
to put constant potential boundary condition on the
conductor’s surface and specify an arbitrary non zero
electric charge in one of the vertices on the surface of the
conductor.
This page of capacitance wizard allows you to specify
electrodes which capacitance you want to calculate.
Electrodes listed on the right side of the page are organized
in two subtrees: surface conductors and linear conductors (if
any).
In case you are calculating the capacitance of the condenser
consisting of two electrodes, select both of them. When
choosing more than one electrode their voltage will be sum
up (with their sign).
 Parameter Calculation Wizards 187

In the right side of the page electrodes are listed which

charge you have specified. If you have put voltage boundary
condition rather than charge on your electrodes, the only
way to calculate the charge is to build the contour
surrounding it but not coincident with its boundary. If so,
you have to do that before you start the capacitance wizard.
When selecting one or more items in the list, you get the
resulting charge in the Charge box.

Impedance Wizard
Impedance wizard helps you to calculate the impedance of
your conductors. It is simple and contains only one page. To
get the impedance value and its real and imaginary parts
(resistance and reactance accordingly) the impedance
wizard simply divides complex values of voltage by current:
Z = U/I, R = Re[Z], XL = Im[Z], L = XL / 2f,
188 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

where Z is absolute value of the impedance and f is the

frequency.

If you select more than one conductor at once, the

impedance wizard considers it as being connected in parallel
if the voltage applied to each of them is equal and as being
connected in series otherwise.

Editing Contours
The contour is a directed curved line consisting of line
segments and arcs (including the edges of the model). Some
rules are applied to the contours:
• The contour may not intersect itself.
• Open and closed contours are discerned.
• Multiply connected contours have sense only for
calculating integral quantities.
 Editing Contours 189

Contour is shown in the field picture window as a set of

directed lines or color-filled interior (closed
counter-clockwise-directed contours).
QuickField allows editing contours in field picture
windows. The following operations change the current
contour state:
• Adding lines − attaches a line segment or an arc to the
contour. The arc is specified by its degree measure (zero
means line segment) and two end points. Any arbitrary
line may initiate the contour, but only adjacent lines are
accepted later. The line cannot be added to the closed
contour. There are two ways to add lines to contour:
choose Pick Elements from Contour menu or context
menu and then drag mouse with left button pressed. Or,
choose Add Lines from Contour menu or context menu
and enter end points coordinates from keyboard.
• Adding edges − appends the contour with an edge of the
model. The contour may be initiated by any arbitrary
edge, but only adjacent edges are accepted later. The
edge cannot be added to the closed contour, or if the
ending point of the contour does not currently coincide
with model’s vertex. To add edges, choose Pick
Elements from Contour menu or context menu and then
pick series of adjacent edges with mouse.
• Adding blocks − considers the current closed contour as
a border of the plane region and updates that region by
adding (or subtracting) a block of the model in the sense
of set theory. To add blocks, choose Pick Elements from
Contour menu or context menu and then pick blocks
with mouse.
190 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

• Close contour − closes an open contour by connecting

its open ends with a straight line or an arc, depending on
current degree measure in the postprocessing toolbar.
• Change direction − alters the contour direction.
• Clear − deletes the entire contour.
• Delete last − deletes the last element (line or edge) in the
contour. Not applicable to multiply connected contours.
Depending on current state of the contour, some editing
operations may be prohibited.
The direction of the contour is significant in the following
cases:
• For volume integrals, the domain of integration lies to
the left of the contour.
• For surface integrals, the positive normal vector points
to the right relative to the contour direction.
• The starting point of the contour corresponds to zero
point at the x-axis of the X-Y plot.
• If the plotted or the integrated function has different
values to the left and to the right of the contour, the
right-hand value is used.

X-Y Plots
QuickField postprocessor can display field distribution
along contours. To open new X-Y plot window, choose X-Y
plot in View menu or context (right mouse button) menu in
field picture window, in which the contour is already
defined.
In X-Y plot view, you can:
 X-Y Plots 191

• Select the set of shown quantities. Click X-Y Plot

Curves in the View or context menu.
• Zoom the plot in or out.
• View the correspondence between quantities and curves
(legend).
• Copy the picture to clipboard.
• Open new X-Y plot window for the same contour.

X-Y Plot Control

Few quantities having the same unit of measurement can be

shown at the same X-Y plot. According to this, all quantities
are combined into groups. Full list of quantities includes all
those available for the color map representation (see
“Interpreted Quantities”), and also normal and tangential
components of vector and scalar quantities.
When you select the appropriate group of quantities, the
Curves to Show list contains the quantities selected for
192 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

display, and the Available Quantities list contains available

but not selected quantities. You can use buttons located
between the lists, or simply double-click in the lists, to move
some quantity from one list to another.
In the dialog box, you can also modify the range of y
coordinate. By default, it fits all the currently selected
curves. You can get the suggested value of lower or upper
limit by selecting the corresponding text box (Minimum or
Maximum) and choosing Suggest button.
In time-harmonic analysis, you can also switch between
momentary (at given phase), time average and peak values
of time dependent quantities.
You can turn on or off the switches for displaying
coordinate grid and markers on the curves. The last mode
allows you to distinguish between the coinciding curves.

Calculating Integrals
QuickField calculates line, surface and volume integrals. In
plane-parallel problem, a contour defines cylindrical (in
generalized sense) surface of infinite depth, or volume of
that cylinder for volume integral. Therefore, in
plane-parallel formulation surface and volume integrals are
calculated per unit depth. In axisymmetric problem, a
contour defines toroidal surface, or toroid for volume
integral.
Positive direction of a contour is counter-clockwise. The
direction of the contour is accounted as follows:
 Calculating Integrals 193

• For volume integrals the domain of integration lies to the

left of the contour.
• For surface integrals the positive normal vector points to
the right relative to the contour direction.
• If the plotted or the integrated function has different
values to the left and to the right of the contour, the
right-hand value is used.
Force, torque and electric charge integrals represent real
physical quantities only when the contour is closed.
However, these integrals are calculated for the unclosed
contours too.
To calculate integrals, click Integral Values in the View
menu or context (right mouse button) menu. Or, if calculator
window is already open, double-click on the
Integral Calculator item in the tree. If the contour is
already defined, a list of available integral quantities
appears. The list varies depends on whether your contour is
open or closed. If you have no contour defined in the active
field view, a message appears prompting you to build the
contour. You can get a value of an integral parameter by
click on the small gray button left on its name or by double
click on the name. Once opened the integral value will be
recalculated automatically each time you change the
contour.
Some integrals require closed counter-clockwise oriented
contour, otherwise they have no physical sense. Once you
created the contour, you can select an integral quantity from
the list and choose Calculate button to get the value. Copy
button allows you to copy the calculated result to clipboard.
194 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

When the electric or magnetic force, torque, electric charge,

electric current or heat flux are to be calculated, the domain
of integration may be chosen by many different ways. The
only requirement for the surface of integration is to contain
all the necessary bodies, but to avoid any extra bodies or
field sources. It is important to understand that the accuracy
will be the best if you choose the integration surface as far
as possible from the places with strong inhomogeneity of
field, e.g. field sources or boundaries of conducting or
ferromagnetic bodies.
When calculating the flux linkage the domain of integration
must exactly fit the cross section of the coil.
The next sections describe the integral values QuickField
can evaluate for different problem types. Besides the
corresponding formulation, each description specifies the
value enumeration constant for the appropriate invocation
of QuickField.Result.GetIntegral (the detailed description
of the ActiveField technology that provides the
programmatic interface to QuickField can be found in
QuickField Help).
The formulations share the following geometric notations:
• n the vector of the outward unit normal;
• t the unit tangent vector;
• r the position vector of the point.
The notations for the domain of integration vary in the
following way:
• L for integration along the contour;
• S for integration across the surface swept by the
movement of the contour;
 Calculating Integrals 195

• SC for integration across the planar surface

defined by the interior of the closed contour;
• V for integration across the interior of the closed
surface swept by the movement of the closed contour.

Note. In plane-parallel formulations the contour sweeps the

surface moving along the z-axis for the axial length of the
problem (1m, by default).
In axisymmetric formulations the contour does so rotating
around the x axis for 360 degrees.
For DC and transient magnetic problems:
Generally the integral quantities of interest in magnetic
analysis are: mechanical force and torque, magnetic flux and
flux linkage, magnetomotive force (MMF), magnetic field
energy.
The following notations are used in formulas:
• B – magnetic flux density vector;
• H – vector of magnetic field strength;
• A – z-component of magnetic vector potential;
• B(H) magnetization curve of a ferromagnetic, that
assumed to be isotropic.
Name,
Formula and Description
ActiveFied constant
Mechanical force 𝐇(𝐧𝐁)
1
qfInt_MaxwellForce 𝐅 = ∮ (+ 𝐁(𝐧𝐇)) 𝑑𝑠,
2
𝑆 – 𝐧(𝐇𝐁)
 196 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Total magnetic force acting on

bodies contained in a particular
volume, where integral is evaluated
over the boundary of the volume.
Mechanical torque [𝐫 × 𝐇](𝐧𝐁)
1
𝐓 = ∮ ( + [𝐫 × 𝐁](𝐧𝐇) ) 𝑑𝑠
qfInt_MaxwellTorque 2
𝑆 – [𝐫 × 𝐧](𝐇𝐁)
Total torque of magnetic forces
acting on bodies contained in a
particular volume, where r is a radius
vector of the point of integration.
The torque vector is parallel to z-axis
in the planar case, and is identically
equal to zero in the axisymmetric
one. The torque is considered relative
to the origin of the coordinate
system. The torque relative to any
other arbitrary point can be obtained
by adding extra term of [F×r0],
where F is the total force and r0 is the
radius vector of the point.
Flux linkage per one turn ∮ 𝐴𝑑𝑠
Ψ = ⎯ for planar case;
qfInt_FluxLinkage 𝑆𝐶
Ψ
2𝜋 ∮(𝑟𝐴)𝑑𝑠 ⎯ for axisymmetric
= case.
𝑆𝐶
 Calculating Integrals 197

The integral has to be evaluated over

a cross section of the coil, and SC is
the area of the cross section.
Magnetomotive force 𝐹 = ∫ (𝐇 ∙ 𝐭)𝑑𝑙
𝐿
qfInt_KGrad_t_dl Magnetomotive force is a line
integral around the contour of
magnetic field strength.
According Ampere’s law the
magnetomotive force around a closed
line is equal to total current through
the contour.
Magnetic flux
𝛷 = ∫ (𝐁 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
qfInt_Grad_n_ds 𝑆
Magnetic flux over the surface
defined by the contour.
Magnetic field energy
1
qfInt_MagneticEnergy 𝑊= ∫ (𝐇
2 ⎯ linear case;
𝑉
· 𝐁)𝑑𝑣
𝑊
𝐵
⎯ nonlinear
= ∫ (∫ 𝐻(𝐵′)𝑑𝐵′) 𝑑𝑣
case.
0
 198 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Magnetic field co-energy 𝑊𝑐𝑜

𝐻
qfInt_MagneticCoenergy ⎯ nonlinear
= ∫ (∫ 𝐵(𝐻′)𝑑𝐻′) 𝑑𝑣
case.
𝑉
0

For linear problem the co-energy is

equal to the magnetic energy.
Linearized field energy
1
qfInt_ElectrostaticEnergy 𝑊𝑙𝑖𝑛 = ∫ (𝐁 · 𝐇)𝑑𝑣
2
𝑉
For linear case the linearized energy
is equal to the ordinary magnetic
energy.
Surface energy
1
qfInt_GradKGrad_n_ds 𝑊𝑠 = ∫ (𝐁 · 𝐇)𝑑𝑠
2
𝑆
The (BH) product is integrated is
over a surface defined by the
contour.
Average surface potential 1
𝐴𝑆 = ∫ 𝐴𝑑𝑠
qfInt_Potential_ds 𝑆 𝑆
Average volume 1
potential 𝐴𝑉 = ∫ 𝐴𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_Potential_dv
 Calculating Integrals 199

Average volume flux 1

density 𝐁𝑎 = ∫ 𝐁𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_Grad_dv
Average volume strength 1
𝐇𝑎 = ∫ 𝐇𝑑𝑣
qfInt_KGrad_dv 𝑉 𝑉
Mean square flux 1
𝐵𝑎2 = ∫ 𝐵2 𝑑𝑣
qfInt_Grad2_dv 𝑉 𝑉
Mean square strength 1
𝐻𝑎2 = ∫ 𝐻2 𝑑𝑣
qfInt_KGrad2_dv 𝑉 𝑉
Line integral of flux
density 𝑥 = ∫ (𝐁 ∙ 𝐭)𝑑𝑙
𝐿
qfInt_Grad_t_dl Line integral over the contour of
magnetic flux density.
Surface integral of
strength 𝑥 = ∫ (𝐇 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
𝑆
qfInt_KGrad_n_ds
With transient problems only:
Total current
𝐼 = ∫ 𝑗𝑑𝑠
qfInt_Jtotal 𝑆𝑐

Electric current through a particular

surface. The integral is evaluated
over a cross section of the coil, and
SC is the area of the cross section
 200 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

j –is a total current density in z-

direction.
External current
𝐼𝑒𝑥𝑡 = ∫ 𝑗𝑒𝑥𝑡 𝑑𝑠
qfInt_Jextern 𝑆𝑐

External current through a particular

surface.
jext – density of external current.
Eddy current
𝐼𝑒𝑑𝑑𝑦 = ∫ 𝑗𝑒𝑑𝑑𝑦 𝑑𝑠
qfInt_Jeddies 𝑆𝑐

Eddy current through a particular

surface.
jeddy – density of eddy current.
Joule heat 1
𝑃 = ∫ 𝑗 2 𝑑𝑣
qfInt_Power 𝜎
Joule heat power in a volume.
σ – electric conductivity,
j – total current density.
For AC magnetic problems:
For the AC magnetic field analysis, the most interesting
integral values are: the total, eddy and external current, the
mechanical force and torque, the magnetic flux and flux
linkage, the magnetomotive force, the field energy.
The following notations are used in formulas:
 Calculating Integrals 201

• B – complex vector magnetic flux density;

• H – complex vector magnetic field intensity (field
strength);
• jtotal, jeddy, jext – complex values of total, eddy and external
current density;
• A – z-component of complex magnetic vector potential.
Since AC magnetic problems' formulations use complex
values that represent the real world quantities sinusoidally
changing with time, the integral values might appear in the
following different ways:
• As a Complex value, with amplitude and phase (e.g.
current, flux linkage, magnetomotive force).
• As a Complex vector, with the endpoint sweeping an
ellipse in any complete time period (e.g. induction,
magnetic field strength). The characteristics of complex
vectors are: the amplitude (per coordinate), the phase,
and the polarization coefficient.
• As a Quadratic value (e.g. ohmic loss power, field
energy, etc.) pulsing around its mean value with double
frequency. The characteristics of quadratic values are:
the mean value, the phase, and the pulsation amplitude.
• As a Quadratic vector (e.g. mechanical forces) with
magnitude and direction varying around its mean value
with double frequency. The characteristics of quadratic
vectors are: the mean value (length, slant and
coordinates), and the variation amplitude (used, for
example, to estimate the mechanical force limit for a
period).
202 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Name,
Formula and Description
ActiveFied constant
Total current
𝐼𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 = ∫ 𝑗𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑑𝑠
qfInt_Jtotal 𝑆𝑐

Complex value.
Electric current through a
particular surface.
External current
𝐼𝑒𝑥𝑡 = ∫ 𝑗𝑒𝑥𝑡 𝑑𝑠
qfInt_Jextern 𝑆𝑐

Complex value.
External current through a
particular surface.
Eddy current
𝐼𝑒𝑑𝑑𝑦 = ∫ 𝑗𝑒𝑑𝑑𝑦 𝑑𝑠
qfInt_Jeddies 𝑆𝑐

Complex value
Eddy current through a
particular surface.
Joule heat 1 2
𝑃 = ∫ ∙𝑗 𝑑𝑣
qfInt_Power 𝑉 𝜎 𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙
Quadratic value.
Joule heat power in a particular
volume.
σ – electric conductivity of the
media.
 Calculating Integrals 203

Core loss 𝑘ℎ ∙ 𝑓 ∙ 𝐵 2
2 2
qfInt_Steinmetz 𝑃 = ∫ [ +𝑘𝑐 ∙ 𝑓 ∙ 𝐵 ] 𝑑𝑣
𝑉 3
+𝑘𝑒 ∙ (𝑓 ∙ 𝐵)2
where B is the magnetic flux
density peak value,
and kh, kc, ke are user defined
coefficients.
Power flow
𝑃𝑆 = ∫ (𝐒 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
qfInt_EnergyFlow 𝑆
Quadratic value.
Power flow through the given
surface (Poynting vector flow)
Here S – is a Pointing vector S =
[EH].
Maxwell force 𝐇(𝐧𝐁)
1
qfInt_MaxwellForce 𝐅 = ∮ (+ 𝐁(𝐧𝐇)) 𝑑𝑠,
2
𝑆 – 𝐧(𝐇𝐁)
Quadratic vector.
Maxwell force acting on bodies
contained in a particular
volume.
The integral is evaluated over
the boundary of the volume, and
n denotes the vector of the
outward unit normal.
204 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Maxwell torque 𝐓
qfInt_MaxwellTorque [𝐫 × 𝐇](𝐧𝐁)
1
= ∮ ( + [𝐫 × 𝐁](𝐧𝐇)) 𝑑𝑠
2
𝑆 – [𝐫 × 𝐧](𝐇𝐁)
Quadratic value.
Maxwell force torque acting on
bodies contained in a particular
volume, where r is a radius
vector of the point of
integration.
The torque vector is parallel to z-
axis in the planar case, and is
identically equal to zero in the
axisymmetric one. The torque is
considered relative to the origin
of the coordinate system. The
torque relative to any other
arbitrary point can be obtained
by adding extra term of [F×r0],
where F is the total force and r0
is the radius vector of the point.
Lorentz force
qfInt_LorentzForce 𝐅 = ∫ [𝐣 × 𝐁]𝑑𝑣.
𝑉
Quadratic vector.
The Lorentz force acting on
conductors contained in a
particular volume.
 Calculating Integrals 205

Lorentz torque
qfInt_LorentzTorque 𝐓 = ∫ [𝐫 × [𝐣 × 𝐁]]𝑑𝑣.
𝑉
Quadratic value.
The Lorentz force torque acting
on bodies contained in a
particular volume. The torque is
considered relative to the origin
of the coordinate system.
Magnetic field energy
1
qfInt_MagneticEnergy 𝑊= ∫ (𝐇 · 𝐁)𝑑𝑣
2
𝑉
Quadratic value.
This formula is used for both
linear and nonlinear cases.
Flux linkage per one ∮ 𝐴𝑑𝑠 ⎯ for planar
turn Ψ =
𝑆𝐶 case;
qfInt_FluxLinkage
Ψ ⎯ for
2𝜋 ∮(𝑟𝐴)𝑑𝑠 axisymmetric
=
𝑆𝐶 case.
Complex value.
The integral has to be evaluated
over a cross section of the coil,
and SC is the area of the cross
section.
206 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Magnetomotive force
𝐹 = ∫ (𝐇 ∙ 𝐭)𝑑𝑙
qfInt_KGrad_t_dl 𝐿
Complex value.
Magnetomotive force.
Magnetic flux
𝛷 = ∫ (𝐁 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
qfInt_Grad_n_ds 𝑆
Complex value.
Magnetic flux through a
particular surface.
Surface energy
1
qfInt_GradKGrad_n_ds 𝑊𝑠 = ∫ (𝐁 · 𝐇)𝑑𝑠
2
𝑆
Quadratic value.
The integral is evaluated over
the surface swept by the
movement of the contour.
Average surface 1
potential 𝐴𝑆 = ∫ 𝐴𝑑𝑠
𝑆 𝑆
qfInt_Potential_ds Complex value.
Integrated over a particular
volume
Average volume 1
potential 𝐴𝑉 = ∫ 𝐴𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_Potential_dv Complex value.
 Calculating Integrals 207

Average volume flux 1

density 𝐁𝑎 = ∫ 𝐁𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_Grad_dv Complex vector.
Average volume 1
strength 𝐇𝑎 = ∫ 𝐇𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_KGrad_dv Complex vector.
Mean square flux 1
density 𝐵𝑎2 = ∫ 𝐵2 𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_Grad2_dv Quadratic value.
Mean square strength 1
𝐻𝑎2 = ∫ 𝐻2 𝑑𝑣
qfInt_KGrad2_dv 𝑉 𝑉
Quadratic value.
Line integral of flux
density 𝑥 = ∫ (𝐁 ∙ 𝐭)𝑑𝑙
𝐿
qfInt_Grad_t_dl Complex value.
The line integral over the
contour of a magnetic flux
density.
Surface integral of
strength 𝑥 = ∫ (𝐇 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
𝑆
qfInt_KGrad_n_ds Complex value.
208 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Note. The Maxwell force incorporates both the force acting

on ferromagnetic bodies and Lorentz force, which acts only
on conductors. If the first component is negligible or is not
considered, we recommend calculating the electromagnetic
force as Lorentz force. Its precision is less sensitive to the
contour path, and you can simply select conductors via
block selection to calculate the force. With Maxwell force,
this method leads to very rough results, and you are
recommended to avoid coinciding of your contour parts and
material boundaries, as described earlier in this chapter.
For electrostatic problems:
Generally the integral quantities of interest in electrostatic
analysis are: electric charge, potential difference,
mechanical force and torque, field energy.
The following notations are used in formulas:
• E — electric field strength;
• D — vector of electric flux density (electric
displacement);
• U — electric potential.
Name, ActiveFied
Formula and Description
constant
Electric charge
𝑞 = ∮ 𝐃 ∙ 𝐧 𝑑𝑠
qfInt_KGrad_n_ds 𝑆
According to the Gauss
theorem, total electric charge
in a particular volume can be
calculated as a flux of electric
 Calculating Integrals 209

displacement over its closed

boundary.
Mechanical force 𝐄(𝐧𝐃)
1
qfInt_MaxwellForce 𝐅 = ∮ (+ 𝐃(𝐧𝐄)) 𝑑𝑠
2
𝑆 – 𝐧(𝐄𝐃)
Total electric force acting on
bodies contained in a
particular volume. The
integral is evaluated over the
volume’s boundary.
Mechanical torque 𝐓
qfInt_MaxwellTorque [𝐫 × 𝐄](𝐧𝐃)
1
= ∮ ( + [𝐫 × 𝐃](𝐧𝐄)) 𝑑𝑠
2
𝑆 – [𝐫 × 𝐧](𝐄𝐃)
Total torque of electric forces
acting on bodies contained in
a particular volume.
The torque vector is parallel to
z-axis in the planar case, and is
identically equal to zero in the
axisymmetric one. The torque
is considered relative to the
origin of the coordinate
system. The torque relative to
any other arbitrary point can
be obtained by adding extra
term of [F×r0], where F is the
210 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

total force and r0 is the radius

vector of the point.
Stored energy
1
qfInt_ElectrostaticEnerg 𝑊= ∫ (𝐄 · 𝐃)𝑑𝑣
2
y 𝑉
Electric field energy in a
particular volume.
Surface energy
qfInt_GradKGrad_n_ds 𝑊𝑆 = ∫(𝐄 · 𝐃)𝑑𝑠
𝑆

Potential difference
qfInt_Grad_t_dl ∆𝑈 = ∫ (𝐄 · 𝐭)𝑑𝑙
𝐿
The potential difference
between the ending and
started points of a contour can
be calculated as a line integral
over the contour of electric
field strength.
Average surface 1
potential 𝑈𝑆 = ∫ 𝑈𝑑𝑠
𝑆 𝑆
qfInt_Potential_ds
Average volume 1
potential 𝑈𝑉 = ∫ 𝑈𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_Potential_dv
 Calculating Integrals 211

Average volume strength 1

𝐄𝑎 = ∫ 𝐄𝑑𝑣
qfInt_Grad_dv 𝑉 𝑉
Average electric filed
strength in a particular
volume.
Average volume 1
displacement 𝐃𝑎 = ∫ 𝐃𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_KGrad_dv Average electric
displacement vector in a
particular volume.
Mean square strength 1
𝐸𝑎2 = ∫ 𝐸 2 𝑑𝑣
qfInt_Grad2_dv 𝑉 𝑉
Mean square 1
displacement 𝐷𝑎2 = ∫ 𝐷2 𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_KGrad_dv
Line integral of
displacement 𝑥 = ∫ (𝐃 ∙ 𝐭)𝑑𝑙
𝐿
qfInt_KGrad_t_dl
Surface integral of
strength 𝑥 = ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
𝑆
qfInt_Grad_n_ds
For DC conduction problems:
Generally the integral quantities of interest in DC
conduction analysis are: electric current, Joule heat.
212 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

The following notations are used in formulas:

• E — electric field strength;
• j — vector of current density;
• D — vector of electric flux density (electric
displacement);
• U — scalar electric potential.
Name,
Formula and Description
ActiveFied constant
Current through a
surface 𝐼 = ∫ (𝐣 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
𝑆
qfInt_KGrad_n_ds Electric current through a
particular surface.
Joule heat in a volume
𝑊 = ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐣)𝑑𝑣
qfInt_GradKGrad_dv 𝑉
Power losses in a particular
volume.
Potential difference
∆𝑈 = ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐭)𝑑𝑙
qfInt_Grad_t_dl 𝐿
The potential difference
between the ending and started
points of a contour can be
calculated as a line integral
over the contour of electric
field strength.
 Calculating Integrals 213

Surface Joule heat

𝑊𝑆 = ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐣)𝑑𝑠
qfInt_GradKGrad_n_ds 𝑆

Average surface 1
potential 𝑈𝑆 = ∫ 𝑈𝑑𝑠
𝑆 𝑆
qfInt_Potential_ds
Average volume 1
potential 𝑈𝑉 = ∫ 𝑈𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_Potential_dv
Average volume 1
strength 𝐄𝑎 = ∫ 𝐄𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_Grad_dv
Average volume 1
current density 𝐣𝑎 = ∫ 𝐣𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_KGrad_dv
Mean square strength 1
𝐸𝑎2 = ∫ 𝐸 2 𝑑𝑣
qfInt_Grad2_dv 𝑉 𝑉
Mean square current 1
density 𝑗𝑎2 = ∫ 𝑗 2 𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_KGrad2_dv
Surface integral of
strength 𝑥 = ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
𝑆
qfInt_Grad_n_ds
214 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Line integral of current

density 𝑥 = ∫ (𝐣 ∙ 𝐭)𝑑𝑙
𝐿
qfInt_KGrad_t_dl
For AC conduction problems:
For the AC conduction analysis, the most interesting
integral values are: active, reactive and apparent current
through particular surface, Joule heat, mechanical force and
torque, field energy.
The following notations are used in formulas:
• E – complex vector of electric field strength;
• D – complex vector of electric displacement;
• jA – complex vector of active current density;
• jRE – complex vector of reactive current density;
• jAPP – complex vector of apparent current density;
• U – complex value of electric potential;
Since AC conduction problems' formulations use complex
values that represent the real world quantities sinusoidally
changing with time, the integral values might appear in the
following different ways:
• As a Complex value, with amplitude and phase (e.g.
current, potential).
• As a Complex vector, with the endpoint sweeping an
ellipse in any complete time period (e.g. current density,
field strength). The characteristics of complex vectors
are: the amplitude (per coordinate), the phase, and the
polarization coefficient.
• As a Quadratic value (e.g. ohmic loss power, field
energy, etc.) pulsing around its mean value with double
 Calculating Integrals 215

frequency. The characteristics of quadratic values are:

the mean value, the phase, and the pulsation amplitude.
• As a Quadratic vector (e.g. mechanical forces) with
magnitude and direction varying around its mean value
with double frequency. The characteristics of quadratic
vectors are: the mean value (length, slant and
coordinates), and the variation amplitude (used, for
example, to estimate the mechanical force limit for a
period).
Name,
Formula and Description
ActiveFied constant
Active current through a
given surface 𝐼𝐴 = ∫ (𝐣𝑨 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
𝑆
qfInt_Jactive Complex value.
Active electric current
through a particular surface.
Reactive current through
a given surface 𝐼𝑅𝐸 = ∫ (𝐣𝑹𝑬 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
𝑆
qfInt_Jreactive Complex value.
Reactive electric current
through a particular surface.
Apparent current through
a given surface 𝐼𝐴𝑃𝑃 = ∫ (𝐣𝑨𝑷𝑷 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
𝑆
qfInt_Japparent Complex value.
Apparent electric current
through a particular surface.
216 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Active power produced

in a volume 𝑃𝐴 = ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐣𝑨 )𝑑𝑣
𝑉
qfInt_PowerActive Quadratic value
Joule heat power produced in
a particular volume.
Reactive power produced
in a volume 𝑃𝑅𝐸 = ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐣𝑹𝑬 )𝑑𝑣
𝑉
qfInt_PowerReactive Quadratic value
Reactive power produced in a
particular volume.
Apparent power
produced in a volume 𝑃𝐴𝑃𝑃 = ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐣𝑨𝑷𝑷 )𝑑𝑣
𝑉
qfInt_PowerApparent Quadratic value
Apparent power produced in a
particular volume.
Mechanical force 𝐄(𝐧𝐃)
1
qfInt_MaxwellForce 𝐅 = ∮ (+ 𝐃(𝐧𝐄)) 𝑑𝑠
2
𝑆 – 𝐧(𝐄𝐃)
Quadratic vector
Electric force acting on bodies
contained in a particular
volume. Evaluated by
calculating of Maxwell stress
tensor over volume’s
bounding surface.
 Calculating Integrals 217

Mechanical torque 𝐓
qfInt_MaxwellTorque [𝐫 × 𝐄](𝐧𝐃)
1
= ∮ ( + [𝐫 × 𝐃](𝐧𝐄) ) 𝑑𝑠
2
𝑆 – [𝐫 × 𝐧](𝐄𝐃)
Quadratic value.
Electric force torque acting on
bodies contained in a
particular volume, where r is
a radius vector of the point of
integration.
The torque vector is parallel to
z-axis in the planar case, and is
identically equal to zero in the
axisymmetric one. The torque
is considered relative to the
origin of the coordinate
system. The torque relative to
any other arbitrary point can be
obtained by adding extra term
of [F×r0], where F is the total
force and r0 is the radius vector
of the point.
Electric field energy 1
𝑊= ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐃)𝑑𝑣
qfInt_ElectrostaticEnergy 2 𝑉
Quadratic value.
Electric field energy in a
particular volume.
218 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Surface energy
𝑊𝑆 = ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐃)𝑑𝑠
qfInt_GradKGrad_n_ds 𝑆
Quadratic value.
Potential difference
∆𝑈 = ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐭)𝑑𝑙
qfInt_Grad_t_dl 𝐿
Complex value.
The potential difference
between the ending and
started points of a contour can
be calculated as a line integral
over the contour of electric
field strength.
Average surface potential 1
𝑈𝑆 = ∫ 𝑈𝑑𝑠
qfInt_Potential_ds 𝑆 𝑆
Complex value.
Average volume 1
potential 𝑈𝑉 = ∫ 𝑈𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_Potential_dv Complex value.
Average volume strength 1
𝐄𝑎 = ∫ 𝐄𝑑𝑣
qfInt_Grad_dv 𝑉 𝑉
Complex vector.
Average electric field strength
vector in a particular volume.
 Calculating Integrals 219

Average volume 1
displacement 𝐃𝑎 = ∫ 𝐃𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_KGrad_dv Complex vector.
Average electric displacement
vector in a particular volume.
Mean square strength 1
𝐸𝑎2 = ∫ 𝐸 2 𝑑𝑣
qfInt_Grad2_dv 𝑉 𝑉
Quadratic value.
Mean square 1
displacement 𝐷𝑎2 = ∫ 𝐷2 𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_KGrad2_dv Quadratic value.
Electric charge
𝑄𝑆 = ∫ (𝐃 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
qfInt_KGrad_n_ds 𝑆
Complex value.
The total electric charge in a
particular volume can be
calculated as a flux of electric
displacement over the
volume’s closed boundary.
Line integral of
displacement 𝑥 = ∫ (𝐃 ∙ 𝐭)𝑑𝑙
𝐿
qfInt_KGrad_t_dl Complex value.
220 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Transient electric field:

The integral quantities in transient electric analysis are:
electric charge, potential difference, active and reactive
current, Joule heat, mechanical force and torque, field
energy.
The following notations are used in formulas:
• E – electric field strength;
• D – vector of electric flux density (electric
displacement);
• jA – active current density;
• jRE – reactive current density;
• U – electric potential.
Name, ActiveFied
Formula and Description
constant
Electric charge
𝑞 = ∮ 𝐃 ∙ 𝐧 𝑑𝑠
qfInt_KGrad_n_ds
According to the Gauss theorem,
total electric charge in a
particular volume can be
calculated as a flux of electric
displacement over its closed
boundary.
Active current through a
given surface 𝐼𝐴 = ∫ (𝐣𝑨 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
𝑆
qfInt_Jactive Active electric current through a
particular surface.
 Calculating Integrals 221

Reactive current through

a given surface 𝐼𝑅𝐸 = ∫ (𝐣𝑹𝑬 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
𝑆
qfInt_Jreactive Reactive electric current through
a particular surface.
Active power produced
in a volume 𝑃𝐴 = ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐣𝑨 )𝑑𝑣
𝑉
qfInt_PowerActive Joule heat power produced in a
particular volume.
Mechanical force 𝐄(𝐧𝐃)
1
qfInt_MaxwellForce 𝐅 = ∮ (+ 𝐃(𝐧𝐄)) 𝑑𝑠
2
𝑆 – 𝐧(𝐄𝐃)
Total electric force acting on
bodies contained in a particular
volume. The integral is
evaluated over the volume’s
boundary.
Mechanical torque [𝐫 × 𝐄](𝐧𝐃)
1
qfInt_MaxwellTorque 𝐓 = ∮ ( + [𝐫 × 𝐃](𝐧𝐄)) 𝑑𝑠
2
𝑆 – [𝐫 × 𝐧](𝐄𝐃)
Total torque of electric forces
acting on bodies contained in a
particular volume.
The torque vector is parallel to z-
axis in the planar case, and is
identically equal to zero in the
axisymmetric one. The torque is
222 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

considered relative to the origin

of the coordinate system. The
torque relative to any other
arbitrary point can be obtained by
adding extra term of [F×r0],
where F is the total force and r0
is the radius vector of the point.
Stored energy 1
𝑊= ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐃)𝑑𝑣
qfInt_ElectrostaticEnergy 2 𝑉
Electric field energy in a
particular volume.
Surface energy
𝑊𝑆 = ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐃)𝑑𝑠
qfInt_GradKGrad_n_ds 𝑆

Potential difference
∆𝑈 = ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐭)𝑑𝑙
qfInt_Grad_t_dl 𝐿
The potential difference between
the ending and started points of a
contour can be calculated as a
line integral over the contour of
electric field strength.
Average surface potential 1
𝑈𝑆 = ∫ 𝑈𝑑𝑠
qfInt_Potential_ds 𝑆 𝑆
Average volume 1
potential 𝑈𝑉 = ∫ 𝑈𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_Potential_dv
 Calculating Integrals 223

Average volume strength 1

𝐄𝑎 = ∫ 𝐄𝑑𝑣
qfInt_Grad_dv 𝑉 𝑉
Average electric filed strength in
a particular volume.
Average volume 1
displacement 𝐃𝑎 = ∫ 𝐃𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_KGrad_dv Average electric displacement
vector in a particular volume.
Mean square strength 1
𝐸𝑎2 = ∫ 𝐸 2 𝑑𝑣
qfInt_Grad2_dv 𝑉 𝑉
Mean square 1
displacement 𝐷𝑎2 = ∫ 𝐷2 𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_KGrad_dv
Line integral of
displacement 𝑥 = ∫ (𝐃 ∙ 𝐭)𝑑𝑙
𝐿
qfInt_KGrad_t_dl
Surface integral of
strength 𝑥 = ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
𝑆
qfInt_Grad_n_ds
For heat transfer problems:
For the heat transfer analysis, the most interesting integral
values are: the heat flux, mean volume temperature.
224 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

The following notations are used in formulas:

• G – vector of temperature gradient;
• F – vector of heat flux density;
• T – temperature.
Name,
ActiveFied Formula and Description
constant
Heat flux
𝛷 = ∫ (𝐅 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
qfInt_KGrad_n_ds 𝑆
Heat flux through a particular
surface.
Temperature
difference Δ𝑇 = ∫ (𝐆 ∙ 𝐭)𝑑𝑙
𝐿
qfInt_Grad_t_dl The temperature difference between
starting and ending points of a
contour can be calculated as an
integral over the contour of the
temperature gradient.
Average surface 1
temperature 𝑇𝑆 = ∫ 𝑇𝑑𝑠
𝑆 𝑆
qfInt_Potential_ds
Average volume 1
temperature 𝑇𝑉 = ∫ 𝑇𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_Potential_dv
 Calculating Integrals 225

Average volume 1
temperature 𝐆𝑎 = ∫ 𝐆𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
gradient
Mean vector of temperature gradient
qfInt_Grad_dv in a volume.
Average volume 1
heat flux density 𝐅𝑎 = ∫ 𝐅𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_KGrad_dv Mean vector of heat flux density in
a volume.
Average volume 1
temperature 𝐺𝑎2 = ∫ 𝐺 2 𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
gradient
qfInt_Grad2_dv
Mean square heat 1
flux density 𝐹𝑎2 = ∫ 𝐹 2 𝑑𝑣
𝑉 𝑉
qfInt_KGrad_dv
Line integral of
heat flux density 𝑥 = ∫ (𝐅 ∙ 𝐭)𝑑𝑙
𝐿
qfInt_KGrad_t_dl
Surface integral of
grad(T) 𝑥 = ∫ (𝐆 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
𝑆
qfInt_Grad_n_ds
For problems of stress analysis:
For the stress analysis problems, the most interesting
integral values are: force, torque and lengthen.
226 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

The following notations are used in formulas:

• σ – the stress tensor.
Name,
ActiveFied Formula and Description
constant
Force
𝐅 = ∮ (𝜎 ∙ 𝐧) 𝑑𝑠
qfInt_Force 𝑆
Total force acting on a particular
volume.
The integral is evaluated over the
boundary of the volume, and n
denotes the vector of the outward
unit normal.
Torque 1
𝐓= ∮ [𝐫 × (𝜎 ∙ 𝐧)]𝑑𝑠
qfInt_Torque 2 𝑆
Total torque of the forces acting on
a particular volume, where r is a
radius vector of the point of
integration.
The torque vector is parallel to z axis
in the planar case, and is identically
equal to zero in the axisymmetric
one. The torque is considered
relative to the origin of the
coordinate system. The torque
relative to any other arbitrary point
can be obtained by adding extra term
 Data Tables 227

of [F×r0], where F is the total force

and r0 is the radius vector of the
point.
Lengthen
Δ𝐿 = ∫ (𝜎 ∙ 𝐭)𝑑𝑙
qfInt_lengthen 𝐿
Relative lengthen of the contour.

Data Tables
QuickField can display the field data at discrete points,
distributed along the currently selected contour, in table
view. To open new table window, choose Table in the View
menu or context (right mouse button) menu in field picture
window, in which the contour is already defined.
In table view, you can:
• Select the list of shown quantities (table columns).
Choose Columns in View or context menu.
• Select how the points are distributed along the contour
(table rows). Choose Rows in View or context menu.
• Insert additional rows at specified distance from the
beginning of the contour. Choose Insert in Edit or
context menu.
• Copy the set of rows or the whole table to Windows
clipboard. In latter case (when all of the rows are
selected), column headers are also copied. To copy the
header only, click the right mouse button within the
header and choose Copy Header from the context menu.
228 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Table Columns
To change the set of visible table columns or the contents of
their headers, choose Columns from the View menu or from
context (right mouse button) menu in the Table window.
The Table Columns dialog appears on the screen:
The left part of the dialog
window contains the list of
all known columns. You
choose the set of visible
columns marking or
clearing the check boxes in
the list. Clicking on
Select All or Clear All
button respectively marks
and clears all check boxes in
the list.
The state of the check boxes
in Header Contains
defines which column
identification details should
be included in its header.
The
Adjust Columns Width
radio button state specifies
whether the width of a
column should be based on
the width of its data or on
the width of its header.
 Data Tables 229

The state of the check boxes in Header Contains defines

which column identification details should be included in its
header. The Adjust Columns Width radio button state
specifies whether the width of a column should be based on
the width of its data or on the width of its header.
QuickField applies these settings to all columns at once. To
change the width of a single column drag the right border of
the column in the table header.

Table Rows
To fill the table with rows of values calculated at points on
a contour, choose Rows from the View menu or from
context (right mouse button) menu in the Table window.
The Table Rows dialog appears on the screen:
The dialog provides two alternative
ways to tabulate the contour. You
either use a fixed step between
contour points or fill the required
number of rows.
To use fixed step, enter the step
length in Tabulating Step.
If you mark
Always Include Segment Ends,
QuickField adds ends of all contour
segments to the table starting a new
step at every segment end. When you
enter a value in Tabulating Step,
QuickField shows the total number of
steps in Rows to Fill.
230 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

When you enter the number of rows in Rows to Fill,

QuickField interprets this value as either the required
number of rows in the whole table or the required number
of rows for every contour segment depending on the state of
the radio button (Total / Per Segment) below this field.
When QuickField tabulates the contour, it uses the data in
the dialog items you fill last.
You can combine automatic contour tabulation with manual
addition and removal of rows via the window’s context
menu.

Plots and Tables versus Time

QuickField provides several ways to analyze time-
dependent data. You can:
• Plot the field picture for any selected time moment.
• Plot various field quantities vs. time on the time plot.
• For any given point, display the table with its field
quantities versus time.
• Display the table with any quantity integrated over the
current contour versus time.
• Animate the field picture reflecting its changes vs. time
according to a suitable time scale.

Time Plot
For transient problems QuickField provides the means to
plot time-dependent field quantities versus time. You can
display both the plots of local field values at the given points
and the plots of the values integrated over the current
contour.
 Plots and Tables versus Time 231

Plots of local field values can simultaneously show the

curves for several field points. At the same time, such plots
can show the curves for several physical quantities with the
same measurement units. In cases when the measurement
units differ (as with temperature, its gradient, and the heat
flux), QuickField separates physical quantities into groups
with same measurement units and displays one group of
quantities at a time.
The plots of integrated values, on the other hand, always
display only one physical quantity, with graphs of vector
quantities represented as several curves displaying the
quantity's coordinate values and its absolute value.
To create a new time plot, choose Time Plot in the View or
context menu. The field value QuickField plots corresponds
to the last point you clicked. The clicks that count are those
inside the field picture window and those inside the
Calculator Window.
If the last click is in the Integral Calculator the time plot
displays the clicked integrated quantity. Such plots display
only one quantity at a time.
In other cases, the plot displays the local value at the clicked
point against time. If you did not click any point, or if the
last point you clicked cannot be associated with a field
value, QuickField displays an empty time plot window.
To display the curves related to different points on the same
time plot, click the points one by one invoking the
Time Plot command after every click. Or, to specify the
exact point coordinates, invoke the
View / Time Plot Curves command available from the
Time Plot window, enter the coordinates, and click Add.
232 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Alternately, you can invoke the Time Plot command via the
context menu of the Field Picture window and the
Time Plot Curves command via the context menu of the
Time Plot window. The context menu also provides the
way to easily switch the displayed time plot between
different groups of local values or move from local to
integrated values and back.
With time plot view, you can:
• Define the set of curves displayed for various groups of
physical values. To do it, choose Time Plot Curves
from the View or context menu.
• Zoom the plot in or out with toolbar buttons .
• View the legend showing the correspondence between
quantities and curves.
• Copy the picture to the clipboard with
Edit / Copy Picture or save it to a file with
File / Save As.

Time Plot Curves

A time plot window can display curves for several points. In
turn, for each point can have several curves for different
field quantities, combined into three families: temperature,
temperature gradient, and heat flux.
To add a new point, click the very first row in the list, type
coordinates in the boxes above and click the Add button.
When choosing a point in the list you can change its
coordinates and switch on and off associated curves.
 Plots and Tables versus Time 233

The Choose Quantity Family drop-down list at the bottom

allows you to switch the displayed curve family.
Alternatively, you can change the family via the context
menu of the time plot or the legend window.
The time plot window immediately reflects all changes in
the dialog.
To add a new point, click the very first row in the table, enter
the coordinates in the boxes above, and click Add. To
change the coordinates of the existing point select it in the
list and enter the new values. This way you can also switch
the curves associated with points on and off.

Time Dependencies Table

For transient problems QuickField provides the means to
display time-dependent field quantities in a table where the
rows correspond to different moments of time, and the
columns, depending on the current mode, either to local
field values at the given points or to the values integrated
over the current contour of the field window.
234 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

To open the time table window, choose Time Table in the

View or context menu of the field window.

The drop-down listbox in the upper left corner of the table

window allows one to toggle between local and integrated
quantities. The default mode of the window depends on
whether its contour is defined or not. If no contour exists,
the window displays local quantities (Local values mode).
Otherwise it displays the quantities integrated over the
current contour (Integrals mode).
In Local values you can change the coordinates of the point.
By default, both coordinates are 0. Having changed the
coordinates click OK to apply the changes.
In Time Table window you can:
• Copy the entire table or the selected rows to Windows
Clipboard. To do that, select the desired rows and choose
Copy (CTRL+C) in the Edit or context menu.
• Drag the selected rows to another application, like
Microsoft Excel.
• When all rows in a table are selected, the table header is
also included into copying and drag-n-drop operations.
To select all rows in the table choose Select All
(CTRL+A) in the Edit or context menu.
 Controlling the Legend Display 235

• Save the entire table in a text file. Choose

File / Save As.

Controlling the Legend Display

The legend for the color map shows the correspondence
between colors and numbers; for X-Y plot — between
curves and quantities.
To switch the legend display on or off, click Legend in the
View or context menu of the field picture or X-Y plot
window.

Trajectories of Charged Particles

Theoretical Background
Working on electrostatic problems you can calculate and
view trajectories of charged particles in electric field. To do
it, choose Particle Trajectory from View menu.
Trajectory calculation uses the following data:
• Calculated electrostatic field;
• Particle attributes: charge, mass, initial velocity or
energy; Initial velocity might point outside of the
calculation plane;
• Emitter attributes: coordinates (starting point of all beam
trajectories), limits for the angle between initial velocity
and horizontal axes, and the total number of trajectories
in the beam
Viewing calculation results, you see:
236 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

• Projections of beam trajectories on the calculation plane;

• Kinematical parameters in every trajectory point;
• Velocity;
• Acceleration;
• The path length and the time spent on the way to any
trajectory point.
Calculating trajectories QuickField uses following
assumptions:
• There are no relativistic effects;
• Electrostatic field inside any finite element is linear
relative to coordinates.
• The beam space charge field can be ignored in the
equations of motion (“infinitely small current”
approximation).
• Distinctive emitter physical features can be ignored, so
that all beam particles have the same starting point and
kinetic energy.
According to these assumptions, we can describe the
trajectory (x(t),y(t),z(t)) of a charged particle in two-
dimensional electrostatic field 𝐸̅ (𝑥, 𝑦) with Newton’s
system of differential equations:
𝜕2𝑥 𝑞
= ∙ 𝐸 (𝑥, 𝑦)
𝜕𝑡 2 𝑚 𝑥
𝜕2𝑦 𝑞
= ∙ 𝐸 (𝑥, 𝑦)
𝜕𝑡 2 𝑚 𝑦
𝜕2𝑧
{ 𝜕𝑡 2 = 0
 Trajectories of Charged Particles 237

We reorganize this system of three second degree equations

into six first-degree equations and append the following
additional equation:

𝑑𝑙 𝑑𝑥 2 𝑑𝑦 2 𝑑𝑧 2
√
= ( ) +( ) +( ) ,
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
defining the length l(t) of the trajectory covered by the
particle in time t. We integrate the resulting system using
the Runge-Kutta-Merson method with automatically
defined integration step. Numerical integration stops
immediately before the finite element’s boundary, the step
leading outside of the element being excluded. At the last
point in the element, we extrapolate the trajectory with
cubical segment of its Taylor series relative to time and
solve the resulting equation using Tartaglia-Cardano
formula and taking into account possible decrease of the
equation’s degree in homogeneous or zero fields.

Using Trajectories
Choosing Particle Trajectory from View menu opens the
modeless dialog window that allows changing beam
properties and viewing the calculation results on screen.
238 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

The property values entered into the dialog fields come into
effect when you click Apply button.
The Particle dialog page allows to choose particle type from
the list or define its charge and mass manually. It also
provides you with the possibility to define the initial
absolute value of the particle’s velocity or its initial kinetic
energy.
Next tab Emitter to specify parameters of monochromatic
point emitter.
 Trajectories of Charged Particles 239

The Number of Trajectories: field defines the total number

of trajectories in the beam. The more trajectories you ask
for, the longer will QuickField take to perform the
calculation.
The Source position fields define the coordinates of the
point emitter. You can either enter the coordinates manually
or click the required point inside the window showing the
field.
The Angle range fields define the limits for the angle
between initial velocity vector and the horizontal axis.
QuickField assumes that the angle between initial velocity
vector and the plane of the model is the same for all particles
in the beam.
Stop iteration when NNNN elements passed: the value
entered into this field limits the number of finite elements
the particle enters during its flight. This limitation helps to
avoid infinite loops for closed trajectories.
Whenever you click the Apply button or click anywhere in
the window showing the field, QuickField recalculates the
trajectories and updates the picture.
The Kinematic Values tab shows calculated kinematic
properties of moving particles. It shows the values related to
the trajectory highlighted on screen, the one closest to the
current cursor position. You can freeze highlighting of a
trajectory if you move the mouse cursor holding the SHIFT
key pressed.
The page shows the trajectory length and the total flight time
along with the particle’s velocity and acceleration at the
240 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

current trajectory point (marked with cross on screen). The

current point follows cursor position.

Export of Field Calculation Results

In addition to many possibilities of interactive analysis of
the field calculation results within QuickField package it is
also possible to perform their output for further analysis
with other programs.
For results output you can:
• Print field pictures, plots, tables, circuit schema and plot
legend;
• Copy to clipboard any window content;
• Drag by mouse selected lines from the table, field
calculator and electric circuit component list into other
application, e.g. word processor or spreadsheet;
• Save the table of the field distribution along the arbitrary
contour to the text file, or print it (see the Tables of the
physical parameter distribution along the contour);
 Export of Field Calculation Results 241

• Export the field distribution in the whole model area into

the binary or text file.

Printing the Postprocessor Pictures

You can directly print the field picture or X-Y plot to your
local or network printer, just as you see the model in the
window, with the same zooming and discretization
visibility.
• To print the picture, click Print in the File menu. You
will have an option to choose the printer and set up the
picture, such as paper size and orientation, before
printing will occur.
• To preview the output before printing, click
Print Preview in the File menu. To see how the picture
will appear on a printer of your choice, click Print Setup
before.

Copying the Postprocessor Pictures

You can copy the field picture or X-Y plot, as you see it in
the window, to clipboard, for subsequent including it to your
paper or report in any word-processing or desktop
publishing utility.
• To copy the picture, click Copy Picture in the Edit
menu.
• Switch to the application where you want to paste the
picture and click Paste in the Edit menu, or press
SHIFT+INS.
Most of QuickField graphical windows may be saved into
file as a vector or raster picture. Scale and content of the
image will be the same, as it is shown on screen. Both raster
242 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

and vector formats of picture presentation have their

advantages and drawbacks. Final choice between them
depends on the application, which will be used for
processing the pictures exported from QuickField.
Vector images may be saved to Windows Metafile format
(WMF) or Extended Windows Metafile (EMF), which is
newer and better compatible with the modern Windows
applications.
The list of supported raster formats includes BMP, GIF,
TIFF, JPEG and PNG. Select BMP for maximum picture
quality (without compression), GIF if you prefer the
minimum size, JPEG or PNG as a compromise between size
and quality, and TIFF for best compatibility with prepress
or publishing software.
For raster formats QuickField allows to define the height
and width of the resulting picture in pixels. Their default
value is agreed with the actual size of the copied window.
Increasing of the raster picture size requires more disk
space, but provides higher quality pictures for publishing.
To save the picture into the file:
1. Select Export Picture in the File menu of the
window with the picture displayed. File name
and format selection dialogue will be shown.
2. Select needed File Type from the list, and set
the name and location of the file in the File
Name field.
3. Click OK.
4. The Picture Properties dialogue will be
displayed if one of the raster formats is
 Export of Field Calculation Results 243

chosen. Here you may accept the default

picture size, or redefine it by setting other
height and width.

Field Export into File

In rare cases when QuickField does not provide necessary
means for the problem results analysis, or the calculation
results should be used as entry data for other application you
may export results into the file of text or binary format. This
option is controlled by the Field Export command of the
File menu.
Field Export Wizard window will display two output
methods to select one of them:
• Field parameters export in the nodes of the rectangular
mesh covering the entire calculation area or a part of it;
• Finite element mesh export along with the field values in
each node of triangular finite elements.
Export in rectangular grid nodes
This method allows you to control format and size of the
output file. The second page of the field export wizard sets
the grid sizes and steps on both abscises and ordinate axes,
and composes a list of physical parameters to be output in
every node of this grid. Optional file header string defines
the sizes of file parts. This simplifies reading this file from
other applications. Separate control affects the export
procedure behavior inside the holes in the calculation area.
Third page of the Export Wizard sets the output file options,
name and location.
244 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Export in finite element mesh nodes

If the programs that interact with QuickField are able to take
into account finite-element specifics then it is most effective
to put field parameters into output file along with the finite
element mesh. The output format is fixed.
Output file includes information about model geometry,
finite element mesh and calculated results. Full description
of the output file format generated by this method is
available in the Help.
An example of utility for importing QuickField output files
into MATLAB® is available from www.quickfield.com.

Additional Analysis Opportunities

Some useful tools for calculation and results analysis are
included in form of optional add-ins. More details about
add-ins connection and usage you may find in Add-ins

Field Distribution Along the Contour Harmonic

Analysis
Distribution of the physical parameters along the contour
may be explored by use of Fourier series analysis. This
assumes that the contour drawn in the results window
corresponds to the full or half period of the space
distribution.
Calculation results are amplitudes and phases of the space
distribution harmonics for any of physical parameters
available for specific QuickField problem type. Results may
be displayed as a table, spectral diagram or plot showing
 Additional Analysis Opportunities 245

initial curve and its approximation by selected number of

first harmonics.
Harmonic analysis add-in should be called by Harmonic
Analysis command from the View menu after the contour is
built in the field view window.
Further information about the harmonic analysis add-in is
available in the add-in help (activated by Help button).

Partial Capacitance Matrix Calculation for the System

of Conductors
In case the system consists of more than two conductors
then its mutual affect and behavior is described by the
matrix of the partial self- and mutual capacitances.
Charge of each conductor may be expressed through its own
potential and potentials of other conductors by the following
equations:
q1 = b11U1 + b12U2 + ... + b1nUn
q2 = b21U1 + b22U2 + ... + b2nUn
(1)
......
qn = bn1U1 + bn2U2 + ... + bnnUn,
where
q1, q2, … qn – conductor charges,
U1, U2, … Un – conductor potentials,
bij – electrostatic induction coefficients, or partial
capacitances relative to ground. They have dimension of
capacitance.
246 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

It is often required in practice to replace the conductor’s

system by their equivalent circuit, where each pair of
conductors is presented by the capacitors with specially
fitted capacitances. This form corresponds to the system of
equations (2) where the conductor charges are expressed
through the potential differences between the conductor and
other conductors, including earth:
q1 = c11(U1 - 0) + c12(U1 - U2) + ... + c1n(U1 - Un)
q2 = c21(U2 - U1) + c22(U2 - 0) + ... + c2n(U2 - Un)
(2)
......
qn = cn1(Un - U1) + cn2(Un - U2) + ... + cnn(Un - 0)
This form (2) is convenient because cij coefficients are
always positive and allow natural interpretation as
capacitances of the equivalent circuit. cii coefficient
corresponds to the contribution to the conductor charge
caused by its own potential, that is self-capacitance.
Coefficients cij where i and j are different correspond to the
part of the i-conductor charge caused by the potential
difference between this and j-conductor, which is equivalent
to the capacitance of the capacitor formed by electrodes i
and j. They are called partial capacitances.
Both matrices are symmetrical, i.e. cij = cji.
The method for calculation of the self- and mutual partial
capacitances of the conductor system is based on the
electrostatic field energy.
W = 1/2  (q1U1 + q2U2 + .... + qnUn)
(3)
 Additional Analysis Opportunities 247

Use equations (1) for exclusion of the conductor charges

from (3) by expressing them via potentials:
W = 1/2  (
U1  (b11U1 + b12U2 + ... + b1nUn) +
U2  (b21U1 + b22U2 + ... + b2nUn) +
........
Un  (bn1U1 + bn2U2 + ... + bnnUn) );
Coefficients bji may be found by following method. First of
all let us solve the series of n problems, where the test
potential (100 V) is applied to only one of conductors and
the rest of them are grounded (zero potential applied).
Electric field energy for these cases looks like:
Wi = ½  biiUi2.
Thereby own coefficients of the electrostatic induction
could be found.
Then for each pair of conductors (i, j) we should solve the
problem where the test potential is applied between them,
and all other conductors are grounded. Energy equation is
below:
Wij = bij  UiUj
There will be n(n - 1)/2 such problems total.
Thus, to find the matrix of electrostatic induction
coefficients bij in the system of n conductors it is sufficient
to solve n(n + 1)/2 problems. Each solution needs total
electric field energy calculation. Computation of partial
capacitances cij from induction coefficients bij is a simple
task.
248 Chapter 8 Analyzing Solution

Capacitance matrix calculation add-in could be started by

the command Capacitance Matrix from the Tools menu. If
the electrostatic problem were open in QuickField at the
moment then capacitance calculator window would be
displayed. Upper part of this window is shown here:

In the problem list on the left-hand side choose the problem

of interest. The conductor list (right) shows labels of edges
and vertices that can be considered as electrodes. Icons close
to each label show the geometrical nature of the electrode
(an edge or a vertex).
You could set or remove grounding from any of the
conductors by a mouse click in the Info column. Partial
capacitances are not calculated for grounded conductors
with zero potential.
Conductor may be excluded from the calculations by a
mouse click over the symbol to the left from the
corresponding label. Excluded conductors are not involved
in the capacitance matrix calculation, but unlike grounded
conductors, zero potential is not assigned to them.
When the conductor list is ready, click the Calculate button
and wait for results.
List of conductors shows the conductors with the numbers
assigned in the results window.
 Additional Analysis Opportunities 249

The energy calculation results for particular problems are

then displayed, first in single column, and then in the upper-
diagonal matrix form.
The matrix of electrostatic induction coefficient is shown
next, and then the matrix of Self and mutual partial
capacitances. Use the list of conductors (above) to find the
correspondence between the conductor number and its label.
Any text from the results window can be copied to the
clipboard (CTRL+C or the Copy command from the context
menu).
250

C H A P T E R 9

Working with 3D Problem

Introduction
This section includes detailed information about three-
dimensional analysis with QuickField. The workflow and
technique of working with 3D problems mostly relies on
knowledge of 2D analysis. If you feel yourself not quite
familiar with such things as material properties, boundary
conditions, field sources, geometric labels and spacing and
so on, we recommend first browse through Chapters 2, 3, 4
and 5 of this manual as well as videos, samples, papers and
other teaching material available online at
www.quickfield.com.
Workflow for 3D model definition and analysis in general
follows the same steps as in 2D. You should:
• Create the new QuickField problem, and assign the
model type 3D Extrusion or 3D Import.
• For the problem with model class 3D Extrusion describe
the geometry in familiar Model Editor – first in XY
plane, and when add the heights to all planar objects,
or
 Introduction 251

• For the problem with model class 3D Import – import the

geometry information from the STEP file (ISO 10303),
exported from almost any 3D CAD software.
• Build automatic or manually adjusted mesh of the
tetrahedral finite elements.
• Assign the text labels to all geometrical objects – bodies,
faces, edges and vertices.
• Define the physical properties, boundary conditions and
field sources for all labeled objects.
• Start automatic solution procedure.
• When solution is completed, 3D Postprocessor allows
selecting of the most impressive 3D field presentation,
getting local results and calculating integral parameters.
3D model comprises bodies with various physical properties
and surrounding space. Same as in 2D case, 3D model
should always be spatially confined: for open problems
(where no physical boundary exists) the artificial boundary
should be created at sufficient distance from the model
objects.

Creating 3D Model by Extrusion

3D model of the class 3D Extrusion is based on the 2D
sketch in XY plane. This sketch is same as usual geometry
model for plane-parallel QuickField problem. It may be
created in QuickField Model Editor. Any existing 2D plane-
parallel model may be used as a sketch for creation of 3D
extruded model.
QuickField converts planar XY sketch into 3D model by
extruding the planar objects along Z axis, using the attribute
“level”. Extrusion of the planar vertex creates the vertical
252 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

edge. Extrusion of the planar edge creates a flat or

cylindrical surface, which is orthogonal to XY plane.
Extrusion of the planar block creates 3D body shaped as a
generalized cylinder with generatrix orthogonal to the XY
plane.
Every object in 2D sketch – vertex, edge or block – may be
extruded several times, up or down on different levels, thus
creating a layered structure. Same as in 2D case, for each
3D object the label may be assigned. Labels are required for
every 3D body. For 3D surfaces, edges and vertices labels
are used only if the corresponding objects should have
boundary conditions (e.g. known electric potential) or field
sources (electric charges). The same label assigned to
different objects make them logically uniting– thus the
geometry model may become richer than simple layer-cake.

Creating 3D Model by Importing from CAD

In the problems with 3D Import model class 3D model is
imported from the STEP format file (ISO 10303 - the
Standard for the Exchange of Product Model Data), created
by the appropriate CAD program. In such problem the
geometry model has standard file name extension .m3d. In
the very beginning the model is empty until a geometry is
imported from a STEP file.
3D model processing starts from the QuickField problem
creation with geometry class 3D Import. As usual, the
problem setup requires choosing the geometry file name, in
this case with the extension .m3d. Double click over the file
name in the problem tree will open the model editor window
in its 3D view. The button Import STEP in the 3D model
 2D and 3D problems 253

editor toolbar should be clicked next. The STEP file (usually

with the extension .step or .stp) should be selected and the
button Open clicked then.
If required, the imported geometric objects may be
complemented by the background region. The background
region is often used to restrict the calculation space, set up
the boundary conditions etc. It is a rectangular box, oriented
on the coordinate axes. The box dimensions are
automatically chosen to include all the geometrical objects
with predefined gaps around. The gap is defined by the user
in percent from the maximal model size.

2D and 3D problems
The choice between plane-parallel, axisymmetric or 3D
formulation is performed by selecting the proper model
class in the QuickField problem properties.

2D problems
Majority of QuickField analysis types are formulated as 2D,
i.e. plane-parallel or axisymmetric approximations.
Plane-parallel problems
Plane-parallel y
approximation means that
the geometry, boundary model
x
conditions, field sources,
material properties and thus the calculated field depend on
X and Y coordinates, but do not depend on the coordinate Z.
254 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

r
Axisymmetric problems
Axisymmetric model
z
approximation means that
the geometry, boundary
conditions, field sources, material properties and thus the
calculated field depend of Z and R, but do not depend on the
angular coordinate θ.
It means that all the half cross-sections, which include the
rotational axis X and positioned on one side from it, are the
same (i.e. independent from the angular coordinate θ).
In the screen plane we work with upper half of the axial
cross section of the model

3D problems
QuickField is able to solve 3D Electrostatic, 3D DC
conduction and 3D Steady state heat transfer analyses only.
In 3D problems the model geometry, material properties,
field sources and/or boundary conditions may depend upon
all three spatial coordinates X, Y and Z.
In QuickField the 3D geometry is built by one of two ways:
• By extrusion objects from the flat XY geometry into Z
direction. Each planar object may be extruded for

model x

z
 Problem definition – adding 3D features 255

specified height several times, which allows making a

complicated multi layered 3D body.
This approach expands the familiar simple methods of 2D
model creation into 3D. However, this implies the
limitations.
• By importing 3D geometry from STEP file created by
virtually any CAD program. The imported geometry
may be complemented by a surrounding background
area – a rectangular box at given distance of the model
bounding box.
Regardless of how the three-dimensional geometry has been
created, the following steps will be assigning labels to
geometric objects and generating a 3D mesh. The mesh
density is controlled by assigning desired the spacing values
to vertices.

Problem definition – adding 3D features

Choice between 2D and 3D analysis is performed by
choosing the model class in the problem properties window.
For three-dimensional analysis the related classes are
3D Extrusion and 3D Import. If the class 3D Import is
assigned to an existent problem with another model class,
its geometry information will be lost.
In contrast, if the class 3D Extrusion is assigned to an
existing 2D problem, it will be automatically converted to
3D. In this case QuickField assigns to all blocks the same
pair of levels in Z direction, which is chosen equal to zero
and the problem axial length LZ.
256 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

In any case, the only action required for turning on 3D

features is choosing the option 3D Extrusion or 3D Import
in the Model class list of the problem properties window.

The 3D Extrusion and 3D Import options are only available

for electrostatic, DC conduction and steady state heat
transfer analyses.

Geometry model in the 3D subsystem

The QuickField Model Editor is used for defining the
problem geometry and creation of the finite-element mesh.
It is assumed that reader of this document has some
experience in 2D QuickField model creation: knows how to
add the vertices and edges, can assign the labels to
geometrical objects, and able to control the finite-element
mesh density using Spacing.
 Geometry model in the 3D subsystem 257

Creating 3D Model by Extrusion

Geometry model creation in QuickField 3D subsystem
(hereafter referred as 3D model) starts from the same actions
as in 2D, but comparing to 2D case, it is necessary to
perform following additional actions before starting the
solution process:
1. Model should be linked to corresponding 3D
problem. It is sufficient to have open 3D
problem which refers to this model. If there is
no such a problem – next steps are impossible.
2. Extrusion parameters should be prepared for
each extruded 2D object.
3. 3D model should be created by extrusion of
the 2D problem along the Z axis.
4. Text labels should be assigned to those of
created objects which need to have specific
physical properties.
3D extrusion parameters for 2D model objects
During the vertical extrusion the 2D model object – a block,
edge or vertex – converts to one or several objects of the 3D
model. Blocks transform into bodies, edges become vertical
faces, and vertices create vertical edges.
The 2D object which is subjected to extrusion we will call
the source. All horizontal sections of the 3D objects,
extruded from the same 2D source are the same, and their
projections to the 2D source plane coincide with this source.
In other words, 3D objects extruded from the same 2D
source are stacked on each other, and the boundary between
these objects is the same source shifted vertically. It is clear
258 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

that only parameters of this extrusion are the heights of

levels, where the horizontal boundaries between the 3D
extruded objects are located. When this height is defined we
will say that the corresponding height level is assigned to
the extrusion source.
Number of the 3D objects, extruded from the source, is
always less by 1 than number of levels assigned to this
source, because there is no empty vertical space between
neighboring 3D objects. Therefore at least 2 height levels
should be assigned to 2D objects to perform its 3D
extrusion.

Note: If some height level is assigned to 2D object of

positive dimension (block or edge) it is automatically
assigned to all 2D objects at its boundary. Dimension of
these boundary objects is always less than the dimension of
the original object.
For example, if the height level 10 is assigned to the edge,
then both vertices at its ends are also assigned the same
height level 10. If the block has the height level 0, then all
the boundary edges and nodes automatically have the height
level 0 assigned.
 Geometry model in the 3D subsystem 259

Pic. 3D extrusion parameters assignment example.

Changing of the extrusion parameters of 2D model objects
To change the extrusion parameters the geometry model
properties windows should be displayed on the screen. If it
is hidden, to make it visible you need to click by the left
mouse button at any place within the model window, and
then select Properties in the View menu.
To change the extrusion parameters for one or more objects,
you need to select them. In the model properties window the
group Selection will be displayed showing all the types of
selected objects (vertices, edges and/or blocks), as shown at
picture below. The group Levels will be added to the
properties of the selected objects of maximum dimension.
Group Levels includes heights of all levels, assigned to at
least one of the selected objects, and additional element Add
260 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

New Level. Levels are always arranged with the highest

value on top.

Pic. Selected block in the 2D model and 3D problem

properties window.
Three types of actions may be performed with the levels:
• Adding of a new level – new level height may be entered
in the right part of the Add New Level line. New value
may be selected from the list which includes all height
levels presented in the model at the moment, or entered
manually. As a result the new level is assigned to all
selected objects which did not have this level before.
• Change the existent level height – the current level
height may be replaced by a new value. New level may
be selected from the pop out list with all levels presented
in the model, or entered manually. As a result the level
height will be changed for all selected objects where this
level is already present. New level is not assigned to
 Geometry model in the 3D subsystem 261

other objects. If the new value is already assigned to

some of selected objects – the duplicate level will be
removed from their properties. For example if some
block has height levels 1, 2 and 3, then after changing the
level 2 to 3 the block properties will include levels 1 and
3.
Taking into account that the levels are also ranked from
high to low, the changed level may be put into other place
in the level list than the original level.
• Existent level removal – to remove the level the value
field should be emptied. As a result this level will be
assigned to none of selected objects.

Note: In some cases it is impossible to remove or change

the level because it is protected. This happens if the level is
assigned to the object of higher dimension. For example, if
the level was automatically assigned to the vertex after
being set for the edge or block which include this vertex,
than it may be removed or changed for this vertex only
together with the same action performed for the edge or
block.
This change is possible only for the object which has the
maximum dimension between all the neighbors (dimension
of the block is 2, edge is 1 and vertex is 0). In this case the
change is automatically transferred to its entire boundary.
For example, if the level was assigned to the edge and was
automatically spread out to its end vertices, then it may be
changed only for the edge, but this change will be
automatically spread to its vertices.
262 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

Switching to 3D View
After the height levels are set, the extrusion may be
performed by choosing a command 3D in the View menu,
or by pressing the button (Toggle 2D/3D in the model
editor toolbar.
For successful extrusion following conditions should be
met:
a. At least one block of the 2D model should
have the finite-element mesh and two or more
height levels assigned.
b. None of 2D model meshed blocks should have
one height level assigned.
If either of these conditions is not met, error message is
displayed, and if it was caused by “b” then the blocks where
the condition does not work are highlighted. In case of
success the bodies extruded from the blocks which satisfy
“a”, and lower dimension objects at their boundaries are
displayed in 3D.

Creating 3D Model by Importing

In the problems with 3D Import model class the 3D model
is imported from the STEP format file (ISO 10303 - the
Standard for the Exchange of Product Model Data), created
by the appropriate CAD program. QuickField 3D geometry
import has some limitations. Imported geometry model
should include only one body. If the STEP file contains
several bodies, only the first one will be imported.
3D model processing starts from the QuickField problem
creation with geometry class 3D Import. As usual, the
problem setup requires choosing the geometry file name, in
 Geometry model in the 3D subsystem 263

this case with the extension .m3d. Double click on the file
name in the problem tree will open the model editor window
in its 3D view. The button Import STEP in the 3D model
editor toolbar should be clicked next. The STEP file (usually
with the extension .step or .stp) should be selected and the
button Open clicked then.
Background Region
If required, the imported geometry entities may be
complemented by the background region.
The background region represents the rectangular box,
oriented on the coordinate axes. The background region
dimensions are automatically chosen to include all the
geometrical objects with the predefined gaps around. The
gap is defined by the user in percent from the maximal
model size.

The Background region related controls are grouped in the

corresponding section of the geometry model properties
window. Background region may be turned on and off, and
the gap may be defined as some percent of the model size.
Default gap is 50%.
264 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

If the background region is turned on, it has all properties of

the geometric object. Internal cavity of the background
region may be assigned a label, e.g. “air”. The faces and
edges may also be labelled for the following boundary
condition assigning. The background region curtains other
model objects, and it is reasonable to make it transparent or
hidden using the context menu.
Adding vertices to 3D model
It is possible to add vertices to the imported 3D model.
When the Insert mode is turned on the cursor changes its
shape to crosshair.
If the Insert mode is on, and the cursor is over the
highlighted face or highlighted edge, new vertices are
created by clicking the left mouse button. List of all new
vertices is displayed in the Extra Geometry section of the
Properties window. It is possible to remove any new vertex
by pressing the [X] button next to it, or change its
coordinates. Coordinates may be edited individually or as a
group, and finalized by pressing the ENTER key. The list in
the Extra Geometry shows the values entered by user, but
the actual vertex coordinates may be adjusted to keep the
vertex on the same face or edge where it was originally
created. Actual coordinates of extra vertices are displayed in
the Properties window in the Selection / Vertex/
Coordinates section when this vertex is selected.
 Geometry model in the 3D subsystem 265

Extra vertices are usually used to fine tune the mesh density
distribution. To achieve this the needed mesh step may be
assigned to the extra vertex. Extra vertex may also have a
label and a boundary condition or field source associated
with this label.

3D View of the Model Editor

With problems of the model class 3D Import the model
editor always shows 3D view. With problems of the model
class 3D extrusion one can freely switch between 2D and
3D views of the model editor by toggling the 3D command
in the View menu or by pressing the button Toggle 2D/3D
in the model editor toolbar.
Selected body

Selected vertex

Selected edge

Selected face

The 3D view of the model editor allows seeing 3D geometry

model, assigning labels to its entities: bodies, faces, edges
and vertices, setting desired mesh spacing in vertices,
generating and control the 3D finite element mesh.
266 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

Manipulation with 3D view

3D images are used in QuickField for the geometric model
3D view and for 3D problem results analysis. Same methods
are used for image manipulation in both cases.
To get the full information about 3D model geometry it is
possible to:
• Look at the model from any direction (rotation):
• Move the model along the screen surface (panning);
• Increase and decrease the model scale (zooming),
• Hide the parts of the model (hiding) to see the objects
behind. Also, some bodies may be displayed as
transparent.
• Cut the model by a plane with interactive control of the
position and visibility of the cutting plane.
• Select the model elements: bodies, faces, edges, vertices.
• Control of the density of 3D mesh, by assigning desired
mesh spacing.
3D view window interacts with the label list in the problem
properties window:
 Geometry model in the 3D subsystem 267

Body “column”

If the object (body, face, edge, vertex) label is selected in

the problem properties window, then all the respectively
labeled objects will be selected in the 3D view window. And
vice versa – selection of the object in the 3D view window
causes its highlighting in the problem properties window.
Majority of operations with 3D view is performed by the
mouse cursor movement while left or right mouse button is
pressed. For some actions one or more modifier keys should
be pressed on the keyboard before the mouse is moved.
Making the random transformations of the image in 3D view
may easily get you lost and lose control
over the model view. But it is always easy
to return to one of predefined views using
the camera control buttons on the toolbar.
System of the coordinate axes shown at
the bottom left corner of the model window rotates together
268 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

with the model and helps to understand the current model

orientation:

Image rotation, panning and zooming

Following actions provide the full information about 3D
models:
• Looking at the model components from different sides;
• Increasing and decreasing the zoom level;
• Hiding some parts of the model to see the parts behind
them.
Majority of these actions may be performed by moving the
mouse cursor while left or right mouse button is pressed. For
some actions one or more keyboard keys should be pressed
before moving the mouse.
We will call the mouse move left or right according to what
mouse button has been pressed during the move.
Table. 3D view window image control using the mouse
gestures

What Keybo Action Curs

button is ard or
pressed key shape
during presse
the move d

Left None Model rotation in the

direction of the mouse
cursor move. This allows
 Image rotation, panning and zooming 269

to look at the model from

different sides

Left SHIFT Model panning with

mouse cursor.

Left CTRL Model rotation relatively

to the axis orthogonal to
the screen plane

Left SHIFT + Model zoom level

CTRL increases or decreases
with mouse cursor going
up or down.

Right None Rectangular frame

(“rubber rectangle”) is
displayed on screen and
its size changes with the
mouse movement. When
the mouse button is
released, objects inside
the rectangle are selected
according to following
rules:
If the ending point is TO
THE LEFT from the
starting point then all
objects crossed by the
270 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

rectangle boundary are

INCLUDED into this
selection.
If the ending point is TO
THE RIGHT from the
starting point when all
the objects crossed by the
rectangle boundary are
EXCLUDED from this
selection.

Mouse movements listed above allow full control over the

zoom level and camera position relating the model. Besides
that, there are several fixed image settings which may be
switched on using the toolbar buttons.
Zoom in Zoom to fit Front view Top view Back view

Zoom out Axonometric view Right view Left view

Bottom view
In conclusion here is the list of all methods of the image
zoom control:
1. Mouse wheel rotation increases the zoom
level in front direction or decreases the level
with backward direction. Screen position of
the model point under the mouse cursor stays
intact.
2. After pressing the toolbar button Zoom in you
may click by the mouse in the model to
increase the zoom level twice, or by moving
 Image rotation, panning and zooming 271

the mouse with left button pressed you may

draw the rectangle on the screen, which will
be stretched to occupy the full window when
the mouse button is released.
3. Pressing the button Zoom out undoes the last
zoom increase. If there is nothing to undo the
zoom level will be decreased twice.
4. Button Zoom to fit sets the zoom level
necessary to fit the full model into the
window.
5. Mouse movement with the left button and
keys SHIFT+CTRL pressed increases the zoom
level if directed up, or decreases it if directed
down.
6. Keyboard commands:
CTRL + (keys Ctrl and plus) increases the zoom level
twice;
CTRL - (keys Ctrl and minus) decreases the zoom level
twice;
CTRL 0 (keys Ctrl and zero) scales the window to fit the
full model.

Object selection
3D geometric objects: bodies, faces, edges, vertices are
displayed in the 3D window. Each of objects may be in the
normal or selected state. Object selection is needed to
change its properties (assign the label etc.) or hide the object
to see what is hidden behind it.
272 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

Pic. Examples of geometric objects selection

Object selection may be performed by:
• Clicking over the object by the left mouse button. Object
is highlighted when the mouse cursor goes over it – this
helps to understand what will be selected by the mouse
click. First mouse click over the face selects this face.
Second mouse click over the same face selects the body
which contains this face. Next consecutive clicks over
the face switch the mode between face and body
selection. To select several objects the button CTRL
should be pressed during the mouse clicks. This cause
selection of the objects of the same dimension (faces or
bodies respectively).
 Image rotation, panning and zooming 273

• Mouse click over the object label in the problem tree –

this action selects all the objects of this dimension which
are labeled by this label.
• Group selection using the rubber rectangle. This action
requires the right mouse slide.
Selection from the left to Selection from the right
the right to the left

Hidden and Transparent Bodies

Sometimes it is necessary to hide some objects to see the
objects behind.
Command Hide from the View menu or context menu
(opens by the right mouse button click) hides the selected
object or group of objects. Commands Hide all and Hide all
but this are located in the same menus and perform the
actions according to their names. Commands Unhide and
Unhide all from the View menu or context menu make the
hidden objects visible again.
274 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

In 3D view the body obscuring other bodies can be not only

made hidden but also rendered transparently. To do that use
the Transparent command in context menu. To cancel
transparency of selected bodies use the Opaque command
in context menu.
Transparency does not provide an opportunity to select by
mouse click the body located behind a transparent body. To
do this, you need to hide the obscuring body or use a cutting
plane, making it invisible.

Cutting the Model by a Plane

It is possible to cut the model by a plane to visualize the
internal cavities of the model components, which are hidden
behind over objects.
 Image rotation, panning and zooming 275

To turn the cutting plane on or off click on the button Cut

by Plane in the model editor 3D view toolbar, or use the
command Cut by Plane in the View menu.
It is possible to control the position of the cutting plane by
the following methods:
• Dragging the cutting plane by the mouse along the plane
normal;
• Dragging normal vector to the cutting plane by the
mouse;
• Selecting one of the predefined plane normal
orientations along the coordinate axes in the context
menu;
• Inside out command of the context menu controls what
part of the cut model should be shown on the screen.
276 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

If some object cannot be viewed or selected behind the

cutting plane – the plane may be hidden temporarily using
the command Hide cutting plane in the context menu or in
the View menu.

Text label assignment to the 3D model objects

Text labels should be assigned to 3D objects after the 3D
model is created by the vertical extrusion.
To assign the label to some object (body, face, edge or
vertex) it should be selected in the 3D model window –
group Selected will appear in the properties window with
the current label of the selected object shown in the
corresponding subgroup (Bodies, Faces, Edges or
Vertices).

This label may be replaced by entering the new name or by

selecting it from the pull-down list which includes all label
names defined in this problem for the same dimension of
objects. Choosing the value (none) in the beginning of the
 Image rotation, panning and zooming 277

list removes the label from the selected object. Properties of

any defined label may be checked or edited by choosing this
label in the problem tree.
To assign one label to several geometrical objects, they
should be selected and the label name should be entered in
the subgroup of the group Selection which is related to
objects of this dimension.

Control of the Density of 3D Mesh

3D FEA mesh in QuickField is created automatically. Mesh
quality, number of elements and mesh density affect the
solution time, the accuracy and amount of memory required.
To achieve the balance between the accuracy and
complexity the trade-off is often involved. This may be
controlled by mesh density settings.
Similarly to 2D problems, mesh density control is
performed by assigning the desired mesh spacing to some of
the model vertices. The automatic mesh step for all those
vertices where the manual mesh spacing is not set will be
calculated basing on the given manual spacing.
278 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

To assign the manual mesh spacing it is required to select

the vertices by a mouse click, or by a rubber rectangle (see
3D objects selection), then in the model properties pane
select the value Manual in the field Spacing and enter in the
field Spacing value the mesh spacing in the current length
units.

3D Finite Element Mesh

Finite element analysis requires the whole model space to
be discretized into the closed non intersecting simple shapes
– finite elements. QuickField uses tetrahedrons of the first
order as finite elements for 3D analysis.
Dividing the model region into the finite elements, or
triangulation, is performed automatically. However,
advanced users may define the mesh spacing and visually
control the results. Importance of the mesh control is based
on the fact that the accuracy of the differential equations
solution by the finite element method, and cost of the
solution in terms of time and memory requirements are
heavily dependent on the mesh quality. Mesh density
control provides the optimal balance between the solution
accuracy and cost.
These are the stages of the triangulation process:
• Automatic calculation of the optimal mesh spacing in all
vertices where the manual steps are not set;
• Breaking the model edges into segments (1D
discretization);
• Breaking the model faces down to flat triangles (2D
discretization);
 Image rotation, panning and zooming 279

• Breaking the model bodies down to tetrahedrons (3D

discretization).
Do not show mesh Show volume mesh

Show spacing
on vertices

Show edge mesh Show face mesh

These four stages of the mesh generation provide the quality

discretization of the model calculation region with
controlled mesh density, and meshes of one, two and three
dimensions are fully consistent. Model editor toolbar
controls the parameters and visibility of the different
dimension meshes.
If the view control button for the mesh of some dimension
turns on visibility of the mesh which is not yet built, it will
be created automatically. Volume mesh is easier to view
using the model cut by plane.

In some cases it may be required to remove the finite

element meshes of all the dimensions. Command
Remove Mesh from the Edit menu allows it. If the solution
280 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

process is initiated for the problem where the mesh is not

yet built, mesh will be generated automatically.

Editing material properties and boundary conditions

In 3D problems the tree shows labels assigned to bodies,
faces, edges, vertices. To edit the data associated with a
label double click the label in the list.

Solving 3D problems
To obtain the problem solution, click the Solve button on
the toolbar, or choose Solve Problem in the Problem menu.
You may skip this action and directly proceed to the analysis
results by clicking Analyze Results on the toolbar or in the
Problem menu. If the problem has not been solved yet, or
its results are out of date, the solver will be invoked
automatically.

Result analysis
Problem solution in QuickField starts by choosing the
command Solve in the Problem menu, or by pressing the
button in the toolbar.
3D solution results may be presented in QuickField by
following methods:
• ways of the field picture display:
Different
• Color painting of the surfaces according to the value
of the chosen physical parameter,
• Geometry model presentation using the edges,
• Presenting the finite element mesh on the visible
surfaces,
 Result analysis 281

• Vector field plotting using scaled directed vectors,

• Scalar field plotting using small scattered color balls,
• Equipotential surfaces,
• Family of parallel slices, colored according to the
value of the chosen physical parameter,
• Cut plane, which may be interactively controlled,
• 2D picture of the field view in the cut plane,
• Plot of the chosen physical parameter along the selected
edge or edges.
• Local field values in the chosen point. Point may be
selected by mouse or by entering the coordinates.
• Integral parameters calculated across the volume of
selected bodies or along their external surface.

Calculation results window

Calculation results window is displayed after invoking the
command Field view in the menu Problem or after pressing
the button in the problem toolbar.
Calculation results window contains following elements:
• Field view window with coordinate system icon and
color scale;
• Upper toolbars: field view toolbar and camera toolbar.
• Field calculator panes (at the left): settings pane, local
values pane and integral calculator pane
Field calculator panes are designed for numerical data input
and output. In the beginning they are stacked at the left
border of the results window. Whole stack of panes or any
pane individually may be dragged by the mouse to any
place, docked to any border or left floating. Mouse click
282 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

over any of these three panes switches the calculation result

window into the corresponding mode:
• Field view browsing (mouse cursor looks like );
• Local values calculation for chosen point (mouse cursor
turns to );
• Integral values calculation across the selected bodies and
their external surfaces (cursor turns to ).
Besides this, the field view picture includes the 3D
coordinate system icon, which turns along with the camera
movement relating to the model and informs about the
current orientation, and color map which shows the field
parameter levels in physical units.

Pic. Calculation results window

Result presentation modes control

Menu View commands, often repeated by the toolbar icons,
control the results presentation.
 Result analysis 283

Upper group of commands switches the field calculator

panes, which are stacked at the left form the field picture.
There are three panes:
1. Settings pane;
2. Local values pane, and
3. Integral calculator pane
Group of panes in the middle part of menu turns the field
presentation modes on and off. Most of presentations may
be turned on and off independently to show the most
impressive field view on a screen. Field view window opens
two presentations at start: model geometry (shown with blue
edges) and colored surface on visible faces, where color
corresponds to the level of the physical parameter shown.
Majority of the presentations has control settings. The pane
Settings includes all control settings grouped according to
the presentation type.
284 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

Pic. Menu View commands which control the results

presentation
Group of commands in the lower part of the menu
controls the visibility of the separate bodies. It is often
required to hide unused parts of the model to make needed
parts visible.

Field view presentations

Calculated field view may be shown by different graphical
methods, called presentations. Each presentation has its
own control settings. Most presentations may be combined
on the same screen picture, besides few presentations which
are mutually exclusive.
Pressing the button in the field view toolbar turns the
corresponding presentation on and off. Alternatively it is
 Result analysis 285

possible to expand the tree, controlling the chosen

presentation, in the control settings and select Yes or This
only for the field Show.
List of 3D field view presentations includes:
Show geometry
Show Mesh
Colored surfaces
Vector plot
Scatter plot
Isosurface plot
Slice plot
Cut pane
In addition to 3D presentations, where are two presentations
for 2D windows:
2D section
1D XY plot along the chosen
edge(s)
To present the field clearly and informatively it is always
required to adjust the picture using rotation, moving or
scaling (see the Image control section) and hide the unused
or covering bodies (see the Object hiding section). These
actions, as well as selection of the geometrical objects in the
286 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

field view window are performed same way as in the 3D

view of the model editor.
Settings pane includes all control settings grouped
according to the presentation types.

Pic. Field view and settings pane: model geometry, colored

surfaces, vector plot, scatter plot and plane cut. Selected
presentations are shown by red circles in the settings pane
at the left.
Each presentation setting window includes one or more
fields. The fields are positioned within a vertical column,
each field takes one line. Field name is shown at the left,
value is displayed at the right. Depending on the type, the
value may be selected from the list, typed in or both.
 Result analysis 287

The first control parameter of all presentations is the field

Show which allows values Yes, No and This only. The last
value keeps only this presentation and removes all others
from the screen
Other parameters of each presentation are explained in the
corresponding sections below.
3D postprocessor legend
When the right mouse button is pressed over the 3D
Postprocessor legend, the context menu is displayed. It
allows automatic adjustment of the color range for the
physical parameter used for the color map display.
• The command Adjust range for Model is always active.
It resets the range settings calculated for all the active
bodies of the model (set on default)
• The command Adjust range for visible bodies is always
active. It calculates the range limits related to all visible
bodies. Body is considered visible when one of its faces
is visible. If all model bodies are visible then this
command is equivalent to previous one.
• The command Adjust range for Selection is active when
some bodies and/or faces are selected. The range is
calculated per all selected objects.
288 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

Geometry elements: edges and the finite element mesh

Model geometry presentation is turned on by default and
displays the edges of the original geometry model. To turn
the geometry on and off there is a button in the field view
toolbar. This presentation has no adjustment settings.

Finite Element Mesh presentation shows the finite element

mesh on the visible surfaces. Finite Element Mesh
command in the View menu or the field view toolbar button
turns this presentation on and off. It does not have
adjustment settings.
 Result analysis 289

Pic. “Finite Element Mesh” presentation

Colored surfaces
Colored surface presentation is turned on by default and
displays the distribution of the chosen physical parameter
on the visible surfaces as a color map, where every level of
the physical parameter value corresponds to some color.
Field view toolbar switches the colored surface
presentation on and off.
Colored surface settings include:
1. Selection of the scalar physical quantity from
the list. As a default parameter for electrostatic
problems the electric potential V is used, for
thermal problems – temperature T is used etc.
List of alternative parameters includes the
field potential, modules and coordinate
290 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

components of vectors, and media properties

(dielectric permeability etc.).
2. Minimum and maximum values of the
parameter for the legend adjustment. Default
range corresponds to the maximum and
minimum parameter values in the whole
calculation area.
3. Number of color grades, with 256 colors as a
default.
4. Whether the legend should be displayed or
not.

Pic. “Colored surface” presentation.

Vector plot
Vector plot shows the distribution of the vector quantity in
the 3D region. Calculation region is covered by invisible
uniform grid with specified step. Then in each node of this
 Result analysis 291

grid the vector is drawn as a directed straight segment

(arrow). Each arrow direction is agreed with the direction of
the chosen vector quantity, and the length corresponds to the
vector module in chosen scale. The Vectors command in the
View menu or the button in the field view toolbar turn the
vector plot on and off.

Note: Vector Plot presentation may require considerable

amount of computer resources (memory, processor time). It
is thus advisable to gradually increase the parameters, which
increase the load. Recommended presentation parameters
are in the list.

Pic. “Vector plot” presentation

Adjustment settings for the vector plot include:
1. List of vector physical quantities for selection.
2. Spatial step of the uniform grid, in each node
of which the arrow will be drawn. If none of
the three recommended values is good
enough, other values may be typed in.
292 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

3. Scale level, controlling the arrow length. It is

recommended to select one from several
values offered. However, on your own risk
you may type in any other value.
To better see the “Vector plot” presentation on screen, it is
recommended to turn off the “Color surface” presentation.
However, this is optional.
Scatter plot
Scatter plot is somewhat similar to the “Vector plot”, but
designed to visualize the spatial distribution of the scalar
quantity. Physical parameter value is shown by the color,
which paints the small balls shown in the finite element
mesh nodes. Scattered spheres command from the View
menu or the field view toolbar button turn the scatter plot
on and off.

Pic. “Scatter plot” presentation

 Result analysis 293

If the number of finite elements is high, then for the nodes

for scatter plot presentation are randomly selected with total
number not exceeding 10 000.
Scatter plot settings include:
1. Scalar physical quantity selection from the
list.
2. Sphere size. It is recommended to choose from
six predefined numbers, however other
numerical value may be entered.
3. Density factor, which controls the total
number of spheres. It is measured in percent
from the finite element mesh node number. It
is recommended to choose from six predefined
numbers; however other numerical value may
be entered. Setting the density to 100% does
not necessary mean that the ball number will
be equal to finite element node number,
because number of spheres cannot exceed 10
000.
4. Show or hide the color legend.
To make the “Scatter plot” more visible on the screen, it is
recommended to turn off the “Color surface” presentation.
Sometimes the combination of the scatter and vector plots is
the most informative presentation.
Isosurface plot
Isosurface plot presentation displays the surfaces of equal
potential. Surfaces could be monochromatic or color painted
according to the potential values. Each of surfaces will
always have a single color. The command Isosurface plot
294 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

from the View menu or the button from the field view
toolbar switches this presentation on or off.

Pic. “Isosurface plot” presentation

Selection of the physical quantity for isosurface plotting is
not provided – it is always potential U in the electric
problems, temperature Т in the thermal problems etc.
Isosurface plot settings include:
1. Whether the surfaces should be colored
according to potential values
2. Potential step ΔU between the neighboring
surfaces
3. In case the color surfaces selected – whether
the color legend should be shown as well.
Model cutting with a plane, 2D field view
Cut plane presentation cuts the model through by the
arbitrary positioned plane. After the cut is performed, the
 Result analysis 295

color surfaces will be shown from one side of the plane and
within the plane. Cut plane does not affect other
presentations (scatter plot, vector plot, isosurface plot etc.).
The command Cut by plane from the View menu or the
button from the field view toolbar turn the cut plane
presentation on and off.

Pic. “Cut plane” presentation

“Cut plane” presentation has following specific features
comparing to other presentations:
• When the presentation is turned on, interactive elements
emerge on screen. Semi-transparent plane with the
vector normal to it may be dragged to any direction by
the mouse with left button pressed. The plane may be
parallel dragged along the normal vector, and this vector
may be tilted or turned around the point of intersection
with the plane.
296 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

• “Cut plane” presentation should be combined with other

presentations – color surface and finite element mesh –
for producing informative picture on the screen.
Cut plane settings include:
1. Normal direction is possible to select from
the list whether is it along one of coordinate
axes X, Y or Z, or specify arbitrary orientation
by entering three coordinates nx, ny, nz of the
normal vector.
2. Distance to Origin specifies the distance from
the plane to the coordinate origin, if the normal
vector is parallel to one of coordinate axes, or
thee of coordinates px, py, pz set the position
of the arbitrary point in the plane. Plane
position is fully defined by the direction of the
normal vector and coordinates of any point
which belongs to this plane.
3. Clip setting controls the section which is
created by the cut plane. Its value could be No
clip, Smooth or Rough:

Pic Clip setting effect

4. Show plane settings with values Yes/No turn
the visibility of the plane and its normal vector
on and off. As a default the show plane is
 Result analysis 297

turned on. After the desired plane position is

achieved, it is convenient to turn the show
plane off, to return to usual mouse gestures
control over the presentation view.
5. Inside Out setting with values Yes/No selects
from what side from the cut plane the section
should be shown

Pic. Inside Out setting effect.

Field picture in the cut plane
When the cut plane presentation is selected, the field picture
in the in the section may be presented in 3D view, as it was
shown in the previous paragraph, or as a 2D view in separate
window. 2D field view in the cut plane window may be
turned on by pressing the button in the toolbar. This
button is active when the presentation “cut plane” is
selected.
2D field view window is similar to 3D view window. It
includes the toolbar, two panes of the field calculator
298 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

stacked at the left, and a field picture window with

coordinates and color legend.
Picture control principles for 2D window are the same as for
3D field view window. Image also consists from separately
turned on/off presentations – model geometry, finite
element mesh, colored surface and isolines plot (for the lines
of equal potential).

Pic. 2D field picture in the cut plane: geometry model,

colored surface and isolines.
Mouse gestures which control the field view are the same as
in 3D case with obvious exceptions: model cannot be
rotated, cut plane is always positioned in the screen plane.
Cut plane allows browsing the local field values similarly to
how it could be done in 3D window.
 Result analysis 299

The tab Integral calculator in the 2D window provides

calculation of the integral values over the whole planar
section, e.g. vector flux across the section. Surface integrals
are calculated over all the visible bodies cut by the section
plane.
Field distribution in the section plane may be also displayed
as a plot or table. Table and plot present the field along the
broken line contour consisting from one or more segments.
When the contour is ready, press one of the buttons in
the toolbar to activate the plot or table window. If the table
or plot window is already open, pressing the button 1D Plot
or 1D Table changes the window content accordingly to the
current contour.
Contour for plots and tables
Contour for making a plot or table of the field distribution is
a flat broken line, built from one or more segments.
To start creating a contour click the button on the toolbox.
The cursor will change its shape to a cross-hair. Click mouse
button to create the initial node and then drag the mouse till
the next node. Each left mouse click generates the new node.
Right mouse click makes the last node. If the last node
coincides with the first node, the contour will be closed
polygon.
After creating the last contour node, it turns to the mode
which allows dragging existent nodes by the mouse or
creation new nodes on the edges. To pull the node you need
to move the cursor to the node to change its color, and drag
the cursor with the right mouse button pressed. Doing the
same with the middle point of the contour will create a new
intermediate node.
300 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

When the mouse cursor is over the contour, right mouse

button click activates the context menu with contour editing
commands:
Two upper commands select one of the alternative contour
modes: adding new segments to the end of the broken line,
or dragging the existent nodes. Next two commands remove
the selected node or the whole contour.
• The contour is always directed, i.e. it is known which
nodes are first and last. Contour direction may be
changed using the Change Direction command.
• Translate Contour command allows dragging the
contour as a whole by the mouse.
Context menu commands for the contour manipulation are
also included into the Contour menu.
Multiple parallel cuts – slice plot
It is often useful to use not one, but multiple cut planes for
complete field analysis. Presentation “Slice plot” is
provided for such situations. Command Parallel Slices from
the View menu or the button in the field view toolbar
turns this presentation on and off.
 Result analysis 301

Pic. “Slice plot” presentation.

Similarly to cut plane, when the “Slice plot” presentation is
turned on, the interactive controls – plane and normal vector
– are displayed. Manipulating with these controls adjusts the
orientation of the cut slices family.
Selected physical quantity color map is shown on the
parallel slices. When the slice plot presentation is turned on,
color surfaces are automatically turned off to make the slices
visible.
Slice plot settings include:
1. Choose of the physical quantity to be
displayed as color maps on the slices. List of
available choices includes all scalar quantities.
2. Show or hide the color legend.
302 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

3. Distance between the slices. Recommended

values may be selected from the list, or
arbitrary number may be entered.
4. Show plane value which may be Yes or No
turns the visibility of the cut plane and normal
vector on and off.
5. Two groups of fields including Normal
direction and Distance to Origin control the
position of the cut planes same way as
corresponding settings of the cut plane
presentation.
Plots
Field parameters distribution along the selected model edges
or contour may be displayed in the plot. Plot window is
displayed by using the command 1D XY Plot in the View
menu or by pressing the button from the field view
toolbar.
The plot shows distribution of the selected physical quantity
along the selected edge or the sequence of edges. The plot
is automatically redrawn with the change of edge selection.
Sequence of edges for plotting should form the spatial
contiguous not self-crossing. The edge selection suitable for
plotting should form a contiguous line without self-crossing
segments. Beginning of this line may coincide with the end
– no other crossings are allowed.
Toolbar above the plot area includes:
 Result analysis 303

• Zoom buttons. To the left from the plot the legend

pane is shown, which may be dragged to any side of the
plot or left floating.
• The legend pane allows selection of the physical
parameter for plotting. Radio buttons provide the choice
between the parameter families, expandable set of the
flags turns on/off the specific parameter within the
family.
• This button returns to the field view which is
associated with this plot. If the plot is drawn along the
selected edges, the button activates the 3D field view
picture. If the plot is drawn along the flat contour, the
button activates the 2D section window, which includes
the contour.
• This button activates the table window, which includes
the distribution of the physical parameters along the
edges or contour.

Pic. XY-Plot of the electric field E along selected edges.

Right mouse button click activates the context menu.
304 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

Tables
Field parameter distribution along the selected edges or
contour may be presented not only on a graph, but also as a
table. Table window is activated by pressing the button in
the 3D field view toolbar (table along the selected edges) or
in the 2D section toolbar (table along the contour).
Table rows are related to the geometry model nodes, evenly
distributed along the contour or the selected edges group.
Table columns are the physical parameter values.
Table columns displayed may be modified by pressing the
button in the table toolbar or in the context menu using
the Table columns dialogue.

To specify the number of the table rows you need to press

the button in the toolbar, which displays the dialogue
window Table rows.
 Result analysis 305

Number of the rows in the table may be defined directly, or

by setting the desired space between the nodes in the model
length units measured along the contour. If the contour
consists from several segments, or there are several edges
selected, dialogue allows defining different steps for
different segments. All the segment ends are mandatory
included into the table.

Local field values calculation

Physical field quantities calculated in the specific point are
called local values.
It is required to switch on the Probing mode of the field
calculator to display the local values in chosen point. This
may be performed by pressing the button in the toolbar or
by selecting the pane Local Values in the stack of field
calculator panes, or by using the command Local Values
from the View menu. This will be indicated by the cursor
shape change to .
Every mouse click over the points at the model surface will
lead to refreshing the coordinates and field values in the
pane. Point coordinates for the local values calculation may
306 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

also be manually entered into the corresponding fields of the

local value pane.

In the upper part of the pane three fields X, Y and Z are

prepared for entering the probing point coordinates. These
fields are automatically refreshed when the mouse is clicked
within the model.

Integral calculation
In addition to the local field values QuickField can calculate
integral parameters, such as electric charge, mechanical
force and electric field energy.
Integration region for the volume integrals includes the
selected bodies, and for the surface integrals – the selected
faces or the planar section of the 3D model.
Integration area of the surface integrals, calculated over the
planar section includes the cross-sections of all the visible
bodies which were cut by the plane. Turning their visibility
on/off will control the integration area. Integration results
 Result analysis 307

are shown in the Integral Calculator tab of the 2D section

window.
In the electrostatic problems the following integrals may be
calculated:
• Total electric charge in a particular volume

𝑞 = ∮ 𝐃 ∙ 𝐝𝐬
𝑆
where integral is evaluated over the boundary of the
volume, and n denotes the vector of the outward unit
normal.
• Total electric force acting on bodies contained in a
particular volume

1
𝐅= ∮(𝐄(𝐧𝐃) + 𝐃(𝐧𝐄)– 𝐧(𝐄𝐃))𝑑𝑠,
2
𝑆
• Energy of electric field

w = 1/2 ∫ (𝐄 ⋅ 𝐃) 𝐝𝐯
𝑉
In the DC conduction problems the following integrals may
be calculated:
• Electric current through a particular surface

I = ∮ 𝐉 ∙ 𝐝𝐬
𝑆
308 Chapter 9 Working with 3D Problem

where integral is evaluated over the boundary of the

volume.
In the steady state heat transfer problems the following
integrals may be calculated:
• Heat flux through a particular surface

Ф = ∮ 𝜆 ∙ grad 𝑇 𝐝𝐬
𝑆
where integral is evaluated over the boundary of the
volume.
Integral calculation mode may be turned on by pressing the
button on the toolbar, or by selecting the pane Integral
Calculator from the field calculator dialog, or by using the
command Integral Values from the View menu. This mode
is indicated by the cursor shape.
All available by the moment integral values are calculated
by integration across the selected bodies (or their external
surfaces). All changes in this selection invoke automatic
calculation of the new integral values.
 309

C H A P T E R 1 0

Add-ins

Add-in is a supplemental program or component that

extends the capabilities of QuickField by adding custom
features, such as custom menu items, toolbar buttons etc.
To view the list of add-ins available on your computer:
1. On the Tools menu click Add-in Manager….
2. You will see the list of available add-ins. To
get more information about some add-in, select
it in the list. You will see its description in the
box below the list.
Add-ins can be switched on and off. You can switch an add-
in off if you do not plan to use it for some time. Switching
an add-in off does not remove it from your computer; you
can switch it on later.
310 Chapter 10 Add-ins

To switch add-ins on or off:

1. On the Tools menu click Add-in Manager….
2. To switch an add-in on, select the check box
next to its name.
3. To switch an add-in off, clear the check box
next to its name.
4. Click OK.

Add-ins Available in QuickField

The following add-ins are supplied with QuickField:
Insert Shape. A simple tool that allows adding common
shapes (rectangles, circles and ellipses) to your model.
LabelMover. A simple tool for parametric analysis. This
tool allows you to study how the problem solution depends
on changes of the model geometry or of the problem
physical properties.
Various types of analysis are provided: serial analysis,
tolerance analysis and optimization.
Harmonic Analysis. This add-in allows you to calculate
and view harmonics (that is, phases and amplitudes for
Fourier series) for any value for the current contour.
Capacitance Matrix. Automatically calculates the self- and
mutual capacitances for a system with multiple conductors
using a number of electrostatic analyses.
 Advanced Add-in Features 311

Advanced Add-in Features

Adding, Editing and Deleting Add-ins
There are some more advanced operations that you can do
using Add-in Manager dialog box.
• You can register your own program or component as an
add-in. To do it, click Add and use the Add-in
Properties dialog box to specify the properties.
• You can change properties for an add-in, menu text,
shortcut, toolbar icon etc. To do it, select an add-in, click
Edit and use the Add-in Properties dialog box to
change some properties.
• You can remove an add-in from the list of or available
add-ins. To do it, select an add-in and click Delete.
Removing add-in from the list does not delete the add-in
file from your disk.
These features are typically used only when you create your
own add-ins. If you deal with standard QuickField add-ins
only, you will not have to use these features.

Creating Your Own Add-ins

You can easily create your own add-ins, using Visual Basic
or any other programming product that supports COM (C#,
Visual C++, Delphi etc.).
With such add-ins, you can automate some of your tedious
repeating tasks and make your interaction with QuickField
more effective and convenient.
For more information about writing your own add-ins, see
Creating Add-ins in ActiveField help.
312 Chapter 10 Add-ins

Add-in Properties Dialog Box

In this dialog you can specify the following fields:
General Properties
Type. Choose one of two variants: Simple COM Add-In or
EXE Add-In. If Simple COM Add-In is selected, add-in will
be called from QuickField using COM. So, this add-in
should be a COM server. If EXE Add-In is selected, you can
use any EXE file as an add-in. QuickField start this EXE file
each time you click the corresponding menu item.
Name of the COM object for the add-in or Command
line to call the add-in. Specify the object name for COM
add-in here. For EXE add-in, specify the command line to
invoke the add-in. Typically, it is the full path to the add-in
*.exe file.

Menu items attached to this add-in. This box contains the

list of menu items attached to the add-in. Typically, one
menu item is attached to every add-in. However, for more
advanced add-ins, you can associate several menu items
with one add-in.
 Advanced Add-in Features 313

• To add a menu item, click Add Item.

• To delete a menu item, click Delete.
• To change menu item properties, click Edit.
Description Properties
Friendly name. It is recommended to specify a readable
name here for add-in.
Description. It is recommended to provide detailed
description of the add-in here.

Add-in Menu Item Dialog Box

In this dialog you can specify the following fields:

Menu should be available. Choose one of the following
options:
• Always - menu item will be always available.
• In model editor - menu item will be available for model
editor only.
• In postprocessor - menu item will be available for
postprocessor only (that is, when we are viewing results
only).
314 Chapter 10 Add-ins

Menu text. Specify text for menu item here.

Menu. You can choose the menu this item will be added to.
Status line. In this field you can describe what this item
does. This description will be shown in a status line for the
item.
Show in popup menu. If this check box is selected, the
menu item will also be added to context (right mouse
button) menu.
Show in toolbar as icon. If this check box is selected, the
menu item will also be available from the toolbar. You can
choose icon for the toolbar button from the drop-down list
next to the check box.
Press a shortcut key. You can set a shortcut for the menu
item using this field.
 315

C H A P T E R 1 1

Theoretical Description

The objective of this chapter is to outline the theories on

which the QuickField finite element analysis system is
based. The chapter contains underlying mathematical
equations, and considers various physical conditions and the
ways how they are implemented in QuickField.
QuickField solves two-dimensional (2D) boundary value
problems for elliptic partial differential equation for either
scalar or one-component vector potential. It also solves 2D
solid stress analysis problems (plane stress, plane strain,
axisymmetric stress). There are three main classes of 2D
problems: plane, plane-parallel and axisymmetric. Plane
problems usually arise when describing heat transfer
processes in thin plates. They are solved in planar
rectangular coordinate system. Plane-parallel problems use
right-handed Cartesian coordinate system xyz. It is assumed
that neither geometric shape and properties of material nor
field sources vary in z-direction. The problem is described,
solved and the results are analyzed in xy-plane, which we
will call the plane of model. Axisymmetric problems are
formulated in cylindrical coordinate system zr. The order
of axes is chosen for conformity with the plane-parallel
case. Physical properties and field sources are assumed to
not depend on the angle coordinate. All operations with the
model are done in zr-plane (more precise in a half plane
316 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

r  0). Z-axis is assumed to be horizontal and directed to the

right, r-axis is directed up.
The geometric configuration of the problem is defined as a
set of curved polygonal subregions in the plane of model.
Each region corresponds to a domain with a particular set of
physical properties. We will use term blocks for polygonal
subregions, term edges for line segments and circular arcs
that constitute their boundaries and term vertices for ends of
edges and for isolated points. Those edges that separate
whole problem region from other part of the plane, where
no field is calculated, constitutes the outward boundary of
the region. Other edges constitute inner boundaries.
Below you can find detailed mathematical formulations for
dc, ac and transient magnetic, electrostatic, dc and ac
conduction, steady state and transient heat transfer, and
stress analysis problems.

Magnetostatics
QuickField can solve both linear and nonlinear magnetic
problems. Magnetic field may be induced by the
concentrated or distributed currents, permanent magnets or
external magnetic fields.
The magnetic problem is formulated as the Poisson's
equation for vector magnetic potential A (B = curl A, B⎯
magnetic flux density vector). The flux density is assumed
to lie in the plane of model (xy or zr), while the vector of
electric current density j and the vector potential A are
orthogonal to it. Only jz and Az in planar or j and A in
 Magnetostatics 317

axisymmetric case are not equal to zero. We will denote

them simply j and A. The equation for planar case is
𝜕 1 𝜕𝐴 𝜕 1 𝜕𝐴 𝜕𝐻𝑐𝑦 𝜕𝐻𝑐𝑥
( )+ ( ) = −𝑗 + ( − );
𝜕𝑥 𝜇𝑦 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜇𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦
and for axisymmetric case is
𝜕 1 𝜕(𝑟𝐴) 𝜕 1 𝜕𝐴 𝜕𝐻𝑐𝑟 𝜕𝐻𝑐𝑧
( )+ ( ) = −𝑗 + ( − ).
𝜕𝑟 𝑟𝜇𝑧 𝜕𝑟 𝜕𝑧 𝜇𝑟 𝜕𝑧 𝜕𝑧 𝜕𝑟
where components of magnetic permeability tensor x and
y (z and r), components of coercive force vector Hcx and
Hcy (Hcz and Hcr), and current density j are constants within
each block of the model.

Note. Isotropic (x = y or z = r) but field dependent

permeability is assumed in nonlinear case. Magnetization
characteristic of material is described by the B-H curve.

Field Sources
The field sources can be specified in blocks, at the edges or
at the individual vertices of the model. Possible field sources
include space, surface and linear electric currents and
permanent magnets. The coercive force is chosen to be
primary characteristic for the permanent magnets.
A point source in the xy-plane describes a linear current in
out-of-plane direction. In axisymmetric case the point
source represents the current in a thin ring around the axis
of symmetry. Edge-bound source in the plane of model
represents a surface current in three-dimensional world. It is
specified by the Neumann boundary condition for the edge.
The space current is described either by the electric current
318 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

density or total number of ampere-turns associated with the

block density associated with the block. Current density in
a coil can be obtained from the equation
j = n · I / S,
where n is a number of turns, I is a total current, and S is a
cross-sectional area of the coil.
Several blocks with the same number of ampere-turns
specified can be considered as connected in series. In that
case current density in each block would be calculated as
common total ampere-turns divided by the square of the
block.
In axisymmetric case if total number of ampere-turns is
specified resulting current density could be described as
varies as ~(1/r), where r is a radius coordinate of the point.
This approach allows simulate massive spiral coils.

Boundary Conditions
The following boundary conditions can be specified at
outward and inner boundaries of the region.
Dirichlet condition specifies a known value of vector
magnetic potential A0 at the vertex or at the edge of the
model. This boundary condition defines normal component
of the flux density vector. It is often used to specify
vanishing value of this component, for example at the axis
of symmetry or at the distant boundary. QuickField also
supports the Dirichlet condition with a function of
coordinates. This approach allows you to model a uniform
external field by specifying non-zero normal component of
the flux density at arbitrary straight boundary segment.
 Magnetostatics 319

Note. For problem to be defined correctly the Dirichlet

condition has to be specified at least at one point. If the
region consists of two or more disjoint subregions, the
Dirichlet conditions have to be specified at least at one point
of the each part. Zero Dirichlet condition is defaulted at the
axis of rotation for the axisymmetric problems.

Neumann condition has the following form

Ht = σ ⎯ at outward boundaries,
H t+ - H t- = σ ⎯ at inner boundaries,
where Ht is a tangent component of magnetic field intensity,
"+" and "−" superscripts denote quantities to the left and to
the right side of the boundary and σ is a linear density of the
surface current. If σ value is zero, the boundary condition is
called homogeneous. This kind of boundary condition is
often used at an outward boundary of the region that is
formed by the plane of magnetic antisymmetry of the
problem (opposite sources in symmetrical geometry). The
homogeneous Neumann condition is the natural one, it is
assumed by default at all outward boundary parts where no
explicit boundary condition is specified.

Note. Zero Dirichlet condition is defaulted at the axis of

rotation for the axisymmetric problems.

If the surface electric current is to be specified at the plane

of problem symmetry and this plane forms the outward
boundary of the region, the current density has to be halved.
Zero flux boundary condition is used to describe
superconducting materials that are not penetrated by the
320 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

magnetic field. Vector magnetic potential is a constant

within such superconducting body (rA = const in
axisymmetric case), therefore superconductor's interior can
be excluded from the consideration and the constant
potential condition can be associated with its surface.

Note. If the surface of a superconductor has common points

with any Dirichlet edge, the whole surface has to be
described by the Dirichlet condition with an appropriate
potential value.

Permanent Magnets
Since the coercive force is considered in QuickField to be
the piecewise constant function, its contribution to the
equation is equivalent to surface currents which flow along
the surface of the permanent magnet in direction orthogonal
to the model plane. The density of such effective current is
equal to jump of the tangent component of the coercive force
across the magnet boundary. For example, rectangular
magnet with the coercive force Hc directed along x-axis can
be replaced by two oppositely directed currents at its upper
and lower surfaces. The current density at the upper edge is
numerically equal to Hc, and −Hc at the lower edge.
Therefore, the permanent magnet can be specified by either
coercive force or Neumann boundary conditions at its edges.
You can choose more convenient and obvious way in each
particular case.
Permanent magnet with nonlinear magnetic properties
needs some special consideration. Magnetic permeability is
assumed to be defined by the following equation:
 Magnetostatics 321

𝐵
𝐵 = (𝐵) · (𝐻 + 𝐻𝑐 ); (𝐵) =
𝐻 + 𝐻𝑐
It must be pointed out that (B) dependence is different from
the analogous curve for the same material but without
permanent magnetism. If the real characteristic for the
magnet is not available for you, it is possible to use row
material curve as an approximation. If you use such
approximation and magnetic field value inside magnet is
much smaller than its coercive force, it is recommended to
replace the coercive force by the following effective value
1
𝐻𝑐′ = 𝐵
𝜇(𝐵𝑟 ) 𝑟
where Br is remanent induction.

Calculated Physical Quantities

For magnetostatic problems the QuickField postprocessor
calculates the following set of local and integral physical
quantities.
Local quantities:
• Vector magnetic potential A (flux function rA in
axisymmetric case);
• Vector of the magnetic flux density B = curl A
𝜕𝐴
𝐵𝑥 = , 𝐵𝑦
𝜕𝑦
⎯ for planar case;
𝜕𝐴
=−
𝜕𝑥
322 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

1 𝜕(𝑟𝐴)
𝐵𝑧 =∙ , 𝐵𝑟 ⎯ for
𝑟 𝜕𝑟
𝜕𝐴 axisymmetric
=− case;
𝜕𝑧
• Vector of magnetic field intensity
1
𝐇 = 𝐁,
𝜇
where  is the magnetic permeability tensor.
Integral quantities:
• Total magnetic force acting on bodies contained in a
particular volume

1
𝐅= ∮ (𝐇(𝐧𝐁) + 𝐁(𝐧𝐇)– 𝐧(𝐇𝐁))𝑑𝑠,
2
𝑆
where integral is evaluated over the boundary of the
volume, and n denotes the vector of the outward unit
normal.
• Total torque of magnetic forces acting on
bodies contained in a particular volume

1
𝐓= ∮ ([𝐫 × 𝐇](𝐧𝐁)
2
𝑆
+ [𝐫 × 𝐁](𝐧𝐇) – [𝐫 × 𝐧](𝐇𝐁))𝑑𝑠,
where r is a radius vector of the point of integration.
The torque vector is parallel to z-axis in the planar case,
and is identically equal to zero in the axisymmetric one.
The torque is considered relative to the origin of the
 Magnetostatics 323

coordinate system. The torque relative to any other

arbitrary point can be obtained by adding extra term of
F  r0, where F is the total force and r0 is the radius vector
of the point.
• Magnetic field energy

1 ⎯ linear
𝑊= ∫ (𝐇 · 𝐁)𝑑𝑣
2 case;
𝑉
𝐵
⎯ nonlinear
𝑊 = ∫ (∫ 𝐻(𝐵′)𝑑𝐵′) 𝑑𝑣
case.
0

• Flux linkage per one turn of the coil

∮ 𝐴𝑑𝑠 ⎯ for planar
Ψ = case;
𝑆
2𝜋 ∮(𝑟𝐴)𝑑𝑠 ⎯ for
Ψ = axisymmetric
𝑆
case.
the integral has to be evaluated over the cross section of
the coil, and S is the area of the cross section.
For planar problems all integral quantities are considered
per unit length in z-direction.
The domain of integration is specified in the plane of the
model as a closed contour consisting of line segments and
circular arcs.
324 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

Inductance Calculation
To get self inductance of a coil, leave the current on in this
coil only and make sure that all other currents are turned off.
After solving the problem go to the Postprocessor and obtain
flux linkage for the contour coinciding with the cross section
of the coil. Once you’ve done that, the inductance of the coil
can be obtained from the following equation:
𝑛Ψ
𝐿= ,
𝐼
where n is a number of turns in the coil,  is a flux linkage,
j is a current per one turn of the coil.
Mutual inductance between two coils can be obtained in a
similar way. The only difference from the previous case is
that electric current has to be turned on in one coil, and the
flux linkage has to be evaluated over the cross section of
another.
𝑛2 Ψ2
𝐿12 = ,
𝐼1
In plane-parallel case every coil has to be represented by at
least two conductors with equal but opposite currents. In
some cases both conductors are modeled, in other cases only
one of two conductors is included in the model and the rest
is replaced by the boundary condition A = 0 at the plane of
symmetry. If the magnetic system is symmetric, the
inductance can be obtained based on the flux linkage for one
of the conductors only. The result has to be then multiplied
by a factor of two to account for the second conductor. If the
model is not symmetric, then the total inductance can be
obtained by adding up the analogous terms for each
 Transient Magnetics 325

conductor. Note that the current should be turned on in all

conductors corresponding to one coil.
In plane-parallel case the inductance is calculated per unit
length in z-direction.

Transient Magnetics
Transient magnetic analysis is the generalized form of
computation of electric and magnetic field, induced by
direct or time-varying currents (alternating, impulse, etc.),
permanent magnets, or external magnetic fields, in linear or
nonlinear (ferromagnetic) media, and takes into account
eddy current (skin) effect in conductors of electric current.
The formulation is derived from Maxwell's equations for
vector magnetic potential A (B = curl A) and scalar electric
potential U (E = -grad U):
𝟏
𝐜𝐮𝐫𝐥 𝐜𝐮𝐫𝐥 𝐀 = 𝐣 + 𝐜𝐮𝐫𝐥 𝐇𝒄 ,
𝜇
𝜕𝐀
𝐣 = σ𝐄 = −σ − σ ∙ 𝐠𝐫𝐚𝐝𝑈
𝜕𝑡
where 1/μ is an inverse permeability tensor, and g is electric
conductivity. In accordance with the second equation,
vector j of the total current in a conductor can be considered
as a combination of a source current produced by the
external voltage and an eddy current induced by the time-
varying magnetic field
𝐣 = 𝐣0 + 𝐣eddy ,
where
𝐣0 = − σ ∙ 𝐠𝐫𝐚𝐝𝑈,
326 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

𝜕𝐀
𝐣eddy = −σ
.
𝜕𝑡
If a field simulation is coupled with an electric circuit, the
branch equation for a conductor is:

𝑈 𝜕𝐀
𝐼= −σ∫ 𝑑𝑠
𝑅 𝜕𝑡
Ω
where U is the voltage difference between the two terminals
of the solid conductor, and R is the DC resistance of the
conductor.
The flux density is assumed to lie in the plane of model (xy
or zr), while the vector of electric current density j and the
vector potential A are orthogonal to it. Only jz and Az in
planar or j and A in axisymmetric case are not equal to
zero. We will denote them simply j and A. Finally, the
equation for planar case is
𝜕 1 𝜕𝐴 𝜕 1 𝜕𝐴 𝜕𝐀
( )+ ( )−σ
𝜕𝑥 𝜇𝑦 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜇𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑡
𝜕𝐻𝑐𝑦 𝜕𝐻𝑐𝑥
= −𝑗0 + ( − );
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦
and for axisymmetric case is
𝜕 1 𝜕(𝑟𝐴) 𝜕 1 𝜕𝐴 𝜕𝐀
( )+ ( )−σ
𝜕𝑟 𝑟𝜇𝑧 𝜕𝑟 𝜕𝑧 𝜇𝑟 𝜕𝑧 𝜕𝑡
𝜕𝐻𝑐𝑟 𝜕𝐻𝑐𝑧
= −𝑗0 + ( − ),
𝜕𝑧 𝜕𝑟
where components of magnetic permeability tensor x and
y (z and r), components of coercive force vector Hcx and
Hcy (Hcz and Hcr) are constants within each block of the
 Transient Magnetics 327

model. Source current density j0 is assumed to be constant

within each model block in planar case and vary as 1/r in
axisymmetric case.

Note. Isotropic (x = y or z = r) but field dependent

permeability is assumed in nonlinear case. Magnetization
characteristic of material is described by the B-H curve.

In time domain, the problem is solved within a given time

interval, starting with time t0 = 0, and initial field
distribution is considered to be zero in the whole region, or
can be imported from another problem (magnetostatics or
transient).

Field Sources
The field sources can be specified in blocks, at the edges or
at the individual vertices of the model. Possible field sources
include space, surface and linear electric currents; voltages
applied to conductive areas; and permanent magnets. The
coercive force is chosen to be primary characteristic for the
permanent magnets.
A point source in the xy-plane describes a linear current in
out-of-plane direction. In axisymmetric case the point
source represents the current in a thin ring around the axis
of symmetry. Edge-bound source in the plane of model
represents a surface current in three-dimensional world. It is
specified by the Neumann boundary condition for the edge.
The space-distributed current is defined differently in areas,
where the eddy current effect is considered (non-zero
conductivity is specified) or not considered (conductivity is
set to zero). In latter case, the space current is described
328 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

either by the electric current density or total number of

ampere-turns associated with the block density associated
with the block. Current density in a coil can be obtained
from the equation
j = n · I / S,
where n is a number of turns, I is a total current, and S is a
cross-sectional area of the coil.
Several blocks with the same number of ampere-turns
specified can be considered as connected in series. In that
case current density in each block would be calculated as
common total ampere-turns divided by the square of the
block.
In axisymmetric case if total number of ampere-turns is
specified resulting current density could be described as
varies as 1/r, where r is a radius coordinate of the point. This
approach allows simulate massive spiral coils.
In a massive conductor, you specify a voltage applied to the
conductor. In planar problems, voltage drop is specified per
unit depth of the model, and in axisymmetric case voltage is
assumed per one turn around the axis of symmetry. Nonzero
voltage applied to a conductor in axisymmetric problem
means that the conductor has a radial cut, and the voltage is
applied to sides of the cut. In practice this option could be
used to describe known voltage applied to massive spiral
wiring, in which case the total voltage drop for the coil
should be divided by number of turns in the coil. Zero
voltage means that the conductor’s ends are short circuit.
Any voltage or current sources, specified for a massive
(solid) conductor, are ignored when the electric circuit is
 Transient Magnetics 329

present. In this case, you can specify time-dependent

voltage and current sources while editing the circuit.
Voltage, current, or the current density can be specified as
arbitrary function of time. This allows you to perform
analysis of any possible type of time-varying sources –
periodic or not.

Boundary Conditions
The following boundary conditions can be specified at
outward and inner boundaries of the region.
Dirichlet condition specifies a known value of vector
magnetic potential A0 at the vertex or at the edge of the
model. This boundary condition defines normal component
of the flux density vector. It is often used to specify
vanishing value of this component, for example at the axis
of symmetry or at the distant boundary. QuickField also
supports the Dirichlet condition with a function of
coordinates. This approach allows you to model a uniform
external field by specifying non-zero normal component of
the flux density at arbitrary straight boundary segment.

Note. For problem to be defined correctly the Dirichlet

condition has to be specified at least at one point. If the
region consists of two or more disjoint subregions, the
Dirichlet conditions have to be specified at least at one point
of the each part. Zero Dirichlet condition is defaulted at the
axis of rotation for the axisymmetric problems.

Neumann condition has the following form

Ht = σ ⎯ at outward boundaries,
330 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

H t+ - H t- = σ ⎯ at inner boundaries,
where Ht is a tangent component of magnetic field intensity,
"+" and "−" superscripts denote quantities to the left and to
the right side of the boundary and σ is a linear density of the
surface current. If  value is zero, the boundary condition is
called homogeneous. This kind of boundary condition is
often used at an outward boundary of the region that is
formed by the plane of magnetic antisymmetry of the
problem (opposite sources in symmetrical geometry). The
homogeneous Neumann condition is the natural one, it is
assumed by default at all outward boundary parts where no
explicit boundary condition is specified.

Note. Zero Dirichlet condition is defaulted at the axis of

rotation for the axisymmetric problems.

If the surface electric current is to be specified at the plane

of problem symmetry and this plane forms the outward
boundary of the region, the current density has to be halved.
Zero flux boundary condition is used to describe
superconducting materials that are not penetrated by the
magnetic field. Vector magnetic potential is a constant
within such superconducting body (rA = const in
axisymmetric case), therefore superconductor's interior can
be excluded from the consideration and the constant
potential condition can be associated with its surface.

Note. If the surface of a superconductor has common points

with any Dirichlet edge, the whole surface has to be
described by the Dirichlet condition with an appropriate
potential value.
 Transient Magnetics 331

Permanent Magnets
Since the coercive force is considered in QuickField to be
the piecewise constant function, its contribution to the
equation is equivalent to surface currents which flow along
the surface of the permanent magnet in direction orthogonal
to the model plane. The density of such effective current is
equal to jump of the tangent component of the coercive force
across the magnet boundary. For example, rectangular
magnet with the coercive force Hc directed along x-axis can
be replaced by two oppositely directed currents at its upper
and lower surfaces. The current density at the upper edge is
numerically equal to Hc, and −Hc at the lower edge.
Therefore, the permanent magnet can be specified by either
coercive force or Neumann boundary conditions at its edges.
You can choose more convenient and obvious way in each
particular case.
Permanent magnet with nonlinear magnetic properties
needs some special consideration. Magnetic permeability is
assumed to be defined by the following equation
𝐵
𝐵 = (𝐵) · (𝐻 + 𝐻𝑐 ); (𝐵) =
𝐻 + 𝐻𝑐
Pleae note that (B) dependence is different from the
analogous curve for the same material but without
permanent magnetism. If the real characteristic for the
magnet is not available for you, it is possible to use row
material curve as an approximation. If you use such
approximation and magnetic field value inside magnet is
much smaller than its coercive force, it is recommended to
replace the coercive force by the following effective value
332 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

1
𝐻𝑐′ = 𝐵
𝜇(𝐵𝑟 ) 𝑟
where Br is remanent induction.

Calculated Physical Quantities

For problems of transient magnetics, QuickField
postprocessor calculates the following set of local and
integral physical quantities. These quantities can be
observed at any given moment of time in the transient
process.
Local quantities:
• Vector magnetic potential A (flux function rA in
axisymmetric case);
• Voltage U applied to the conductor;
• Total current density j = j0 + jeddy, source
current density j0 and eddy current density
𝜕𝐀
𝐣eddy = −σ
𝜕𝑡
• Vector of the magnetic flux density B = curl A
𝜕𝐴
𝐵𝑥 = , 𝐵𝑦
𝜕𝑦 ⎯ for planar
𝜕𝐴 case;
=−
𝜕𝑥
1 𝜕(𝑟𝐴)
𝐵𝑧 =
∙ , 𝐵𝑟 ⎯ for
𝑟 𝜕𝑟 axisymmetric
𝜕𝐴
=− case;
𝜕𝑧
• Vector of magnetic field intensity
 Transient Magnetics 333

1
𝐇 = 𝐁,
𝜇
where  is the magnetic permeability tensor.
• Joule heat density
1 2
𝑄 = 𝑗
𝜎
• Magnetic field energy density w = (BH)/2;
• Magnetic permeability  (its largest
component in anisotropic media);
• Electric conductivity σ.
Integral quantities:
• Electric current through a particular surface

𝐼 = ∫ 𝑗 𝑑𝑠

and its source I0 and eddy Ie components.

• Joule heat in a volume
1
𝑃 = ∫ 𝑗 2 𝑑𝑣
𝜎
• Total magnetic force acting on bodies contained in a
volume

1
𝐅= ∮ (𝐇(𝐧𝐁) + 𝐁(𝐧𝐇)– 𝐧(𝐇𝐁))𝑑𝑠,
2
𝑆
where integral is evaluated over the boundary of the
volume, and n denotes the vector of the outward unit
normal.
334 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

• Total torque of magnetic forces acting on

bodies contained in a volume

1
𝐓= ∮ ([𝐫 × 𝐇](𝐧𝐁)
2
𝑆
+ [𝐫 × 𝐁](𝐧𝐇) – [𝐫 × 𝐧](𝐇𝐁))𝑑𝑠,
where r is a radius vector of the point of integration.
The torque vector is parallel to z-axis in the planar case,
and is identically equal to zero in the axisymmetric one.
The torque is considered relative to the origin of the
coordinate system. The torque relative to any other
arbitrary point can be obtained by adding extra term of
F  r0, where F is the total force and r0 is the radius vector
of the point.
• Magnetic field energy

1 ⎯ linear
𝑊= ∫ (𝐇 · 𝐁)𝑑𝑣
2 case;
𝑉
𝐵
⎯ nonlinear
𝑊 = ∫ (∫ 𝐻(𝐵′)𝑑𝐵′) 𝑑𝑣
case.
0

• Flux linkage per one turn of the coil

∮ 𝐴𝑑𝑠 ⎯ for planar
Ψ = case;
𝑆
 AC Magnetic 335

2𝜋 ∮(𝑟𝐴)𝑑𝑠 ⎯ for
Ψ = axisymmetric
𝑆
case.
the integral has to be evaluated over the cross section of
the coil, and S is the area of the cross section.
For planar problems, all integral quantities are considered
per unit length in z-direction.
The domain of integration is specified in the plane of the
model as a closed contour consisting of line segments and
circular arcs.

AC Magnetic
AC magnetic analysis is the study of magnetic and electric
fields arising from the application of an alternating (AC)
current source, or an imposed alternating external field.
Variation of the field with respect to time is assumed to be
sinusoidal. All field components and electric currents vary
with time like
𝑧 = 𝑧0 cos(𝑡 + 𝑍 ),
where z0 is a peak value of z, z — its phase angle, and  —
the angular frequency.
336 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

Im

z0 t t+z Re
-  2 z
z

Complex representation of harmonic time dependency

facilitates multiple phase analysis based on one complex
solution. Real and imaginary parts of a complex quantity
𝑧 = 𝑧0 𝑒 𝑖(𝑡 + 𝑍 ) ,
𝑖 = √−1
have phase angles shifted by 90 degrees, and their linear
combination may be used to represent any arbitrary phase
angle.
Depending on the phase shift between two oscillating
components of a vector, the vector can rotate clockwise or
counterclockwise, or oscillate along certain direction.
Generally, the end of such a vector draws an ellipse. The
semi-major axis of the ellipse corresponds to the peak value
of the vector. The ratio between minor and major axes of the
ellipse defines the coefficient of polarization. The
coefficient of polarization is assumed to be positive for the
counterclockwise and negative for the clockwise rotation.
Zero coefficient corresponds to the linear polarization.
Total current in a conductor can be considered as a
combination of a source current produced by the external
voltage and an eddy current induced by the oscillating
magnetic field
𝐣 = 𝐣0 + 𝐣eddy
 AC Magnetic 337

If a field simulation is coupled with an electric circuit, the

branch equation for a conductor is:

𝑈 𝜕𝐀
𝐼= −σ∫ 𝑑𝑠
𝑅 𝜕𝑡
Ω
where U is the voltage difference between the two terminals
of the solid conductor, and R is the DC resistance of the
conductor.
The problem is formulated as a partial differential equation
for the complex amplitude of vector magnetic potential A
(B = curl A, B⎯magnetic flux density vector). The flux
density is assumed to lie in the plane of model (xy or zr),
while the vector of electric current density j and the vector
potential A are orthogonal to it. Only jz and Az in planar or
j and A in axisymmetric case are not equal to zero. We will
denote them simply j and A. The equation for planar case is
𝜕 1 𝜕𝐴 𝜕 1 𝜕𝐴
( )+ ( ) − 𝑖𝜔𝜎𝐴 = −𝑗0
𝜕𝑥 𝜇𝑦 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜇𝑥 𝜕𝑦
and for axisymmetric case is
𝜕 1 𝜕(𝑟𝐴) 𝜕 1 𝜕𝐴
( )+ ( ) − 𝑖𝜔𝜎𝐴 = −𝑗0
𝜕𝑟 𝑟𝜇𝑧 𝜕𝑟 𝜕𝑧 𝜇𝑟 𝜕𝑧
where electric conductivity σ and components of magnetic
permeability tensor x and y (z and r) are constants within
each block of the model. Source current density j0 is
assumed to be constant within each model block in planar
case and vary as ~(1/r) in axisymmetric case.
338 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

Note. QuickField allows nonlinear materials with field-

dependent permeability (ferromagnets) in AC magnetic
formulation. This harmonic estimation makes use of a
specially adjusted B-H curves providing energy
conservancy over the AC period. This adjustment is
performed automatically in the Curve Editor, it is
recalculated after every change of the original curve made
by the user. The curve editor for AC Magnetic problem
presents both the user-defined and adjusted B-H curves.

The described formulation ignores displacement current

density term D/t in the Ampere’s Law. Typically the
displacement current density is not significant until the
operating frequency approaches the MHz range.

Note. Permanent magnets cannot be simulated in a time-

harmonic analysis. Since the entire field must vary
sinusoidally, this would prevent permanent magnets from
being simulated using the harmonic analysis as the
permanent magnets supply a constant flux to the system.

Field Sources
The field sources can be specified in the blocks, at the edges
or at the individual vertices of the model. Possible field
sources include space, surface and linear electric currents
and voltages applied to conductive areas.
A point source in the xy-plane corresponds to a linear current
in out-of-plane direction. In axisymmetric case the point
source represents the current in a thin ring around the axis
of symmetry. Edge-bound source in the plane of model
 AC Magnetic 339

represents a surface current in three-dimensional world. It is

specified by the Neumann boundary condition for the edge.
There are several ways to specify space-distributed electric
current. In a massive conductor, you can specify either a
total current or a voltage applied to the conductor. In planar
problems, voltage drop is specified per unit depth of the
model, and in axisymmetric case voltage is assumed per one
turn around the axis of symmetry. Nonzero voltage applied
to a conductor in axisymmetric problem means that the
conductor has a radial cut, and the voltage is applied to sides
of the cut. In practice this option could be used to describe
known voltage applied to massive spiral wiring, in which
case the total voltage drop for the coil should be divided by
number of turns in the coil.
Several blocks with the same value of total current or
voltage applied can be considered as connected in series. In
that case each conductor carries the same total current, and
voltage (if any) is applied to the terminals of the whole
group of conductors connected in series.

Note. The meanings of zero total current and zero voltage

applied to a conductor are very different. Zero voltage
means that the conductor’s ends are short circuit, and zero
value of the total current means open ends of the conductor.

Field source could also be specified in non-conductive

areas. This option is useful to specify current in coils made
of thin wire, where skin effect is insignificant. You can
specify either a total current or a current density, whichever
is easier to calculate in a specific case. Current density in a
coil can be obtained from the equation
340 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

j = n · I / S,
where n is a number of turns, I is a total current, and S is a
cross-sectional area of the coil.

Note. In order to properly model thin wire coils, the source

current density j0 in non-conductive areas is assumed to be
uniform in both plane and axisymmetric cases. Its behavior
is different for massive conductors, where source current
density varies as ~(1/r) in axisymmetric case.

Boundary Conditions
The following boundary conditions can be specified at
outward and inner boundaries of the region.
Dirichlet condition specifies a known value of vector
magnetic potential A0 at the vertex or at the edge of the
model. This boundary condition defines normal component
of the flux density vector. It is often used to specify
vanishing value of this component, for example at the axis
of symmetry or at the distant boundary. QuickField also
supports the Dirichlet condition with a function of
coordinates. This approach allows you to model a uniform
external field by specifying non-zero normal component of
the flux density at arbitrary straight boundary segment.
Neumann condition has the following form
Ht = σ ⎯ at outward boundaries,
H t+ - H t- = σ ⎯ at inner boundaries,
where Ht is a tangent component of magnetic field intensity,
"+" and "−" superscripts denote quantities to the left and to
the right side of the boundary and σ is a linear density of the
 AC Magnetic 341

surface current. If σ value is zero, the boundary condition is

called homogeneous. This kind of boundary condition is
often used at an outward boundary of the region that is
formed by the plane of magnetic antisymmetry of the
problem (opposite sources in symmetrical geometry). The
homogeneous Neumann condition is the natural one, it is
assumed by default at all outward boundary parts where no
explicit boundary condition is specified.

Note. Zero Dirichlet condition is defaulted at the axis of

rotation for the axisymmetric problems.

If the surface electric current is to be specified at the plane

of problem symmetry and this plane forms the outward
boundary of the region, the current density has to be halved.
Zero flux boundary condition is used to describe
superconducting materials that are not penetrated by the
magnetic field. Vector magnetic potential is a constant
within such superconducting body (rA = const in
axisymmetric case), therefore superconductor's interior can
be excluded from the consideration and the constant
potential condition can be associated with its surface.

Note. If the surface of a superconductor has common points

with any Dirichlet edge, the whole surface has to be
described by the Dirichlet condition with an appropriate
potential value.
342 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

Calculated Physical Quantities

The following local and integral physical quantities are
calculated in the process of harmonic magnetic field
analysis.
Local quantities:
• Complex amplitude of vector magnetic potential A (flux
function rA in axisymmetric case);
• Complex amplitude of voltage U applied to the
conductor;
• Complex amplitude of total current density j =
j0 + jeddy, source current density j0 and eddy
current density jeddy = −iσA;
• Complex vector of the magnetic flux density
B = curl A
𝜕𝐴
𝐵𝑥 = ,
𝜕𝑦
⎯ for planar case;
𝜕𝐴
𝐵𝑦 = −
𝜕𝑥
1 𝜕(𝑟𝐴)
𝐵𝑧 =
∙ , 𝐵𝑟 ⎯ for axisymmetric
𝑟 𝜕𝑟
𝜕𝐴 case;
=−
𝜕𝑧
• Complex vector of magnetic field intensity
1
𝐇 = 𝐁,
𝜇
where  is the magnetic permeability tensor;
• Time average and peak Joule heat density
 AC Magnetic 343

1 2 3
𝑄 = 𝑗 + 𝑘ℎ ∙ 𝑓 ∙ 𝐵2 + 𝑘𝑐 ∙ 𝑓 2 ∙ 𝐵2 + 𝑘𝑒 ∙ (𝑓 ∙ 𝐵)2
𝜎
• Time average and peak magnetic field energy
density w = B  H / 2;
• Time average Poynting vector (local power
flow) S = E×H;
• Time average Lorentz force density vector
F = j×B;
• Magnetic permeability  (its largest
component in anisotropic media);
• Electric conductivity σ.
Integral quantities:
• Complex magnitude of electric current through a
particular surface and its source and eddy components

𝐼 = ∫ 𝑗 𝑑𝑠

• Time average and peak Joule heat in a volume

1
𝑃 = ∫ 𝑗 2 𝑑𝑣
𝜎

Oscillating
average component
peak

t
-  2
344 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

• Time average core loss in a volume

𝑃𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑒 = ∫ [𝑘ℎ · 𝑓 · 𝐵2 + 𝑘𝑐 · 𝑓 2 · 𝐵2 + 𝑘𝑒
3
· (𝑓 · 𝐵)2 ] 𝑑𝑣,
where B – is the flux density magnetide and kh, kc, ke are
user defined coefficients.
• Time average and peak magnetic field energy

1
𝑊= ∫(𝐇 · 𝐁)𝑑𝑣
2
𝑉
• Time average and peak power flow through the
given surface (Poynting vector flow)

𝑆 = ∫ (𝐒 · 𝐧)𝑑𝑠

• Time average and oscillating part of Maxwell force

acting on bodies contained in a particular volume

1
𝐅= ∮ (𝐇(𝐧𝐁) + 𝐁(𝐧𝐇)– 𝐧(𝐇𝐁))𝑑𝑠,
2
𝑆
where integral is evaluated over the boundary of the
volume, and n denotes the vector of the outward unit
normal.
• Time average and peak Maxwell force torque
acting on bodies contained in a particular
volume
 AC Magnetic 345

1
𝐓= ∮ ([𝐫 × 𝐇](𝐧𝐁)
2
𝑆
+ [𝐫 × 𝐁](𝐧𝐇) – [𝐫 × 𝐧](𝐇𝐁))𝑑𝑠,
where r is a radius vector of the point of integration.
• Time average and oscillating part of Lorentz force acting
on conductors contained in a particular volume

𝐅 = ∫ [𝐣 × 𝐁]𝑑𝑣.
𝑉
• Time average and peak Lorentz force torque
acting on bodies contained in a particular
volume

𝐓 = ∫ [𝐫 × [𝐣 × 𝐁]]𝑑𝑣.
𝑉
where r is a radius vector of the point of integration.
The torque vector is parallel to z-axis in the planar case,
and is identically equal to zero in the axisymmetric one.
The torque is considered relative to the origin of the
coordinate system. The torque relative to any other
arbitrary point can be obtained by adding extra term of
F  r0, where F is the total force and r0 is the radius vector
of the point.
346 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

Note. Magnetic field produces forces acting on the current

carrying conductors and on the ferromagnetic bodies. The
force acting on conductors is known as Lorentz force, while
the Maxwell force incorporates both components.

The domain of integration is specified in the plane of the

model as a closed contour consisting of line segments and
circular arcs.

Impedance Calculation
Impedance in ac magnetic analysis is a complex coefficient
between complex values of current and voltage, V = ZI. Its
real part represents active resistance of the conductor,
calculated with the skin effect taken into account. The
imaginary part of the impedance is the inductance
multiplied by the angular frequency .
𝑍 = 𝑅 + 𝑖𝜔𝐿
As values of voltage and current in any conductor are easily
accessible in the postprocessor, you can determine the
impedance by dividing voltage by current using complex
arithmetic. Let V and I be peak values of voltage and current,
and V and I be phases of those quantities. Then the active
resistance is calculated as
𝑉
𝑅 = cos(φ𝑉 − φ𝐼 ),
𝐼
and the inductance as
𝑉
𝐿= sin(φ𝑉 − φ𝐼 ),
𝐼 ∙ 2𝜋𝑓
 Electrostatics 347

To get mutual inductance between two conductors, you can

specify non-zero total current in one of them, make the ends
of the other open (applying zero total current), and measure
the voltage induced in the second conductor by the current
in the first one.

Note. As in planar case, voltage is applied and measured

per unit length, the impedance is also calculated per unit
length in z-direction.

Electrostatics
Electrostatic problems are described by the Poisson's
equation for scalar electric potential U (E = −gradU, E⎯
electric field intensity vector). The equation for planar case
is
𝜕 𝜕𝑈 𝜕 𝜕𝑈
(𝜀𝑥 ) + (𝜀𝑦 ) = −ρ,
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑦
for axisymmetric case:
1𝜕 𝜕𝑈 𝜕 𝜕𝑈
(𝜀𝑟 𝑟 ) + (𝜀𝑧 ) = −ρ,
𝑟 𝜕𝑟 𝜕𝑟 𝜕𝑧 𝜕𝑧
And for 3D formulation:
𝜕 𝜕𝑈 𝜕 𝜕𝑈 𝜕 𝜕𝑈
(𝜀 ) + (𝜀 ) + (𝜀 ) = −ρ,
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑧 𝜕𝑧
where components of electric permittivity tensor x, y, z or
z, r and electric charge density  are constants within each
block of the model. Anisotropy is not accounted for in 3D
formulation.
348 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

Field Sources
QuickField provides possibility to specify electric charges
located in the bodies, on the faces, at the edges or at the
individual vertices of the model. In planar case, the electric
charge specified at a point of the xy-plane corresponds to a
charged string that is perpendicular to the plane of the
model, and is described by the linear charge density. In
axisymmetric case the vertex charge represents a charged
circle around the axis of symmetry or a point charge located
on the axis. To incorporate both these cases a total charge
value is associated with the vertex. For the charged circle
the total charge is connected with its linear density by the
relationship q = 2r. Edge-bound charge in the plane of
model represents a surface-bound charge in
three-dimensional world. It is described by surface charge
density and is specified by the Neumann boundary condition
for the edge. The charge density associated with a body or
within a block is equivalent to the space charge.

Boundary Conditions
The following boundary conditions can be specified at
outward and inner boundaries of the region.
Dirichlet condition specifies a known value of electric
potential U0 at the vertex, at the edge, or on the face of the
model (for example on a capacitor plate). This kind of
boundary condition is also useful at an outward boundary of
the region that is formed by the plane of electric
antisymmetry of the problem (opposite charges in
symmetrical geometry). U0 value can be specified as a linear
function of coordinates. The function parameters can vary
 Electrostatics 349

from one entity to another, but have to be adjusted to avoid

discontinuities at entities' junction points.

Note. For problem to be defined correctly the Dirichlet

condition has to be specified at least at one point. If the
region consists of two or more disjoint subregions, the
Dirichlet conditions have to be specified at least at one point
of every part.

Neumann condition is defined by the following equations:

Dn = σ ⎯ at outward boundaries,
Dn+ - Dn- = σ ⎯ at inner boundaries,
where Dn is a normal component of electric induction, "+"
and "−" superscripts denote quantities to the left and to the
right side of the boundary, σ is a surface charge density. If σ
value is zero, the boundary condition is called
homogeneous. It indicates vanishing of the normal
component of electric field intensity vector. This kind of
boundary condition is used at an outward boundary of the
region that is formed by the symmetry plane of the problem.
The homogeneous Neumann condition is the natural one, it
is defaulted at all outward boundary parts where no explicit
boundary condition is specified.
If the surface-bound charge is to be specified at the plane of
problem symmetry and this plane is the outward boundary
of the region, the surface charge density has to be halved.
Constant potential boundary condition is used to describe
surface of an isolated "floating" conductor that has constant
but unknown potential value.
350 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

Note. The edge or the face described as possessing constant

potential should not have common points with any Dirichlet
entity. In that case the constant potential entity has to be
described by a Dirichlet condition with appropriate potential
value.

Calculated Physical Quantities

For electrostatic problems the QuickField postprocessor
calculates the following set of local and integral physical
quantities.
Local quantities:
• Scalar electric potential U;
• Vector of electric field intensity E = −gradU
𝜕𝑈
𝐸𝑥 = − , 𝐸𝑦
𝜕𝑥
𝜕𝑈 ⎯ for planar or
= − , 𝐸𝑧
𝜕𝑦 3D case;
𝜕𝑈
= −
𝜕𝑧
𝜕𝑈 𝜕𝑈 ⎯ for
𝐸𝑧 = − , 𝐸𝑟 = − axisymmetric
𝜕𝑧 𝜕𝑟
case;
• Tensor of the gradient of electric field intensity
G = gradE
 Electrostatics 351

𝜕𝐸𝑥 𝐸𝑦
G𝑥𝑥 = , G𝑦𝑦 = ,𝐺
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝑥𝑦
𝜕𝐸𝑥 —for planar
=½ (
𝜕𝑦 case;
𝜕𝐸𝑦
+ )
𝜕𝑥
𝜕𝐸𝑧 𝐸𝑟
G𝑧𝑧 = , G𝑟𝑟 = , 𝐺𝑧𝑟 —for
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑟
𝜕𝐸𝑧 𝜕𝐸𝑟 axisymmetric
=½ ( + ) case;
𝜕𝑟 𝜕𝑧
and also its principal components G1 and G2.
• Vector of electric induction D = E, where  is electric
permittivity tensor.
Integral quantities:
• Total electric charge in a particular volume

𝑞 = ∮ 𝐃 ∙ 𝐧 𝑑𝑠,

where integral is evaluated over the boundary of the

volume, and n denotes the vector of the outward unit
normal.
• Total electric force acting on bodies contained in a
particular volume

1
𝐅= ∮ (𝐄(𝐧𝐃) + 𝐃(𝐧𝐄)– 𝐧(𝐄𝐃))𝑑𝑠,
2
𝑆
352 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

• Total torque of electric forces acting on bodies contained

in a particular volume

1
𝐓= ∮ ([𝐫 × 𝐄](𝐧𝐃)
2
𝑆
+ [𝐫 × 𝐃](𝐧𝐄) – [𝐫 × 𝐧](𝐄𝐃))𝑑𝑠,
where r is a radius vector of the point of integration.
The torque vector is parallel to z-axis in planar case, and
is identically equal to zero in axisymmetric one. The
torque is considered relative to the origin of the
coordinate system. The torque relative to any other
arbitrary point can be obtained by adding extra term of
F  r0, where F is the total force and r0 is the radius vector
of the point.
• Energy of electric field

1
𝑊= ∫ (𝐄 · 𝐃)𝑑𝑣
2
𝑉
For planar problems all integral quantities are considered
per unit length in z-direction.
The domain of integration is specified in the plane of the
model as a closed contour consisting of line segments and
circular arcs.

Capacitance Calculation
There are several ways to calculate capacitance using
QuickField. The easiest one of them is based on measuring
an electric potential produced by a known charge. To get
 DC Conduction Analysis 353

capacitance of a conductor, put constant potential boundary

condition on its surface, specify an arbitrary non zero
electric charge in one of the vertices on the surface of the
conductor (in fact, the charge will be distributed over the
conductor’s surface), and turn off all other field sources in
the model. Once the problem is solved, go to the
Postprocessor and take the value of electric potential
somewhere on the surface of the conductor. The capacitance
of the conductor can be obtained from the equation
𝑞
𝐶= ,
𝑈
where q is the electric charge and U is the potential of the
conductor.
To calculate mutual capacitance between two conductors
put a charge on one conductor and measure electric potential
on another. Constant potential boundary condition has to be
applied to the surfaces of both conductors.
𝑞1
𝐶12 = .
𝑈2
Self- and mutual partial capacitance matrix calculation in
the multi-conductor system is discussed in the “Partial
Capacitance Matrix Calculation for the System of
Conductors” chapter.

DC Conduction Analysis
QuickField is able to calculate the distribution of electric
current in systems of conductors. The problems of current
distribution are described by the Poisson's equation for
scalar electric potential U.
354 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

The equation for planar case is

𝜕 𝜕𝑈 𝜕 𝜕𝑈
(𝜎𝑥 ) + (𝜎𝑦 ) = 0,
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑦
for axisymmetric case:
1𝜕 𝜕𝑈 𝜕 𝜕𝑈
(𝜎𝑟 𝑟 ) + (𝜎𝑧 ) = 0,
𝑟 𝜕𝑟 𝜕𝑟 𝜕𝑧 𝜕𝑧
and for 3D formulation:
𝜕 𝜕𝑈 𝜕 𝜕𝑈 𝜕 𝜕𝑈
(𝜎 ) + (𝜎 ) + (𝜎 ) = 0,
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑧 𝜕𝑧
where components of electric conductivity tensor σx, σy or
σz, σr are constant within each model block. Anisotropy is
not accounted for in 3D formulation.
The electric current density j can be obtained from the
equation j = −σgrad U.

Field Sources
With the problems of dc conduction, the field sources are
external currents supplied to the boundary of a conductor.
QuickField provides possibility to specify external current
density at the edges or at the individual vertices of the
model. The current density specified at a point of the
xy-plane corresponds to a knife-edge current collector that
is perpendicular to the plane of the model, and is described
by the linear current density. In axisymmetric case the
vertex source represents a circular collector around the axis
of symmetry or a point collector located on the axis. To
incorporate both these cases, a total current value is
associated with the vertex. For the circular knife-edge
collector the total current value is connected with its linear
 DC Conduction Analysis 355

density by the relationship I = 2r. Edge-bound current

density in the plane of model represents a surface-bound
external current density in three-dimensional world. It is
specified by the Neumann boundary condition for the edge.

Boundary Conditions
The following boundary conditions can be specified at
outward and inner boundaries of the region.
Dirichlet condition specifies a known value of electric
potential U0 at the vertex or at the edge of the model. U0
value at the edge can be specified as a linear function of
coordinates. The function parameters can vary from one
edge to another, but have to be adjusted to avoid
discontinuities at edges' junction points.

Note. For problem to be defined correctly the Dirichlet

condition has to be specified at least at one point. If the
region consists of two or more disjoint subregions, the
Dirichlet conditions have to be specified at least at one point
of every part.

Neumann condition is defined by the following equations:

jn = j ⎯ at outward boundaries,
jn+ - jn- = j ⎯ at inner boundaries,
where jn is a normal component of the current density
vector, "+" and "−" superscripts denote quantities to the left
and to the right side of the boundary, and j at right hand side
is a density of the external current. If j value is zero, the
boundary condition is called homogeneous. This kind of
boundary condition is used at an outward boundary of the
356 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

region that is formed by the symmetry plane of the problem.

The homogeneous Neumann condition is the natural one, it
is defaulted at all outward boundary parts where no explicit
boundary condition is specified.
If the surface-bound current density is to be specified at the
plane of problem symmetry and this plane is the outward
boundary of the region, the surface current density has to be
halved.
Constant potential boundary condition is used to describe
surface of a conductor having much greater conductivity
than the surrounding medium. This conductor is assumed to
have constant but unknown potential value.

Note. The edge described as possessing constant potential

should not have common points with any Dirichlet edge. In
that case the constant potential edge has to be described by
the Dirichlet condition with an appropriate potential value.

Calculated Physical Quantities

For problems of dc conduction, the QuickField
postprocessor calculates the following set of local and
integral physical quantities.
Local quantities:
• Scalar electric potential U;
• Vector of electric field intensity E = −grad U
𝜕𝑈
𝐸𝑋 = − ,𝐸
𝜕𝑥 𝑦 —for planar or
𝜕𝑈 𝜕𝑈 3D case;
=− ,𝐸 = −
𝜕𝑦 𝑧 𝜕𝑧
 AC Conduction Analysis 357

𝜕𝑈
𝐸𝑧 = − , 𝐸𝑟 —for
𝜕𝑧 axisymmetric
𝜕𝑈
=− case;
𝜕𝑟
• Vector of current density j = σE, where σ - is
electric conductivity tensor.
Integral quantities:
• Electric current through a given surface

𝐼 = ∫ 𝐣 ∙ 𝐧 𝑑𝑠,
𝑆
where n denotes the vector of the unit normal.
• Joule heat produced in a volume

𝑊 = ∫(𝐄 · 𝐣)𝑑𝑣.
𝑉
For planar problems all integral quantities are considered
per unit length in z direction.
The domain of integration is specified in the plane of the
model as a closed contour consisting of line segments and
circular arcs.

AC Conduction Analysis
AC conduction analysis is the study of electric field, current
and losses arising in conductors and imperfect (lossy)
dielectrics from the application of an alternating (AC)
voltage or external current to electrodes.
358 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

Similar to problems of AC magnetics, variation of the field

with respect to time is assumed to be sinusoidal. All field
components and electric current vary with time like
z = z0 cos(t + z),
where z0 is a peak value of z, z — its phase angle, and  —
the angular frequency.
Complex arithmetic is used to represent harmonic time-
dependency.
The problem formulation combines equations for
electrostatics (E = ) and dc conduction (j = -iσ),
taking into account the Ohm's law, j = σE. Final equation
with respect to electric potential U is
𝑖𝜎
∇ ([𝜀 − ] ∇𝑈) = 0;
𝜔
where electric conductivity σ and components of electric
permittivity tensor z and y (z and r) are constants within
each block of the model.

Field Sources
With ac conduction problems, the field sources are external
currents or voltages supplied to the boundary of a conductor.
QuickField provides possibility to specify external current
density at the edges or at the individual vertices of the
model. The current density specified at a point of the
xy-plane corresponds to a knife-edge current collector,
which is perpendicular to the plane of the model, and is
described by the linear current density. In axisymmetric case
the vertex source represents a circular collector around the
axis of symmetry or a point collector located on the axis. To
 AC Conduction Analysis 359

incorporate both these cases, a total current value is

associated with the vertex. For the circular knife-edge
collector the total current value is connected with its linear
density by the relationship I = 2r. Edge-bound current
density in the plane of model represents a surface-bound
external current density in three-dimensional world. It is
specified by the Neumann boundary condition for the edge.
Every condition is defined by its magnitude and phase.

Boundary Conditions
The following boundary conditions can be specified at
outward and inner boundaries of the region.
Dirichlet condition specifies a known value of electric
potential U0 at the vertex or at the edge of the model. U0
value at the edge can be specified as a linear function of
coordinates. The function parameters can vary from one
edge to another, but have to be adjusted to avoid
discontinuities at edges' junction points.

Note. For problem to be defined correctly the Dirichlet

condition has to be specified at least at one point. If the
region consists of two or more disjoint subregions, the
Dirichlet conditions have to be specified at least at one point
of every part.

Neumann condition is defined by the following equations:

jn = j ⎯ at outward boundaries,
jn+ - jn- = j ⎯ at inner boundaries,
where jn is a normal component of the current density
vector, "+" and "−" superscripts denote quantities to the left
360 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

and to the right side of the boundary, and j at right hand side
is a density of the external current. If j value is zero, the
boundary condition is called homogeneous. This kind of
boundary condition is used at an outward boundary of the
region that is formed by the symmetry plane of the problem.
The homogeneous Neumann condition is the natural one; it
is defaulted at all outward boundary parts where no explicit
boundary condition is specified.
If the surface-bound current density is to be specified at the
plane of problem symmetry and this plane is the outward
boundary of the region, the surface current density has to be
halved.
Constant potential boundary condition is used to describe
surface of a conductor having much greater conductivity
than the surrounding medium. This conductor is assumed to
have constant but unknown potential value.

Note. The edge described as possessing constant potential

should not have common points with any Dirichlet edge. In
that case the constant potential edge has to be described by
the Dirichlet condition with an appropriate potential value.

Calculated Physical Quantities

For ac conduction problems, the QuickField postprocessor
calculates the following set of local and integral physical
quantities.
Local quantities:
• Complex amplitude of electric potential U;
• Complex vector of electric field intensity
E = −grad U
 AC Conduction Analysis 361

𝜕𝑈
𝐸𝑥 = − , 𝐸𝑦
𝜕𝑥 ⎯ for planar case;
𝜕𝑈
= −
𝜕𝑦
𝜕𝑈
𝐸𝑧 = − , 𝐸𝑟 ⎯ for
𝜕𝑧 axisymmetric
𝜕𝑈
= − case;
𝜕𝑟
• Complex vector of active jactive = σE, reactive
jreactive = iE and apparent japparent = jactive +
jreactive current density;
• Time average and peak active power (losses)
density Qactive = jactive · E, reactive Qreactive
= jreactive · E, and apparent Qapparent = japparent · E
power density;
• Electric permittivity  (its largest component in
anisotropic media);
• Electric conductivity g (its largest component
in anisotropic media).
Integral quantities:
• Complex magnitude of electric current (active Iactive,
reactive Ireactive and apparent I) through a given surface

𝐼 = ∫ (𝐣 ∙ 𝐧) 𝑑𝑠
𝑆
where n denotes the vector of the unit normal.
• Time average and peak active Pactive, reactive
Preactive, and apparent P power produced in a
volume
362 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

𝑃 = ∫ (𝐄 ∙ 𝐣) 𝑑𝑣
𝑉
• Time average and oscillating part of electric force acting
on bodies contained in a particular volume

1
𝐅= ∮ (𝐄(𝐧𝐃) + 𝐃(𝐧𝐄)– 𝐧(𝐄𝐃))𝑑𝑠,
2
𝑆
where integral is evaluated over the boundary of the
volume, and n denotes the vector of the outward unit
normal.
• Time average and peak electric force torque
acting on bodies contained in a particular
volume

1
𝐓= ∮ ([𝐫 × 𝐄](𝐧𝐃)
2
𝑆
+ [𝐫 × 𝐃](𝐧𝐄) – [𝐫 × 𝐧](𝐄𝐃))𝑑𝑠,
where r is a radius vector of the point of integration.
The torque vector is parallel to z-axis in the planar case,
and is identically equal to zero in the axisymmetric one.
The torque is considered relative to the origin of the
coordinate system. The torque relative to any other
arbitrary point can be obtained by adding extra term of
F  r0, where F is the total force and r0 is the radius vector
of the point.
 Transient Electric Analysis 363

The domain of integration is specified in the plane of the

model as a closed contour consisting of line segments and
circular arcs.

Transient Electric Analysis

Transient electric is the most generic formulation of electric
field analysis in the absence of magnetic field. In this
formulation, the field sources (voltage or current) can be
arbitrary functions of time, and electric properties of
materials can vary with electric field.
The problem formulation is similar to AC conduction:
𝜕
−[𝜎(𝐸)𝑈] − [𝜀(𝐸)𝑈] = 0
𝜕𝑡
where electric conductivity σ and electric permittivity  can
be nonlinear or anisotropic.

Field Sources
The field sources are external currents or voltages supplied
to the boundary of a conductor. QuickField provides
possibility to specify external current density at the edges or
at the individual vertices of the model. The current density
specified at a point of the xy-plane corresponds to a knife-
edge current collector, which is perpendicular to the plane
of the model, and is described by the linear current density.
In axisymmetric case the vertex source represents a circular
collector around the axis of symmetry or a point collector
located on the axis. To incorporate both these cases, a total
current value is associated with the vertex. For the circular
knife-edge collector the total current value is connected with
364 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

its linear density by the relationship I = 2r. Edge-bound

current density in the plane of model represents a
surface-bound external current density in three-dimensional
world. It is specified by the Neumann boundary condition
for the edge. Every condition is defined by the formula
involving spatial coordinates and time.

Boundary Conditions
The following boundary conditions can be specified at
outward and inner boundaries of the region.
Dirichlet condition specifies a known value of electric
potential U0 at the vertex or at the edge of the model. U0
value at the edge can be specified as a linear function of
coordinates. The function parameters can vary from one
edge to another, but have to be adjusted to avoid
discontinuities at edges' junction points.

Note. For problem to be defined correctly the Dirichlet

condition has to be specified at least at one point. If the
region consists of two or more disjoint subregions, the
Dirichlet conditions have to be specified at least at one point
of every part.

Neumann condition is defined by the following equations:

jn = j ⎯ at outward boundaries,
jn+ - jn- = j ⎯ at inner boundaries,
where jn is a normal component of the current density
vector, "+" and "−" superscripts denote quantities to the left
and to the right side of the boundary, and j at right hand side
is a density of the external current. If j value is zero, the
 Transient Electric Analysis 365

boundary condition is called homogeneous. This kind of

boundary condition is used at an outward boundary of the
region that is formed by the symmetry plane of the problem.
The homogeneous Neumann condition is the natural one; it
is defaulted at all outward boundary parts where no explicit
boundary condition is specified.
If the surface-bound current density is to be specified at the
plane of problem symmetry and this plane is the outward
boundary of the region, the surface current density has to be
halved.
Constant potential boundary condition is used to describe
surface of a conductor having much greater conductivity
than the surrounding medium. This conductor is assumed to
have constant but unknown potential value.

Note. The edge described as possessing constant potential

should not have common points with any Dirichlet edge. In
that case the constant potential edge has to be described by
the Dirichlet condition with an appropriate potential value.

Calculated Physical Quantities

The QuickField postprocessor calculates the following set
of local and integral physical quantities at any given
moment of time or as time-dependent graphs and tables:
Local quantities:
• Electric potential U;
• Electric field intensity E = −grad U
• Tensor of the gradient of electric field intensity
G = gradE
366 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

𝜕𝐸𝑥 𝐸𝑦
G𝑥𝑥 = , G𝑦𝑦 = ,𝐺
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝑥𝑦
𝜕𝐸𝑥 —for planar
=½ (
𝜕𝑦 case;
𝜕𝐸𝑦
+ )
𝜕𝑥
𝜕𝐸𝑧 𝐸𝑟
G𝑧𝑧 = , G𝑟𝑟 = , 𝐺𝑧𝑟 —for
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑟
𝜕𝐸𝑧 𝜕𝐸𝑟 axisymmetric
=½ ( + ) case;
𝜕𝑟 𝜕𝑧
and also its principal components G1 and G2.
• Vector of active j = σE and displacement
𝜕
jd = (𝐄) current;
𝜕𝑡
• Active power (losses) density Q = j · E;
• Electric permittivity (E);
• Electric conductivity σ(E).
Integral quantities:
• Electric current (active Iactive and reactive Ireactive) through
a given surface

𝐼 = ∫ 𝐣 ∙ 𝐧 𝑑𝑠,
𝑆
where n denotes the vector of the unit normal.
• Active Pactive and reactive Preactive power
produced in a volume
 Transient Electric Analysis 367

𝑃 = ∫ (𝐄 · 𝐣)𝑑𝑣.
𝑉
• Electric force acting on bodies contained in a particular
volume

1
𝐅= ∮ (𝐄(𝐧𝐃) + 𝐃(𝐧𝐄)– 𝐧(𝐄𝐃))𝑑𝑠,
2
𝑆
where integral is evaluated over the boundary of the
volume, and n denotes the vector of the outward unit
normal.
• Electric force torque acting on bodies
contained in a particular volume

1
𝐓= ∮ ([𝐫 × 𝐄](𝐧𝐃)
2
𝑆
+ [𝐫 × 𝐃](𝐧𝐄) – [𝐫 × 𝐧](𝐄𝐃))𝑑𝑠,
where r is a radius vector of the point of integration.
The torque vector is parallel to z-axis in the planar case,
and is identically equal to zero in the axisymmetric one.
The torque is considered relative to the origin of the
coordinate system. The torque relative to any other
arbitrary point can be obtained by adding extra term of
F  r0, where F is the total force and r0 is the radius vector
of the point. The domain of integration is specified in the
plane of the model as a closed contour consisting of line
segments and circular arcs.
368 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

Heat Transfer
With QuickField you can analyze linear and nonlinear
temperature fields in one of two formulations: steady state
or transient: heating or cooling of the system.
Heat-transfer equation for linear problems is:
𝜕 𝜕𝑇 𝜕 𝜕𝑇
(𝜆𝑥 ) + (𝜆𝑦 )
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑦
⎯ planar case;
𝜕𝑇
= −𝑞 − 𝑐𝜌
𝜕𝑡
1𝜕 𝜕𝑇 𝜕 𝜕𝑇
(𝜆𝑟 𝑟 ) + (𝜆𝑧 ) ⎯
𝑟 𝜕𝑟 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑧 𝜕𝑧 axisymmetric
𝜕𝑇
= −𝑞 − 𝑐𝜌 case;
𝜕𝑡
𝜕 𝜕𝑇 𝜕 𝜕𝑇
(𝜆 ) + (𝜆 )
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑦
𝜕 𝜕𝑇 ⎯ 3D case;
+ (𝜆 )
𝜕𝑧 𝜕𝑧
= −𝑞
for nonlinear problems:
𝜕 𝜕𝑇
(𝜆(𝑇) )
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑥
𝜕 𝜕𝑇
+ (𝜆(𝑇) )
𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑦 ⎯ planar case;
= −𝑞(𝑇)
𝜕𝑇
− 𝑐(𝑇)𝜌
𝜕𝑡
 Heat Transfer 369

1𝜕 𝜕𝑇
(𝜆(𝑇)𝑟 )
𝑟 𝜕𝑟 𝜕𝑥
𝜕 𝜕𝑇 ⎯
+ (𝜆(𝑇) )
𝜕𝑧 𝜕𝑧 axisymmetric
= −𝑞(𝑇) case;
𝜕𝑇
− 𝑐(𝑇)𝜌
𝜕𝑡
where:
T — temperature;
t — time;
x(y,z,r) — components of heat conductivity tensor,
anisotropy is not accounted for in 3D formulation;
(T) — heat conductivity as a function of
temperature approximated by cubic spline (anisotropy is
not supported in nonlinear case);
q(T) — volume power of heat sources, in linear
case—constant, in nonlinear case—function of temperature
approximated by cubic spline.
c(T) — specific heat, in nonlinear case—function
of temperature approximated by cubic spline;
ρ — density of the substance.
In steady state case the last term in these equations equals
zero. In linear case all the parameters are constants within
each block of the model.

Heat Sources
QuickField provides possibility to specify the heat sources
located in the blocks, at the edges or at the individual
vertices of the model. The heat source specified at a point of
370 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

the xy-plane corresponds to a linear string-like heater which

is perpendicular to the plane of the model, and is described
by the generated power per unit length. In axisymmetric
case the vertex heat source represents a heating circle
around the axis of symmetry or a point heater located on the
axis. To incorporate both these cases a total generated power
value is associated with the vertex. For the heating circle the
total power is connected with its linear density by the
relationship q = 2rql. Edge-bound heat source in the plane
of model represents a surface heat source in
three-dimensional world. It is described by power per unit
area and is specified by the Neumann boundary condition
for the edge. The volume power density associated with a
block corresponds to the volume heat source.

Boundary Conditions
The following boundary conditions can be specified at
outward and inner boundaries of the region.
Known temperature boundary condition (known also as
boundary condition of the first kind) specifies a known
value of temperature T0 at the vertex or at the edge of the
model (for example on a liquid-cooled surface). T0 value at
the edge can be specified as a linear function of coordinates.
The function parameters can vary from one edge to another,
but have to be adjusted to avoid discontinuities at edges'
junction points.
This boundary condition sometimes is called the boundary
condition of the first kind.
 Heat Transfer 371

Heat flux boundary condition (known also as boundary

condition of the second kind) is defined by the following
equations:
Fn = -qs ⎯ at outward boundaries,
Fn+ - Fn- = -qs ⎯ at inner boundaries,
where Fn is a normal component of heat flux density, "+"
and "−" superscripts denote quantities to the left and to the
right side of the boundary. For inner boundary qs denotes the
generated power per unit area, for outward boundary it
specifies the known value of the heat flux density across the
boundary. If qs value is zero, the boundary condition is
called homogeneous. The homogeneous condition at the
outward boundary indicates vanishing of the heat flux
across the surface. This type of boundary condition is the
natural one, it is defaulted at all outward boundary parts
where no explicit boundary condition is specified. This kind
of boundary condition is used at an outward boundary of the
region which is formed by the symmetry plane of the
problem.
If the surface heat source is to be specified at the plane of
problem symmetry and this plane constitutes the outward
boundary of the region, the surface power has to be halved.
This boundary condition sometimes is called the boundary
condition of the second kind.
Convection boundary condition can be specified at
outward boundary of the region. It describes convective heat
transfer and is defined by the following equation:
Fn = (T - T0),
372 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

where  is a film coefficient, and T0⎯temperature of

contacting fluid medium. Parameters  and T0 may differ
from part to part of the boundary.
This boundary condition sometimes is called the boundary
condition of the third kind.
Radiation boundary condition can be specified at outward
boundary of the region. It describes radiative heat transfer
and is defined by the following equation:
Fn = kSB(T4 - T04),
where kSB is a Stephan-Boltsman constant,  is an emissivity
coefficient, and T0—ambient radiation temperature.
Parameters  and T0 may differ from part to part of the
boundary.

Note. For heat transfer problem to be defined correctly the

known temperature boundary condition, or the convection,
or the radiation has to be specified at least at some parts of
the boundary.

Constant temperature boundary condition may be used

to describe bodies with very high heat conductivity. You can
exclude interior of these bodies from the consideration and
describe their surface as the constant temperature boundary.

Note. The edge described as possessing constant

temperature cannot have common points with any edge
where the temperature is specified explicitly. In that case the
constant temperature edge has to be described by the
boundary condition of the first kind with an appropriate
temperature value.
 Heat Transfer 373

Calculated Physical Quantities

For heat transfer problems the QuickField postprocessor
calculates the following set of local and integral physical
quantities.
Local quantities:
• Temperature T;
• Vector of the heat flux density F = − grad T
𝜕𝑇 𝜕𝑇 ⎯ for planar
𝐹𝑥 = −𝜆𝑥 , 𝐹𝑦 = −𝜆𝑦
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦 case;
𝜕𝑇 𝜕𝑇 ⎯ for
𝐹𝑧 = −𝜆𝑧 , 𝐹𝑟 = −𝜆𝑟 axisymmetric
𝜕𝑧 𝜕𝑟
case;
𝜕𝑇
𝐹𝑥 = −𝜆 , 𝐹𝑦
𝜕𝑥
𝜕𝑇
= −𝜆 , 𝐹 ⎯ for 3D case;
𝜕𝑦 𝑧
𝜕𝑇
= −𝜆
𝜕𝑧
The postprocessor can calculate the heat flux through an
arbitrary closed or unclosed surface

𝛷 = ∫ (𝐅 ∙ 𝐧) 𝑑𝑠
𝑆
where n denotes the unit vector of normal to the surface. The
surface is specified by a contour consisting of line segments
and circular arcs in the plane of the model.
374 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

Stress Analysis
Within QuickField package, the plane stress, the plane strain
and the axisymmetric stress models are available with both
isotropic and orthotropic materials. The plane stress model
is suitable for analyzing structures that are thin in the
out-of-plane direction, e.g., thin plates subject to in-plate
loading. Out-of-plane direct stress and shear stresses are
assumed to be negligible. The plane strain model is
formulated by assuming that out-of-plane strains are
negligible. This model is suitable for structures that are thick
in the out-of-plane direction.

Displacement, Strain and Stress

The displacement field is assumed to be completely defined
by the two components of the displacement vector  in each
point:
𝛿
{𝛿} = { 𝑥 } ⎯ for plane problems;
𝛿𝑦
𝛿
{𝛿} = { 𝑧 } ⎯ for axisymmetric
𝛿𝑟 problems.
 Stress Analysis 375

Only three components of strain and stress tensors are

independent in both plane stress and plane strain cases. The
strain-displacement relationship is defined as:
𝜕𝛿𝑥
𝜕𝑥
𝜀𝑥 𝜕𝛿𝑦
{𝜀} = { 𝜀𝑦 } =
𝛾𝑥𝑦 𝜕𝑦
𝜕𝛿𝑥 𝜕𝛿𝑦
+
{ 𝜕𝑦 𝜕𝑥 }
The corresponding stress components:
𝜎𝑥
{𝜎} = { 𝜎𝑦 }
𝜏𝑥𝑦
The axisymmetric problem formulation also includes the
out-of-plane direct strain , caused by the radial
deformation. The strain-displacement relationship is
defined as:
𝜕𝛿𝑧
𝜕𝑧
𝜀𝑧 𝜕𝛿𝑟
𝜀 𝜕𝑟
{𝜀} = { 𝜀𝑟 } =
𝜃 𝛿𝑟
𝛾𝑟𝑧 𝑟
𝜕𝛿𝑧 𝜕𝛿𝑟
{ 𝜕𝑟 + 𝜕𝑧 }
376 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

The corresponding stress components:

𝜎𝑧
𝜎
{𝜎} = { 𝜎𝑟 }
𝜃
𝜏𝑟𝑧
The equilibrium equations for the plane problems are:
𝜕𝜎𝑥 𝜕𝜏𝑥𝑦
+ = −𝑓𝑥
𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦
𝜕𝜏𝑥𝑦 𝜕𝜎𝑦
+ = −𝑓𝑦
{ 𝜕𝑥 𝜕𝑦
and for the axisymmetric problems are:
1 𝜕(𝑟𝜎𝑟 ) 𝜕𝜏𝑟𝑧
+ = −𝑓𝑟
{ 𝑟 𝜕𝑟 𝜕𝑧
1 𝜕(𝑟𝜏𝑟𝑧 ) 𝜕𝜎𝑧
+ = −𝑓𝑧
𝑟 𝜕𝑟 𝜕𝑧
where x, y and z, r are components of the volume force
vector.
For linear elasticity, the stresses are related to the strains
using relationship of the form
{} = [D]({} – {0}),
where [D] is a matrix of elastic constants, and 0 is the
initial thermal strain. The specific form of the matrix
depends on a particular problem formulation.
 Stress Analysis 377

For plane stress and isotropic material:

1 𝜈 0
𝐸 𝜈 1 0
[𝐷] = 2
[ 1 − 𝜈]
1−𝜈
0 0
2

For plane stress and orthotropic material:

−1
1 𝜐𝑦𝑥
− 0
𝐸𝑥 𝐸𝑦
𝜐𝑦𝑥 1
[𝐷] = − 0
𝐸𝑦 𝐸𝑦
1
0 0
[ 𝐺𝑥𝑦 ]
For plane strain and isotropic material:
𝜈
1 0
1−𝜈
𝐸(1 − 𝜈) 𝜈
[𝐷] = 1 0
(1 + 𝜈)(1 − 2𝜈) 1 − 𝜈
1 − 2𝜈
0 0
[ 2(1 − 𝜈)]
378 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

For plane strain and orthotropic material:

2 −1
1 𝜐𝑧𝑥 𝜐𝑦𝑥 𝜐𝑧𝑥 𝜐𝑧𝑦
− − − 0
𝐸𝑥 𝐸𝑧 𝐸𝑦 𝐸𝑧
2
𝜐 𝜐 𝜐 1 𝜐𝑧𝑦
[𝐷] = − 𝑦𝑥 − 𝑧𝑥 𝑧𝑦 − 0
𝐸𝑦 𝐸𝑧 𝐸𝑦 𝐸𝑧
1
0 0
[ 𝐺𝑥𝑦 ]
For axisymmetric problem and isotropic material:
[𝐷]
𝜈 𝜈
1 0
1−𝜈 1−𝜈
𝜈 𝜈
1 0
𝐸(1 − 𝜈) 1−𝜈 1−𝜈
=
(1 + 𝜈)(1 − 2𝜈) 𝜈 𝜈
1 0
1−𝜈 1−𝜈
1 − 2𝜈
0 0 0
[ 2(1 − 𝜈)]
For axisymmetric problem and orthotropic material:
−1
1 𝜐𝑟𝑧 𝜐𝜃𝑧
− − 0
𝐸𝑧 𝐸𝑟 𝐸𝜃
𝜐𝑟𝑧 1 𝜐𝜃𝑟
− − 0
𝐸𝑟 𝐸𝑟 𝐸𝜃
[𝐷] =
𝜐𝜃𝑧 𝜐𝜃𝑟 1
− − 0
𝐸𝜃 𝐸𝜃 𝐸𝜃
1
0 0 0
[ 𝐺𝑧𝑟 ]
 Stress Analysis 379

In all these equations E denotes Young's modulus of the

isotropic material; Ex, Ey, Ez, Er, and E are the Young's
moduli of the orthotropic material along the corresponding
axes;  is a Poisson's ratio for isotropic material; yx, zx, zy,
rz, z, r are the Poisson's ratios for orthotropic material;
Gxy and Gzr are the shear moduli.

Thermal Strain
Temperature strain is determined by the coefficients of
thermal expansion and difference of temperatures between
strained and strainless states. Components of the thermal
strain for plane stress and isotropic material are defined by
the following equation:
𝛼
{𝜀0 } = {𝛼 } Δ𝑇;
0
plane stress, orthotropic material:
𝛼𝑥
{𝜀0 } = {𝛼𝑦 } Δ𝑇;
0
plane strain, isotropic material:
𝛼
{𝜀0 } = (1 + υ) {𝛼 } Δ𝑇;
0
plane strain, orthotropic material:
𝛼𝑥 + υ𝑧𝑥 𝛼𝑧
{𝜀0 } = {𝛼𝑦 + υ𝑧𝑦 𝛼𝑧 } Δ𝑇;
0
380 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

axisymmetric problem, isotropic material:

𝛼
𝛼
{𝜀0 } = { } Δ𝑇;
𝛼
0

axisymmetric problem, orthotropic material:

𝛼𝑧
𝛼
{𝜀0 } = { 𝑟 } Δ𝑇;
𝛼𝜃
0
where  is a coefficient of thermal expansion for isotropic
material; x, y, z, r,  are the coefficients of thermal
expansion along the corresponding axes for orthotropic
material; T is the temperature difference between strained
and strainless states.

External Forces
QuickField provides way to specify concentrated loads,
surface and body forces. The concentrated loads are defined
at vertices as two components of the corresponding vector.
The surface forces at the edges of the model are specified by
the vector components or by the normal pressure. The body
forces are defined by their components within blocks of the
model. Each component of the body force vector can be
specified as a function of the coordinates. This feature can
be used, for example, to model centrifugal forces. The
normal pressure also can be a function of the coordinates
that is useful for hydrostatic pressure.
 Stress Analysis 381

Note. The concentrated load is specified by the force per

thickness unit for plane problems and by the total force
value for axisymmetric ones. In the last case the force can
be applied to the point at the axis of symmetry or distributed
along the circle around the axis.

Any surface force which is directed along the normal to the

surface can be described as a pressure. The pressure is
considered positive if it is directed inside region at its
outward boundary or from right to left at the inner boundary.
Left and right are referred relative to the edge intrinsic
direction, which is always counterclockwise for arcs and is
determined for line segments by the order of picking
vertices when the edge is created.

Restriction Conditions
Rigid constraint condition along one or both axes can be
specified at any vertex or along any edge of the model.
Prescribed displacement at restrained edge can be specified
as a linear function of the coordinates.
Elastic support condition describes a vertex subject to
springy force which is proportional to difference between
actual and predetermined displacement. The elastic support
condition is characterized by the predetermined
displacement and the support elasticity.
382 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

Note. For problem to be defined correctly the constraint or

elastic support conditions have to be specified in such a way
to exclude rigid body shifts and rotations of the model or its
parts without increasing the potential energy. Two
translational and one rotational degrees of freedom have to
be restricted for plane problem, in axisymmetric case only
shift in z-direction has to be excluded.

Calculated Physical Quantities

For the stress analysis problems the QuickField
postprocessor calculates the following set of physical
quantities:
Local quantities:
• The absolute value of displacement
𝛿 = √𝛿𝑥2 + 𝛿𝑦2 , or 𝛿 = √𝛿𝑧2 + 𝛿𝑟2
• Maximum and minimum principal stresses in the plane
of model 1 and 2;
• Normal and tangential stresses along coordinate axes x,
y and xy (z, r and rz in axisymmetric case);
• Normal stress in out-of-plane direction (z—for
xy-plane, —for rz-plane). For the plane stress
problems this component vanishes by the definition;
• Von Mises criterion (stored energy of
deformation):

1
σ𝑒 = √ [(𝜎1 − 𝜎2 )2 + (𝜎2 − 𝜎3 )2 + (𝜎3 − 𝜎1 )2 ]
2
 Stress Analysis 383

where 1, 2 and 3 denote the principal stresses in

descending order.
• Tresca criterion (maximum shear):
σe = 1 − 3;
• Mohr-Coulomb criterion:
σe = 1 − 3,
where  = + / −;
+ and − denote tensile and compressive allowable
stress.
• Drucker-Prager criterion:
2
√𝜒 − 𝜒 1 1 − √𝜒
𝜎𝑒 = (1 + √𝜒)𝜎𝑖 − 𝜎̅ + ( 𝜎̅)
1 + √𝜒 [𝜎− ] 1 + √𝜒
where

1
σ𝑖 = √ [(𝜎1 − 𝜎2 )2 + (𝜎2 − 𝜎3 )2 + (𝜎3 − 𝜎1 )2 ]; 𝜎̅
2
𝜎1 + 𝜎2 + 𝜎3
=
3
• Tsai-Hill failure index for orthotropic materials:
𝜎12 𝜎1 𝜎2 𝜎22 𝜏12
2
𝐶𝑡ℎ = 2− 2 + 2+ 2
𝑋1 𝑋1 𝑋2 𝑆12
where 1, 2 and 12 are computed stresses in the material
directions and,
X1 = X1T if 1>0; X1 = X1C if 1<0
X2 = X2T if 2>0; X2 = X2C if 2<0
384 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

S12 = S12+ if 12>0; S12 = S12- if 12<0

where X1T, X2T, X1C, X2C, S12+ and S12- are tensile,
compressive and shear allowable stresses.
Integral quantities:
• Total force acting on a particular volume

𝐅 = ∮ (𝜎 ∙ 𝐧)𝑑𝑠
𝑆
where σ is the stress tensor.
The integral is evaluated over the boundary of the
volume, and n denotes the vector of the outward unit
normal.
• Total torque of the forces acting on a particular
volume
1
𝐓= ∮ [𝐫 × (𝜎 ∙ 𝐧)]𝑑𝑠
2 𝑆
where r is a radius vector of the point of integration.
The torque vector is parallel to z-axis in the planar case,
and is identically equal to zero in the axisymmetric one.
The torque is considered relative to the origin of the
coordinate system. The torque relative to any other
arbitrary point can be obtained by adding extra term of
F  r0, where F is the total force and r0 is the radius vector
of the point.
 Coupled Problems 385

Coupled Problems
QuickField is capable of importing loads (distributed
sources) calculated in some problem into the problem of
another type. Following coupling types are supported:
• Heat transfer caused by Joule heat generated in the
transient or AC magnetic problem, or DC or AC
conduction problem.
• Thermal stresses based on a calculated temperature
distribution.
• Stress analysis of the system loaded by magnetic of
electric forces.
• Electrical conductivity depending on temperature.
• A special case of coupling allows for importing of the
field distribution in some steady state or transient
problem into another transient problem as its initial state.
This applies to transient magnetic and transient heat
transfer analysis.
In addition to imported loads, you can define any other loads
and boundary conditions, similar to non-coupled problem.
You can combine several coupling types in one problem.
E.g., after calculating currents distribution, electrostatic and
magnetic fields as separate problems based on the same
model file, you can calculate temperature distribution from
Joule heat and then find stresses caused by temperature and
magnetic and electric forces at once. However, such
problems are rather rare.
Further we will call the problem, from which the data are
being loaded, the source problem, and the problem, which
imports the data, the target problem.
386 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

There are several rules to follow with coupled problems:

• Both source and target problem must share a single
model file.
• Both problems must use the same formulation (plane or
axisymmetric).
• Source problem must be up-to-date when solving the
target problem.

Note. In spite of the requirement that coupled problems must

use the same model file, the geometrical region for the
problems need not coincide, i.e. some subregions those are
in use in one problem, could be excluded from consideration
in the other one.

Importing Joule Heat to Heat Transfer Problem

While importing data from DC or AC conduction problem
to heat transfer problem, heat sources due to Joule law are
assumed in all subregions included into consideration in
both source and target problems. In transient or AC
magnetic problems, Joule heat is generated in all
conductors. When importing Joule heat from transient
magnetic problem into transient heat transfer, both
processes are assumed to run synchronously. With this
feature, you can simulate time-dependent heat distribution
arising from time-dependent electric current distribution
(including eddy currents) in a magnetic device.
 Coupled Problems 387

Importing Temperature Field to Stress Analysis

Problem
While calculating thermal stresses, initial strains are
assumed in all subregions, which are included into
consideration in both problems and possess nonzero value
of thermal expansion coefficient (or at least one of its
components in anisotropic case). While importing the
temperature distribution from the transient problem, you can
choose the moment of time, the state at which you wish to
import.

Importing Magnetic Forces to Stress Analysis

Problem
While importing magnetic force to stress analysis problem:
• Body force is assumed in all subregions included into
consideration in both source and target problems, if those
subregions have nonlinear magnetic properties and/or
current density is defined (Lorentz force).
• Surface force is assumed at the boundaries separating
subregions with different magnetic properties,
boundaries with surface current, or outward boundaries
in sense of magnetic problem. The surface force is also
generated in the cases, when only one subregion, say, to
the left of the boundary is active in sense of magnetic
problem, and only the subregion to the right of it is active
in stress analysis problem.
While importing the magnetic forces from the transient
problem, you choose the moment of time, the state at which
you wish to import.
388 Chapter 11 Theoretical Description

Importing Electric Forces to Stress Analysis Problem

While importing electric force to stress analysis problem:
• Body force is assumed for all subregions included into
consideration in both source and target problems and
carrying distributed charge density.
• Surface force is assumed at the boundaries separating
subregions with different permittivity, boundaries with
surface charge, or outward boundaries in sense of electric
problem. The surface force is also generated in the cases,
when only one subregion, say, to the left of the boundary
is active in sense of electric problem, and only the
subregion to the right of it is active in stress analysis
problem.

Importing Magnetic State to DC or AC Magnetic

Problem
QuickField is able to remember the magnetic state of the
media in the source problem for further use in target
problems, where it is necessary to take into account the
actual magnetic saturation.
Quantity, transferred from DC Magnetic problem is the
value of magnetic permeability, calculated in every finite
element of the source problem.
• In non-linear materials the remembered value of
magnetic permeability is calculated using the magnetic
flux density in the source problem;
• In linear materials the remembered value of magnetic
permeability is taken from the corresponding block label
properties of the source problem.
 Coupled Problems 389

Target problem will become linear, and the magnetic

permeability values entered into the target problem
description will be ignored and replaced by imported data.
Magnetic state remembering is equivalent to the working
point fixation for magnetic system. This gives the possibility
to calculate the differential mutual and self-inductances of
multi-coil system in the target problems, by calculating the
magnetic flux induced by current in only one of coils at time.

Importing Temperature Field to AC Magnetic Problem

QuickField allows importing the calculated temperature
field into a problem of AC magnetics. This temperature field
may be then used for calculating the values of the electrical
conductivity for materials where the conductivity is
temperature-dependent.
390 Index

Index
object selection 271
. view 262, 265
zooming 270
.m3d (model) files 41 3D problem
cut plane 294, 297
2 cut plane normal direction
296
2D and 3D problems 253 electric charge 307
electric force 307

3
energy of electric field 307
field calculator 281
3D field presentation modes
2D sketch 251 283
extrusion 251, 254, 257 field view presentations
geometry model 256 284
import 255 finite element mesh 288
level 258, 259 integral values 282, 306
level, add 260 local values 282, 305
level, change 260 objects hiding 286
level, remove 261 result analysis 280
problem 250 results 282
problem definition 254, 255 results window 281
view manipulation 268, 285 results, colored surfaces
workflow 250 289
3D model results, isosurface plot 293
boundary conditions 280 results, scatter plot 292
camera 270 results, vector plot 290
cutting by plane 274 slice plot 300
import 262 solving 280
labels 276 XY plot 302
mesh spacing 277
object hiding 273
 391

A excluding from analysis 96,

108, 110, 113, 115, 117,
AC conduction 36, 357 121
data for 112 labeling 79
ac magnetic 169, 335 boundary
AC magnetic 32 inner 316
data for 101 outward 316
adaptive meshing 154 boundary condition 91, 318,
add-in 245 329, 340, 348, 355, 359, 364,
analysis capabilities 29 370
animation 173 constant potential 349, 353,
attraction distance 58 356, 360, 365
axisymmetric problem 315, constant temperature 372
319, 329, 330, 341 convection 371
Dirichlet 30, 31, 34, 37, 38,

B
318, 319, 320, 329, 330,
340, 341, 348, 349, 355,
background grid 85 359, 364
beam of charged particles 235 displacement 123, 124, 381
B-H curve 30, 31, 95, 317, 327 elastic support 381
block 54, 55, 316 electric potential 348, 355,
and DC conduction data 359, 364
110 heat flux 371
and electric charge 348 known temperature 370
and electric current 318, Neumann 30, 32, 34, 37,
328 38, 317, 319, 320, 327,
and electric data 115 329, 330, 331, 339, 340,
and electrostatic data 108 341, 348, 349, 355, 359,
and heat source 370 364, 370
and heat transfer data 117 periodic 124
and magnetic data 95 radiation 372
and mesh 82 zero flux 319, 330, 341
and stress analysis data 120
copying 60 C
CAD systems 87
392 Index

calculated quantities 158 conductivity, electric 110

calculator 174, 180 conductor
capacitance 35, 180, 185 connected in series 98, 104,
calculation 352 318, 328, 339
wizard 185 electric 33
capacitance matrix 245 floating 349
charge isolated See conductor:
electric 35, 185, 193, 194, floating
347, 348, 351, 352 contour
circuit 145 editing 188
element 146 convection 119, 371
coefficient coordinates
of convection 372 Cartesian 51
of emissivity 372 polar 51
of polarization 336 core loss 344
of thermal expansion 379, coupled problems 385
380 coupling 44
coercive force See force: electro-structural 35, 37,
coercive 388
coil electro-thermal 32, 33, 34,
spiral 318, 328, 339 36, 37, 386
color legend 235 initial magnetic state 32
color map 167 initial thermal state 39
conductivity magneto-structural 30, 32,
electric 31, 33, 36, 97, 101, 34, 387
102, 113, 164, 354, 385, remembering magnetic state
389, See also resistivity: 30
electric, See also remembering the magnetic
resistivity: electric state 388
temperature dependent thermo-structural 39, 122,
45, 111 387
thermal 39, 117, 126, 165, creating
369 circuit 146
temperature dependent label 94
118 problem 42
very high 372 criterion
 393

Drucker-Prager 123, 165, AC magnetics 101

383 DC conduction 110
Hill 123 electrostatics 107
Mohr-Coulomb 123, 165, heat transfer 117
383 magnetostatics 95
Tresca 165, 383 stress analysis 120
Tsai-Hill 166, 383 transient electric 115
von Mises 165, 382 transient magnetics 95
current 194, 317, 338 dc conduction 353
active 163, 164, 361, 366 DC conduction 35
alternating 32, 36, 335, 357 data for 110
apparent 163, 164, 361 dcf(dc conduction data) files 41
density 30, 31, 33, 34, 36, dec(ac conduction data) files
95, 98, 101, 163, 316, 41
337, 353 deformed shape 168
density, units of 51 des (electrostatic data) files 41
density, volume 337 dhe (ac magnetic data) files 41
displacement 366 dht (steady-state and transient
eddy 33, 159, 160, 325, heat transfer data) files 41
332, 336, 342 dielectric constant See electric
electric 36, 326, 337 permittivity
reactive 163, 164, 361 displacement 40, 165, 171,
source 33, 159, 160, 325, 374, 382
332, 336, 340, 342 boundary condition 123,
surface 319, 330, 341 124
time-dependent 31 components 375
total 33, 98, 159, 160, 332, prescribed 40
342 units of 51
volume 317, 318, 327, 328 dms (magnetostatic and
curve transient magnetic data) files
editing 126 41
dsa (stress analysis data) files
D 41
dtv (transient electric data) files
data 41
AC conduction 112 DXF file
394 Index

export 88 boundary condition 348,

import 87 355
electric conductivity 110, 363
E electric motor 29, 31, 32
electric permittivity 34, 108,
edge 54, 55, 56, 316, 320, 341 113, 115, 162, 164, 347, 351,
and AC conduction data 358, 361, 363, 366
113 electrostatic analysis 34, 347
and AC magnetic data 106 data for 107
and boundary condition emissivity coefficient 372
318, 329, 340, 350, 355, emitter 235
359, 364, 370, 381 energy
and DC conduction data of deformation 165
111 of electric field 35, 162,
and electric charge 348 185, 352
and electric current 354, of magnetic field 30, 32,
358, 363 34, 159, 162, 181, 323,
and electric data 116 333, 334, 343, 344
and electrostatic data 109 exporting
and heat source 370 DXF file 88
and heat transfer data 119
and magnetic data 99
and stress analysis data 123
F
copying 60 field 79
creating 57, 58 electric 325, 363
deleting 63 electric, transient 37
direction of 381 lines 167
labeling 79 local data 175
editing magnetic 316, 320, 321,
circuit 150 325, 330, 331, 341
contour 188 magnetic, uniform external
curve 126 30, 31, 33, 318, 329, 340
formula 129 picture 166, 172
label data 94 presentation methods 166
problem 42
electric
 395

source 55, 56, 79, 91, 194, moving 61

315, 317, 327, 338, 348, selecting 59
354, 358, 363 geometry
film coefficient See coefficient: describing 56
of convection
floating conductor 35
flux
H
density 29, 31, 33, 34, 126, hardware requirements 16
159, 161, 316, 318, 321, heat
329, 332, 337, 340, 342 specific 39
function 321 heat flow 165
lines 167 heat transfer 32, 34, 38, 368
linkage 29, 30, 31, 32, 183, coupling 44
194, 323, 324, 334 data for 117
thermal 39, 119, 194, 373 transient 38
boundary condition 371
density 371
force 193, 194 I
centrifugal 380 impedance 33, 34, 180, 187,
coercive 95, 317, 320, 321, 346, See also inductance
326, 327, 331 wizard 187
electric 35, 37, 40, 45, 351, importing
362, 367, 388 data 44
Lorentz 162, 343, 387 electric forces to stress
magnetic 29, 31, 32, 33, 34, analysis 388
40, 45, 322, 333, 345 Joule heat to heat transfer
Maxwell 344 analysis 386
formula magnetic forces to stress
editing 129 analysis 387
frequency 335, 338 temperatures to stress
angular 335, 358 analysis 387
inductance 30, 32, 34, 180,
G 181, 346
calculation 324
geometric objects wizard 181
copying 60 induction
396 Index

of electric field 162, 163, loading See also field source

164, 349, 351 AC magnetic analysis 33
remanent 321, 332 DC conduction analysis 36
inductor 32 electrostatic analysis 35
installing QuickField 16 force 40, 380
autorun 17 heat transfer analysis 39
integral quantities 192, 322, magnetostatic analysis 30
333, 343, 351, 357, 361, 373, pressure 40, 380, 381
384 thermal 40, 122, 171, 379
intensity local field data 175
of electric field 162, 163, copying to clipboard 176
164, 347, 356, 360, 365
of electric field, gradient of
162, 164
M
of magnetic field 29, 31, magnetic permeability 31, 33,
33, 126, 159, 161, 319, 95, 96, 101, 159, 161, 162,
322, 330, 332, 340, 342 317, 320, 322, 326, 331, 333,
isotherm 167 337, 342, 343
magnetostatic analysis 29, 316
J data for 95
material
Joule heat 32, 159, 200, 202, isotropic 40, 377, 379
333, 342, 343, 357, See orthotropic 30, 31, 33, 34,
power: losses 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 166,
377, 379, 383
L mesh 55, 56, 57, 153
building 79
label 55, 153 deleting 82
assigning data to 94 density 57, 80
assigning to geometric nonuniform 80
objects 79 refinement 154
copying data 143 spacing 54, 55, 56, 80, 85
deleting data 143 visibility 82, 85
editing data 94 visibility options 85
renaming 143 mod (model) files 41
legend 235 model
 397

creating 56 printing 241

editing 51, 54 picture, of the field 168
geometry 54 plane strain See strain: plane
plane of 315, 316 plane stress 382, See stress:
printing 90 plane
three-dimensional 250 Poisson's ratio 379
view options 85 polarization
coefficient of 336
O linear 336
potential
objects electric 162, 163, 164, 347,
manipulating 59 350, 352, 353, 356
ohmic losses See power: losses magnetic 30, 32, 34, 159,
316, 325, 337
P power
active 361, 366
particle 235 apparent 361
particles trajectory 235 losses 32, 33, 34, 35, 39,
password 19 45, 161, 163, 164, 342,
pbm (problem description) files 343, 361, 366
41 reactive 361, 366
peak value 335, 358 Poynting vector 162, 343, 344
periodic boundary conditions pressure 40, 123
124 hydrostatic 380
permanent magnet 29, 31, 95, problem
316, 317, 320, 321, 325, 327, creating 42
331, 338 database 41
equivalent current 320, 331 description 41
phase angle 335, 358 editing 42
physical quantities 321, 332, solving 153
342, 356, 360, 365 temperature units 127
heat transfer 373 three-dimensional See.
stress analysis 382 3D:problem
picture properties window
copying 89, 241 problem 29, 52
exporting 89
398 Index

R stress analysis 30, 32, 34, 40,

120, 170, 315, 374
radiation 119, 372 coupling 44
res (results) files 41 data for 120
resistivity presentation methods 168
electric 36, 37, 163, 357 with imported loads 385,
387, 388

S
superconductor 30, 32, 34, 320,
330, 341
selecting
circuit elements 149 T
vertices 81
serial conductor 104 tables
shear modulus 379 in postprocessor 173, 227
solenoid 29, 32 versus time 233
source temperature 38, 39, 45, 118,
thermal 34, 36, 37, 369, 126, 165, 368
371 ambient, for convection
specific heat 369 372
spiral coil 328 ambient, for radiation 372
Stephan-Boltsman constant 372 curve 118
strain 165 difference 171
components 375 terminology 27, 54
plane 40, 315 three-dimensional problem See
thermal 40, 376, 379 3D:problem
stress 165, 171 torque 193, 194
allowable 165, 383 of electric forces 35, 37,
axisymmetric problem 374 352, 362, 367
components 376 of magnetic forces 29, 31,
plane 40, 315 33, 322, 334, 344, 345
principal 40, 165, 168, 382, transformer 31
383 transient analysis
tensor 168 electric 363
thermal 39 transient analysis
von Mises 165, 382 heat transfer 38
data for 117
 399

initial condition 45 creating 58

magnetic 31, 44, 325 deleting 63
data for 95 labeling 79
plot versus time 230 voltage 33, 34, 37, 101, 327,
time layer selecting 172 338, See potential: electric
timing 47, 48 volume power 117

U W
units of length 50 window
document 28
V problem 27
tools 28
vertex 54, 56, 316, 317, 338 wizard 180
and AC conduction data capacitance 35, 185
114 impedance 34, 187
and AC magnetic data 107 inductance 30, 34, 181
and boundary condition
318, 329, 340, 355, 359,
364, 370, 381
X
and DC conduction data X-Y plot 173, 190
112 copying 241
and electric charge 348 printing 241
and electric current 354, versus time 230
358, 363
and electric data 116
and electrostatic data 109
Y
and heat source 369 Young's modulus 379
and heat transfer data 120 Young's modulus 121
and magnetic data 100
and mesh spacing 57, 80,
81 Z
and stress analysis data 124 zooming 84, 172
copying 60